Home

20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual

1. Control Data Table Address Description N20 1 Logic Status see Appendix D N20 2 Speed Feedback LSW N20 3 Speed Feedback MSW N20 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 660 DPI Data Out A1 LSW N20 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 660 DPI Data Out A1 MSW N20 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 661 DPI Data Out A2 LSW N20 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 661 DPI Data Out A2 MSW N20 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 662 DPI Data Out B1 LSW N20 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 662 DPI Data Out B1 MSW N20 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 663 DPI Data Out B2 LSW N20 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 663 DPI Data Out B2 MSW N20 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 664 DPI Data Out C1 LSW N20 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 664 DPI Data Out C1 MSW N20 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 665 DPI Data Out C2 LSW N20 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 665 DPI Data Out C2 MSW N20 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 666 DPI Data Out D1 LSW N20 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 666 DPI Data Out D1 MSW N20 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 667 DPI Data Out D2 LSW N20 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 667 DPI Data Out D2 MSW N20 20 Logic Command see Appendix D N20 21 Speed Reference LSW N20 22 Speed Refere
2. Logic Bits 31 15 14 13 12 11 10 Description Normal Stop 0 Not Normal Stop 1 Normal Stop Start 0 0 Not Start 1 Start Jog 1 2 0 Not Jog 1 Par 556 1 Jog 1 Clear Fault 9 0 Not Clear Fault 1 Clear Fault Unipolar 00 No Command Direction 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control Manual 0 Not Manual 1 Manual Reserved Accel Time 00 No Command 01 Use Accel Time 1 Par 535 10 Use Accel Time 2 Par 536 11 Use Present Time X x Decel Time 00 No Command 01 Use Decel Time 1 Par 537 10 Use Decel Time 2 Par 538 11 Use Present Time X Ref Select 000 No Command RefSelect2 001 Ref A Select Par 545 Ref Select 3 010 Ref B Select Par 550 011 Preset 3 Par 573 100 Preset 4 Par 574 101 Preset 5 Par 575 110 Preset 6 Par 576 111 Preset 7 Par 577 X Reserved 1 A Not Stop condition logic bit 0 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive A Not Stop condition logic bit 0 0 must first be present before a 1 Jog 1 Jog 2 condition will jog the drive A transition to a 0 will stop the drive 9 To perform this command the value must switch from 0 to 1 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P D 6 Logic Command Status Words Logic Bits Logic Status Word
3. o e ltem Name PORT MOD NETB After installing the adapter and applying power to the drive refer to Start Up Status Indications on page 2 6 for possible start up status indications and their descriptions 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Preparing for an Installation Chapter 2 Installing the Adapter This chapter provides instructions for installing the adapter in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive This adapter can also be installed in a DPI External Comms Kit In this case refer to Chapter 9 or the separate 20 XCOMM DC BASE Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO01 supplied with the kit Topic Page Preparing for an Installation 2 1 Setting the Web Pages Switch Series B only 2 2 Connecting the Adapter to the Drive 2 3 Connecting the Adapter to the Network 2 6 Applying Power 2 6 Commissioning the Adapter 2 8 Before installing the adapter e Make sure the Ethernet switch is the correct type A managed switch that supports IGMP snooping is usually recommended An unmanaged switch can be used instead if RSLogix 5000 version 18 or later is used and all devices on the network are configured for unicast I O For more details see the following documents EtherNet IP Media Planning and Installation Manual ODVA publication 148 EtherNet IP Network Infras
4. Using Datalinks 2 3 05 erem Rer A REIS Example Ladder Logic Program ControlLogix Example I e PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Using Explicit Messaging About Explicit Messaging lese Performing Explicit Messages lese ControlLogix Examples seeeeeeeeeee PEGS Examples eme at Dee E E ERI E KP NEC Es SEC500 Examples se eeu E aem ha wie dain mede e De MicroLogix 1100 1400 III Troubleshooting Understanding the Status Indicators llle PORE Statu s Indicator usta econ ne em os ue ole ae a MOD Status Indicator 5 cese ER A eee Na a Be ER A aa AE IL NETA Status Indicator cra cibo eb saute Baa EOS Pte reete NET B Status Indicator ba tee bU e ERU EARS Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items Viewing and Clearing eee eens Viewing the Adapter s Web Pages Accessing the Adapter s Web Home Process Display Pop up TCP IP Configuration Web Configure E mail Notification Web Page DPI Dev
5. 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 24 Using Explicit Messaging PLC 5 Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Figure 6 27 Read Single Message Configuration Screens 3 MSG MG13 0 2 Elements Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop To Address 10 91 100 79 From Device From Port This PLCS 2 To Address Type EtherNet IP Device str 3 MSG MG13 0 2 Elements MultiHop This PLC 5 Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read Data Table Address N40 0 Size in Elements 2 Port Number 2 Target Device Data Table Address N150 6 MultiHop Yes Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO To be retried Awaiting Execution EW Continuous Run CO Error ER Message done DN Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Error Description No errors Error Error 0 The following table identifies the data that is required each box to configure a message to read a parameter General Tab Example Value Description Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read Controller type and command type for controller to read data from the drive Data Table Address N40 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Size in Elements 2
6. UL ES C 22 DPI Alatm Objects Maye le RUE VPE Bae iat ae e ers C 24 DPI Diagnostic Object 0 eee teenies C 26 DPL Time Object entren beens ies Medd b bur etai Stes C 28 Host DPI Parameter Object 0 0 2 C 30 TCP IP Interface Object x oec ee cane eme reme ele eee C 36 Ethetnet Link Object eque epu owes m edad UN wee C 37 Logic Command Status Words PowerFlex 70 70EC PowerFlex 700 700VC and PowerFlex 700H Drives D 1 PowerElex 700S Drives i ie te reet on ce eil e 3 lg 8 gee Gea erbe Fon een D 3 PowerFlex 750 Series Drives D 5 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P iv Table of Contents 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P About This Manual Preface Topic Page Related Documentation P 1 Rockwell Automation Support P 2 Conventions Used in This Manual _ P 3 Related Documentation For Refer to Publication EtherNet IP EtherNet IP Media Planning and Installation Manual 0 ODVA Pub 148 EtherNet IP Network Infrastructure Guidelines ODVA Pub 35 EtherNet IP Performance Application Solution ENET AP001 DriveExplorer http www ab com drives driveexplorer and DriveExplorer online help 2 DriveTools SP includes DriveExecutive http www ab com drives drivetools and DriveExecutive online help 2
7. 3 6 Setting the Data Rate liess esee e eh re 3 8 Setting the I O Configuration 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 3 8 Selecting Master Slave or 3 9 Setting the Reference 8 3 14 Setting a Fault Action sie oerrint on cee EE E SR EI RE eee ee 3 15 Setting Web Access Control 3 16 Resetting the 3 17 Viewing the Adapter Status Using 3 18 Flash Updating the Adapter 0 0 eee eee ee eee 3 18 Configuring the I O Using RSLmnx Classic tambien ded ate eins 4 1 ControlLogix Examples i2 e xe Bx perc SAP Pria es 4 2 Limitations When Using PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 4 21 PDC 5 Example oce p mW ALS IR EIS a E 4 22 SEC 500 Example 1r bie ee tup bep im 4 30 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example sseeeeeee III 4 38 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P ii Table of Contents Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Appendix A Using the I O About I O Messaging o ee Understanding the I O Image sseseeeeeeeee II Using Logic Command Status leseseeeeeeeee I Using Reference Feedback
8. CER 5 Using Explicit Messaging 6 55 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service Figure 6 67 Read Parameter Message Configuration Screens x3 MSG MG13 0 1 Elements Data Table Address Receive Target Device Extended Routing Info File RIx Service Ins Add Hop amp MSG MG13 0 1 Elements Send Data Receive Data DER Del Remove Hop From Device To Address From Port To Address MultiHop Send Data Receive Data This Controller This MicroLogix Channel 1 Integral Channel 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 79 Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO Communication Command CIP Generic Break Connection BK N40 0 Size in Bytes Receive 4 Message Timeout Local Remote p Local MultiHop R1x15 0 Read Parameter Class hex Service Code dec Awaiting Execution EW Send Error ER Message done DN Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Error Error Code Hex 0 15 Instance hex 3 dec 3 Attribute hex 1 dec 1 Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in eac
9. PowerFlex 20 HIM A3 A5 C3S C5S PowerFlex 20 HIM A3 A5 C3S C5S HIM Quick Reference 20HIM QR001 PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 C6S HIM PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 C6S HIM Human Interface Module User Manual PowerFlex 70 70EC Drive PowerFlex 70 User Manual 20A UMO001 PowerFlex 70 700 Reference Manual PowerFlex 70EC 700VC Reference Manual PFLEX RMO001 PFLEX RM004 PowerFlex 700 700VC Series A Drive PowerFlex 700VC Series B Drive PowerFlex 700 Series A User Manual PowerFlex 700 Series B User Manual PowerFlex 70 700 Reference Manual PowerFlex 70EC 700VC Reference Manual 20B UM001 20B UM002 PFLEX RMO001 PFLEX RM004 PowerFlex 700H Drive PowerFlex 700H Installation Instructions PFLEX INO06 PowerFlex 700H Programming Manual 20C PM001 PowerFlex 7005 Drive PowerFlex 7005 with Phase Control Installation Manual Frames 1 6 20D IN024 PowerFlex 700S with Phase Control Installation Manual Frames 9 and 10 PFLEX INO06 PowerFlex 700S with Phase Control User Manual All Frame Sizes 20D UM001 PowerFlex 7005 with Phase Control Reference Manual PFLEX RM002 PowerFlex 700S with Phase II Control Installation Manual Frames 1 6 20D IN024 PowerFlex 7005 with Phase Control Installation Manual Frames 9 14 PFLEX INO06 PowerFlex 7005 with Phase Il Control Programming Manual All Frame Sizes 20D PM001 PowerFlex 7005 with Phase Il Control Reference Manual PFLEX RM003 PowerFlex 700L Liquid Cooled AC Drive Power
10. Source Length 30 Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Destination Scattered Write Response The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path My PowerFlex Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Scattered Write Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder 3 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 4 n this example we are writing to five parameters Each parameter being written to requires an array of three INT registers Therefore a controller tag was created with its Data Type field set to INT 15 Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for this example 30 bytes for an INT 15 array Scattered write messages always assume that every para
11. Word 0 Parameter Number Parameter Number 1 Word Parameter Value LSW 2 Pad Word Parameter Value MSW 3 Parameter Number Parameter Number 4 Pad Word Parameter Value LSW 5 Pad Word Parameter Value MSW 6 Parameter Number Parameter Number 7 Pad Word Parameter Value LSW 8 Pad Word Parameter Value MSW 9 Parameter Number Parameter Number 10 Pad Word Parameter Value LSW 11 Pad Word Parameter Value MSW 12 Parameter Number Parameter Number 13 Pad Word Parameter Value LSW 14 Pad Word Parameter Value MSW 63 Parameter Number Parameter Number 64 Pad Word Parameter Value LSW 65 Pad Word Parameter Value MSW Figure 6 65 Data Structures for Scattered Write Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number 1 Parameter Value LSW 1 Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW 2 Pad Word 3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number 4 Parameter Value LSW 4 Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW 5 Pad Word 6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number 7 Parameter Value LSW 7 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW 8 Pad Word 9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number 10 Parameter Value LSW 10 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW 11 Word 12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number 13 Parameter Value LSW 13 Word 14 Parameter Value MSW 14 Pad Word 63 Parameter Number 63
12. 0 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Continuous Run o Error ER p Message done DN This PLC 5 Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Write Data Table Address 20 0 Size in Elements 1 Port Number 2 Target Device Data Table Address MultiHop Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN 0 2 MSG Rung 42 0 MG10 0 Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This PLC5 2 EtherNet IP Device str 109110079 Setting Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Write The controller type and command type for the controller to write the control timeout value to the drive Data Table Address N20 0 An unused controller data table address containing the control timeout value to be written Size in Elements 2 1 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Port Number 2 Controller port to which the network is connected Target Device data for adapter drive Data Table Address 9 N42 3 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive MultiHop Yes Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the adapter drive When Yes is selected a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected
13. 2 In the Address box type the IP address of the adapter and then press ENTER The adapter web Home Page Figure 8 1 should appear Important Using the browser s View Refresh function will always re display the adapter Home Page while viewing any of the adapter s other web pages Figure 8 1 Adapter Web Home Page Example Edi View Favorites Tools x8 http 10 91 100 79 Allen Bradley WX meee 3 Process display TCP IP configurati Configure e mail n Gi Browse DPI device Online user manuz Software tools We Launch my DriveE Launch my DriveE O E mail technical s s mie EL Br Adapter 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Revision 3 004 IP Address 10 91 100 79 Ethernet Address MAC 00 00 BC 08 7C E2 Serial Number 0x400186E2 Status Operational I O Connection Status No connection Host PowerFlex 70 EC 240V 4 2A Revision 3 002 Status Stopped Commanded Direction Forward Rotation Direction Forward 0 0 Hz Process Status 0 00 Amps 333 2 Bus VDC Copyright 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Title Bar on Adapter Web Pages The title bar appears on the adapter Home Page and all of the adapter s other web pages The title bar consists of three elements as shown in Figure 8 1 Title Bar Element Allen Bradley logo Description This logo is a hyperlink Click it to view the ab com web Home Page Adapter Title
14. Control Block N10 0 Control Block Length 51 Setup Screen N10 0 N10 0 JE QU DN EN N10 0 ER 5 Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen General Tab Box This Controller Configuring the I O 4 33 Figure 4 35 SLC 500 Message Configuration Screens for the Control Timeout 3 MSG Rung 2 0 N10 0 I MultiHop Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO To be retried Awaiting Execution EW Continuous Run Error ER Message done DN This Controller Communication Command 500CPU write Data Table Address N20 0 Size in Elements 1 Channel 7 Target Device b 1 Local Remote Local MultiHop Message Timeout Data Table Address Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Waiting for Queue Space DER i3 MSG Rung 42 0 N10 0 Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address To Address This Processor 1 EtherNet IP Device ste 10 91 100 78 Setting Communication Command This setting is unavailable grayed out and is established when the message is created in the ladder rung Data Table Address N20 0 An unused controller data table address containing the control timeout valu
15. p e If cycling power does not correct the problem the adapter parameter settings may have been corrupted Reset defaults and reconfigure the adapter f resetting defaults does not correct the problem flash the adapter with the latest firmware release Steady Red The adapter has failed the hardware test e Cycle power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit Replace the adapter Flashing Green The adapter is operational but is not transferring l O data to a controller Place the scanner in RUN mode Program the controller to recognize and transmit I O to the adapter e Configure the adapter for the program in the controller e Normal behavior if no DPI I O is enabled Steady Green The adapter is operational and transferring I O data to a controller 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P No action required Troubleshooting 7 3 A Status Indicator This red green bicolor LED indicates the status of the network connection as shown in the table below Status Cause Corrective Actions Off The adapter is not powered the e Securely connect the adapter to the drive using the Internal adapter is not properly connected to Interface ribbon cable and to the network using an Ethernet cable the network the adapter needs an IP address or BOOTP is enabled e Correctly connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector e Seta unique
16. 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service A Custom scattered read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters This read message example reads the values of these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 003 Output Current e Parameter 007 Output Current e Parameter 006 Output Voltage e Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk e Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage e Parameter 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data e Parameter 017 Analog In1 Value e Parameter 260 Analog 1 0 Value Refer to DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 50 Example Ladder Logic to Read Multiple Parameters B3 0 EEM J E EtherNet IP Explicit Message I CEN 2 Control Block N15 0 CDN 5 Control Block Length 58 CER Setup Screen lt 6 43 Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 6 51 Custom Scatter
17. 240V 4 24 Parameters via Datalinks Parameters Web Update v DriveStatus OutputFreq OutputCurrent 3 OutputCurrent 3 DriveLogicRst CommandedFreq V Use Network Reference AccelTime 140 DecelTimei 142 DCBusVottage 12 FaultiCode 243 5 HighResRef 308 HighResRef 308 V Sort Input Output selection lists by Parameter Name DANGER Unexpected hazardous motion of machinery may occur when improperly using software to configure a drive Parameter names selected for the Input and Output Data appear as member names in the drive Madule Defined Data Types and defines necessary Datalink parameters in the RSLogix 5000 project Actual data transfer between controller and drive is determined by Datalink parameters You must download configuration to the dive to ensure that the controller drive and communication module configurations are consistent with each other OK Cancel Help Cock J eJ Configuring the I O 4 7 TIP To get the latest RSLogix 5000 drive Add On Profile go to www ab com support abdrives webupdate In the Module Definition screen edit the following information Box Revision Setting The major and minor revision of the firmware database in the drive If the drive s major and minor revision is not available the drive database is not installed on your computer To get the correct
18. 55 Peer A Output Peer B Output Selects the source of the Peer I O output data The adapter transmits this data to the network Important Changes to these parameters are ignored when Parameter 51 Peer Out Enable is 1 On Peer Out Enable Determines if Peer I O output is on or off Peer Out Time Sets the minimum time that an adapter will wait when transmitting data to a peer Important Changes to these parameters are ignored when Parameter 51 Peer Out Enable is 1 On Peer Out Skip Sets the maximum time that an adapter will wait when transmitting data to a peer The value of Parameter 52 Peer Out Time is multiplied by the value of this parameter to set the time Important Changes to these parameters are ignored when Parameter 51 Peer Out Enable is 1 On Access Control This parameter is only available for Series A version 2 003 or earlier adapters Sets the access to the Web interface and Web configurable e mail notification feature Bit Definition Adapter Parameters B 7 Details Default 0 Off Default 0 Off Values 0 Off 1 Cmd Ref 2 Datalink A Input 3 Datalink B Input 4 Datalink C Input 5 Datalink D Input 6 Datalink A Output 7 Datalink B Output 8 Datalink C Output 9 Datalink D Output Type Read Write Reset Required No Default 0 Off Values 0 Off 1 Read Write Reset Required No Default 10 00
19. Copy File Source Anlg Out1 Hi Dest My PowerFlex Drive O Data 8 Length 2 For PowerFlex 750 Series drives the destination tag can be a REAL or DINT Make the destination tag the same data type as the parameter being read For information on Datalink scaling see page 5 8 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 18 Using the I O PowerFlex 70 EC PowerFlex 750 Series 20 COMM E PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Device Drive Drive Adapter Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings The following drive and adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section Parameter Value Description 90 Speed Ref A Sel 22 DPI Port 5 Assigns 20 COMM E to be used for the Reference 300 Data In A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 301 Data In A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 302 Data In B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 303 Data In B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 304 Data In C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 305 Data In C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 306 Data In D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 307 Data In D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 310 Data Out A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 311 Data Out A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 312 Data Out
20. Figure 9 1 Mounting and Connecting the Adapter Comms Kit Comms Kit Enclosure Cover Enclosure Base with adapter mounted inside 15 24 cm 6 in Internal Interface Cable connects power supply board in enclosure base to adapter For more information refer to the DPI External Communications Kit Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO01 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 9 2 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE I O Board Option 20 XCOMM IO OPT1 Understanding the I O Image Drive I O Option 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P The I O Board option when installed in the DPI External Comms Kit can be used with the adapter Series B firmware version 3 xxx or later required The I O Board provides 6 DC inputs and 2 Relay outputs for use by a controller on the network Figure 9 2 Connector Function Descriptions 9 10 11 pil ji w dm IN2 1 01 COM 01 NO i INPUT COM For more information refer to the O Board Option Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO02 The data for the optional I O Board is sent over the I O connection using Datalink D When the optional I O Board is installed in the DPI External Comms Kit Datalink D is dedicated for this function only and is not available for other uses When the adapter detects the
21. From Port To Address To Address This MicroLogix MultiHop Send Data Receive Data iis Controller Channel 1 Integral Channel 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 79 DER Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO Communication Command CIP Generic Break Connection BK Target Device Message Timeout 3 Extended Routing Info File RIx Service Write Parameter Size in Bytes Receive N A Send N50 0 Awaiting Execution EW Send 2 Error ER Message done DN Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Local Remote Local MultiHop ves RITE Class hex Service Code hex dec Error Error Code Hex 0 Instance hex 8 dec Attribute hex 7 dec Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Comm Command CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address N50 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination
22. Ins Add Hop P Send Data Receive Data Del Remove Hop From Device To Address FromPort To Address This SLC500 EEM N16 0 58 Elements Send Data Receive Data This Controller Channel 1 Size in Words Receive Data 15 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 79 Message Control Bits Ignore if timed out 0 Send Data Awaiting Execution EW 15 Data Table Address Receive Data N80 0 Continuous Run CO Send Data INSO 0 Target Device Message Timeout x1 sec Service Custom Service Code hex Error ER Done Transmitting ST Enabled EN Waiting for Queue Space MultiHop Class hex 147 Error Instance hex 0 Attribute hex 10 Error Code hex Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write multiple parameters General Tab Example Value Description Size in Words 15 Number of words to be transferred Each word size is a 16 bit integer Data Table Address N80 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the sourc
23. J ER 4 Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen General Tab Box This Controller data for Mi Configuring the I O 4 43 Figure 4 45 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Status Feedback and Datalink Out 3 MSG Rung 42 2 MG11 0 Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO Break Connection Awaiting Execution EW This Controller Channel 1 Integral Communication Command Data Table Address Size in Elements 500CPU Read N20 1 Error ER Message done DN Target Device Message Timeout Data Table Address 5 E yao Local MultiHop RI9 1 i MSG Rung 42 2 MG11 0 Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Local Remote Routing Information File General Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This Processor 1 EtherNet IP Device str _ 109110079 Setting croLogix 1100 Channel 1 integral Controller port to which the network is connected Communication Command 500CPU Read The controller type and command type for the controller to read or write data Since the MicroLogix 1100 is part of the SLC 500 controller family the SOOCPU controller type was selected The Read command type was selected to read data from the drive
24. Output Voltage Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage Parameter 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data Parameter 017 Analog In1 Value Parameter 260 Analog InO Value Refer to DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for parameter numbering Figure 6 8 Example Scattered Read Request Data for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Name Description Scattered Read Request INT 15 Scaltered Read Request U 1 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Request 1 o INT Pad Word Scattered Read Request 2 o INT Pad Word Scattered Read Request 3 3 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Request 4 0 INT Pad Word Scattered Read Request 5 0 INT Pad Word Scattered Read Riequest 5 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Request 7 0 INT Pad Word Scattered Read Request 8 0 INT Pad word Scattered Read Request 3 12 INT Parameter Number decimal _ Scattered Read Request 10 0 INT Pad Word Scattered Read Request 11 0 INT Pad Word Scattered Read Request 12 17 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Request 13 o INT Pad Word Scattered Read Request 14 o INT Pad Word Figure 6 9 Example Scattered Read Request Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Name amp Value Data Type Description Scattered Read Request INT 15 Scattered Requ
25. Peer Inp Addr Peer Inp Addr 2 Peer Inp Addr 3 Peer Inp Addr 4 Important The Peer Inp Addr must be on the same subnet as the 20 COMM E Refer to IP Addresses on page G 5 for more information Changes to these parameters are ignored when Parameter 47 Peer Inp Enable is 1 On Peer Inp Timeout Sets the time out for a Peer I O connection If the time is reached without the adapter receiving consuming a message the adapter will respond with the action specified in Parameter 41 Peer Fit Action In an adapter receiving consuming Peer I O the value of this parameter must be greater than the product of the value of Parameter 52 Peer Out Time in the adapter transmitting producing Peer I O multiplied by the value of Parameter 53 Peer Out Skip in the adapter transmitting producing Peer I O Peer Inp Enable Determines if Peer I O input is on or off Peer Inp Status Displays the status of the consumed Peer I O input connection Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum 255 Type Read Write Reset Required No Default 10 00 Seconds Minimum 0 01 Seconds Maximum 10 00 Seconds Type Read Write Reset Required No Default 0 Off Values 0 Off 1 On Type Read Write Reset Required No Default 0 Off Values 0 Off 1 Waiting 2 Running 3 Faulted Type Read Only Parameter No Name and Description 49 50 51 52 53 54
26. 31 15 14 13 12 Command x Run Ready Description 0 Not Ready to Run Par 933 1 Ready to Run Active 0 Not Active 1 Active Command Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Accelerating 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating Decelerating 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating Alarm 0 No Alarm Par 959 and 960 1 Alarm Fault 0 No Fault Par 952 and 953 1 Fault At Setpt Spd 0 Not at Setpoint Speed 1 At Setpoint Speed Manual 0 Manual Mode Not Active 1 Manual Mode Active Spd Ref ID 0 Spd Ref ID 1 Spd Ref ID 2 Spd Ref ID 3 Spd Ref ID 4 00000 Reserved 00001 Auto Ref A Par 545 00010 Auto Ref B Par 550 00011 Auto Preset Speed 3 Par 573 00100 Auto Preset Speed 4 Par 574 00101 Auto Preset Speed 5 Par 575 00110 Auto Preset Speed 6 Par 576 00111 Auto Preset Speed 7 Par 577 01000 Reserved 01001 Reserved 01010 Reserved 01011 Reserved 01100 Reserved 01101 Reserved 01110 Reserved 01111 Reserved 10000 Man Port 0 10001 Man Port 1 10010 Man Port 2 10011 Man Port 3 10100 Man Port 4 10101 Man Port 5 10110 Man Port 6 10111 Reserved 11000 Reserved 11001 Reserved 11010 Reserved 11011 Reserved 11100 Reserved 11101 Man Port 13 Emb ENET 11110 Man Port 14 Drive Log
27. Accel Rate 00 No Command 01 Accel Rate 1 Command Par 140 10 Accel Rate 2 Command Par 141 11 Hold Accel Rate Decel Rate 00 No Command 01 Decel Rate 1 Command Par 142 10 Decel Rate 2 Command Par 143 11 Hold Decel Rate Reference Select 3 000 No Command 001 Ref A Select Par 90 010 Ref B Select Par 93 011 Preset 3 Par 103 100 Preset 4 Par 104 101 Preset 5 Par 105 110 Preset 6 Par 106 111 Preset 7 Par 107 1 A 0 Not Stop condition logi c 0 must first be present before a MOP Decrement 1 Start condition will start the dri Start command A 1 will start the drive but returning to O will not stop the drive This Start will not function if a digital input parameters 361 366 0 Not Decrement 1 Decrement ive The Start command acts as a momentary is programmed for 2 Wire Control option 7 8 or 9 This Reference Select will not function if a digital input parameters 361 366 is programmed for Speed Sel 1 2 or 3 option 15 16 or 17 Note that Reference Select is Exclusive Ownership see drive User Manual for more information 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P D 2 Logic Command Status Words Logic Status Word Logic Bits 15 14 13 Status x Ready Description 0 Not
28. Ins Add Hop Send Data Receive Data Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This SLCS00 H EEM N13 0 58 Elements MuliHop Send Data Receive Data This Controller Channel 1 Size in Words Receive Data 2 Send Data 0 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 73 Message Control Bits Data Table Address Receive Data N40 0 Send Data N A Target Device Message Timeout x1 sec Service Generic Get Attribute Single Class hex 33 Instance hex 3 Attribute hex 8 deck 147 3 dec 8 Error Description No errors Service Code hex MuliHop Error Ignore if timed out TO Awaiting Execution EW Continuous Run CO Error ER Done DN Transmitting ST Enabled EN Waiting for Queue Space Error Code hex The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description Size in Words 29 Number of words to be transferred Each word size is a 16 bit integer Data Table Address N40 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is
29. My PowerFlex Drive l Data 3 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 4 My PowerFles Drive l Data 5 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 5 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 7 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 8 My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 9 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 10 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 11 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 12 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 13 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 14 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 15 My _PowerFlex_Drive Data 16 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 17 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 18 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 19 F My PowerFles Drive l Data 20 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 21 My PowerFlex Drive My PowerFlex Drive D Data My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 0 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 1 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 2 My PowerFlex Drive D Data 3 My PowerFlex Drive D Data 4 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 5 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 6 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 8 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 3 My PowerFlex Drive D Data 10 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 11 AB ETHER INT 22 o INT o INT 1295 INT o INT 25000 INT o INT 26970 INT 17432 INT 15562 INT 5457 INT 0 INT 16840 INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT 0 0 0 0 0 o INT 0 0 0 0 AB ETHER INT 20 o INT o INT 25000 INT o INT o INT 16680 INT 4430 INT 1909 2621 INT 16664 INT o INT o INT Input Image Pad Word Pad Word Logic S
30. N50 0 Continuous Run Error ER Target Device Done DN Message Timeout 1 sec Transmitting 5T MultiHop Enabled Service Generic Set Attribute Single Service Code hex Waiting for Queue Space Class 93 _ deck 147 Instance hex 8C dec 140 Attribute hex 8 8 Error Code hex 0 Error Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description Size in Words 1 Number of words to be transferred Each word size is a 16 bit integer Data Table Address N50 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the source file Service 1 Generic Set Attribute Single Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 2 140 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number Attribute 9 9 or 10 Dec Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Cod
31. Output parameters by name and then by number and enables parameter search by selection name When unchecked sorts the assigned parameters by parameter number and then by name and enables parameter search by number Use Network Reference Conveniently selects the speed reference for the drive to come from the network This box is checked by default When a 32 bit parameter is selected for Input Data or Output Data for a drive with 16 bit Datalinks two contiguous Datalinks for example x1 and x2 where x A B C or D are automatically assigned as a pair to represent that parameter See Datalink examples in Figure 4 9 For more information on Datalinks see Using Datalinks on page 5 7 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 8 Configuring the I O On the Module Definition screen notice that the automatically assigned controller tags DriveStatus OutputFreq DriveLogicRslt and CommandedFreq are always used When a Datalink is enabled the following 20 COMM E adapter I O parameters are automatically set Parameter 23 DPI I O Cfg turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM E adapter will communicate that Datalink s information with the drive Parameter 35 M S Input turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM E adapter will input that Datalink s information from the controller Parameter 36 M S Output turns on the enabled Datalink bit so t
32. Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 17 The NET A status indicator will be steady green or flashing green if the IP address is correctly configured and is connected to an operating ethernet network Configuring the Adapter 3 7 Setting a Subnet Mask Using Parameters 1 Verify that Parameter 03 BOOTP is set to 0 Disabled This parameter must be set to Disabled to configure the subnet mask using the adapter parameters 2 Setthe value of Parameters 08 Subnet Cfg 1 through 11 Subnet Cfg 4 to the desired value for the subnet mask Figure 3 7 Example Subnet Cfg 1 LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device 20 COMM E Parameter 08 Subnet Cfg 1 0 lt gt 255 Default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Subnet Cfg 1 Subnet Cfg 2 Subnet Cfg 3 Subnet Cfg 4 3 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 17 Setting a Gateway Address for the Adapter Using Parameters 1 Verify that Parameter 03 BOOTP is set to 0 Disabled This parameter must be set to Disabled to configure the gateway address using the adapter parameters 2 Setthe value of Parameters 12 Gateway Cfg 1 through 15 Gateway Cfg 4 to the IP address of the gateway device Figure 3 8 Example Gateway Cfg 1 LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device 20 COMM E Parameter 12 Gateway Cfg 1 0 lt gt 255 Default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Gateway Cfg i Ga
33. e Class I O connections for example from a ControlLogix controller e Explicit messaging where connected is chosen for example in a checkbox in RSLogix 5000 e DriveExecutive connections to the drive The following activities DO NOT use a CIP connection e Explicit messaging based control using PCCC or the Register or Assembly objects including the PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 examples in Chapter 4 e Explicit messaging where connected is NOT chosen which is typically the default e DriveExplorer connections to the drive Requested Packet Interval RPI 5 ms minimum Packet Rate Up to 400 total I O packets per second 200 in and 200 out Drive Protocol DPI Data Rates 125 kbps or 500 kbps Electrical Consumption Drive 350 mA at 5 VDC supplied by the host drive or DPI External Comms Kit Network None 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P A 2 Specifications Mechanical Environmental Regulatory Compliance 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Dimensions Height 19 mm 0 75 inches Length 86 mm 3 39 inches Width 78 5 mm 3 09 inches Weight 85 g 3 oz Temperature Operating 10 50 C 14 122 F Storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Atmosphere Important The adapter must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or
34. eoce 2 54 cm 1 in Internal Interface cable 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Installing the Adapter 2 5 Figure 2 3 Mounting and Grounding the Adapter Drive J 0 9 Nem 8 0 Ibe 4 Places Adapter RC Internal Interface Cable folded behind the adapter and in front of the drive PowerFlex 70 All Frame Sizes Ground Tab Detail Adapter mounts in drive SEM QNS P 1012 11 0 9 Nem TEE 8 0 Ibein f i s 4 Places Verify metal ground tab is bent 90 and EL i T is under the adapter before tightening E 7 screw After tightening the screw verify E continuity exists between the head of E the screw and drive ground ber PowerFlex 700 Frames 0 and 1 PowerFlex 700 Frames 2 and Larger PowerFlex 700S Frames 0 and 1 PowerFlex 700S Frames 2 through 6 Adapter mounts on door Adapter mounts in drive Ground Tab Detail 0 9Nem 8 0 Ibe in 4 Places Verify metal ground tab is bent 90 and o
35. 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of timers in the device Instance 1 is always reserved for a real time clock although a device may not support it The total number of timers can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Real Time Clock Predefined not always supported 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Timer 1 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 3 Timer 2 Ox4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 B 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 DPI Port 6 Ox5C00 0x5FFF 7 23552 24575 Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF 7 24576 25599 DPI Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 7 25600 26623 Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 7 26624 27647 DPI Port 10 0x6C00 0x6FFF 27648 28671 DPI Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 DPI Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 DPI Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 7 30720 31743 DPI Port 14 1 These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of timers in the object excluding the real time clock that is predef
36. 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Diagnostic Item 1 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Drive Diagnostic Item 2 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 0x4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Adapter Diagnostic Item1 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 DPI Port 6 0x5C00 0x5FFF 7 23552 24575 Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF 24576 25599 DPI Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 7 25600 26623 DPI Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 DPI Port 10 0x6C00 0x6FFF 7 27648 28671 DPI Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 7 28672 29695 DPI Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 7 29696 30719 DPI Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 7 30720 31743 DPI Port 14 1 These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD 1 2 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of diagnostic items in the device 3 Get ENUM Offset WORD DPI ENUM object instance offset 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P EtherNet IP Objects C 27 Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All Information STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 19 CONTAINER Value CONTAINER Minimum
37. 29 1 Jog using Jog Speed 1 Par 29 Clear Fault 0 Not Clear Fault 1 Clear Fault Unipolar Direction 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control X Reserved X Jog 2 0 Not Jog using Jog Speed 2 Par 39 1 Jog using Jog Speed 2 Par 39 x Current Limit Stop 0 Not Current Limit Stop 1 Current Limit Stop X Coast Stop 0 Not Coast to Stop 1 Coast to Stop X Reserved X Reserved X Spd Ref Sel0 Bits X Spd Ref 14143 12 Spd Ref Sel 0 0 SpdRefA Par 27 0 O 1 Spd Ref B Par 28 0 1 0 Preset 2 Par 15 0 1 1 Preset3 16 1 0 0 Preset 4 Par 17 1 0 1 Preset 5 Par 18 1 1 0 Preset 6 Par 19 1 1 1 Preset 7 Par 20 Reserved 1 A Not Stop condition logic bit 0 0 logic bit 8 0 and logic bit 9 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive To perform this command the value must switch from 0 to 1 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P D 4 Logic Command Status Words Logic Status Word Phase II Control Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Status Description X Active 0 Not Active 1 Active Running 0 Not Running 1 Running
38. 4 Click OK The bridge s New Module screen Figure 4 5 appears Figure 4 5 New Module Bridge New Module Screen Type 1756 ENBT 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Local Address Host Name Name My_EtherNet_IP_Bridge Description Slot PAddress 10 C Host Name Revision Electronic Keying Compatible Keying x Open Module Properties Cancel Help 5 Editthe following Box Setting Name A name to identify the EtherNet IP bridge Description Optional description of the EtherNet IP bridge IP Address The IP address of the EtherNet IP bridge Host Name Not used Slot The slot of the EtherNet IP bridge in the rack Revision The minor revision of the firmware in the bridge You already set the major revision by selecting the bridge series in Step 3 Electronic Compatible Keying The Compatible Keying setting for Electronic Keying Keying ensures the physical module is consistent with the software configuration before the controller and bridge make a connection Therefore ensure that you have set the correct revision in this screen Refer to the online Help for additional information on this and other Electronic Keying settings If keying is not required select Disable Keying Disable keying is recommended Open When this box is checked additional module properties screens wi
39. 9 Datalink In B2 MSW 9 Datalink Out B1 MSW 10 Datalink In C1 LSW 10 Datalink Out B2 LSW 11 Datalink In C1 MSW 11 Datalink Out B2 MSW 12 Datalink In C2 LSW 12 Datalink Out C1 LSW 13 Datalink In C2 MSW 13 Datalink Out C1 MSW 14 Datalink In D1 LSW 14 Datalink Out C2 LSW 15 Datalink In D1 MSW 15 Datalink Out C2 MSW 16 Datalink In D2 LSW 16 Datalink Out D1 LSW 17 Datalink In D2 MSW 17 Datalink Out D1 MSW 18 Datalink Out D2 LSW 19 Datalink Out D2 MSW Table 5 C ControlLogix I O Image for PowerFlex 700S 750 Series Drives 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks Using Generic Profile Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Pad Word 1 Not Used 1 Pad Word 2 Reference LSW 2 Logic Status 3 Reference MSW 3 Not Used 4 Datalink In A1 LSW 4 Feedback LSW 5 Datalink In A1 MSW 5 Feedback MSW 6 Datalink In A2 LSW 6 Datalink Out A1 LSW 7 Datalink In A2 MSW 7 Datalink Out A1 MSW 8 Datalink In B1 LSW 8 Datalink Out A2 LSW 9 Datalink In B1 MSW 9 Datalink Out A2 MSW 10 Datalink In B2 LSW 10 Datalink Out B1 LSW 11 Datalink In B2 MSW 11 Datalink Out B1 MSW 12 Datalink In C1 LSW 12 Datalink Out B2 LSW 13 Datalink In C1 MSW 13 Datalink Out B2 MSW 14 Datalink In C2
40. Configuration tool such as PowerFlex 7 Class HIM 20 HIM xx DriveExplorer version 2 01 or later DriveExecutive stand alone software version 3 01 or later or bundled with the DriveTools SP suite version 1 01 or later BOOTP Server version 2 1 or higher network setup only Controller configuration software such as RSLogix 5 500 5000 A PC connection to the EtherNet IP network 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 14 Getting Started Safety Precautions 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Please read the following safety precautions carefully P PP gt ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists The PowerFlex drive may contain high voltages that can cause injury or death Remove all power from the PowerFlex drive and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing an adapter ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Only personnel familiar with drive and power products and the associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up configuration and subsequent maintenance of the product using an adapter Failure to comply may result in injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists The adapter contains ESD Electrostatic Discharge sensitive parts that can be damaged if you do not follow ESD control procedures Static control prec
41. ControlLogix Examples 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P TIP To display the Message Configuration screen in RSLogix 5000 add a message instruction MSG create a new tag for the message Properties Base tag type MESSAGE data type controller scope and click the button in the message instruction For supported classes instances and attributes refer to Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects Explicit Messaging Using RSLogix 5000 Version 15 or later ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A Parameter Read message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important Parameter Object Class code OxOF is not supported in PowerFlex 750 Series drives To do a single parameter read follow the RSLogix 5000 all versions single read example on page 6 19 Table 6 B Example Controller Tags to Read a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Read Message Data Type XIC Execute Single Read Message BOOL MSG Single Read Message MESSAGE Figure 6 2 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Execute Single Read Message MSG JE Message X EN Message Control Single Read Message HK DN gt PCER Using Explicit Messaging 6 5 ControlLogix Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter version 15 or lat
42. Dest Length Copy File Source Scattered Read Response 4 Output Current Dest Length Copy File Source Scattered Read Response 7 Dest Length Copy File Open Loop Fdbk 2 Source Scattered Read Response 10 Analog Out0 Data Dest Length Copy File 2 Source Scattered Read Response 13 Analog InO0 Value Dest Length In this message example the parameters have the following values 2 PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Read Value Data Type 1 Output Freq 45 0 Hz REAL 7 Output Current 0 03 Amp REAL 137 Open Loop Fdbk 1706253458 DINT 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data 45 0 Hz REAL 260 Analog InO Value 9 366 Volts REAL Using Explicit Messaging 6 13 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters all versions A Scattered Write message is used to write to multiple parameters This write message example writes the following values to these five parameters Drive Parameter Drive Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 143 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 105 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 725 Zero Position 33 106 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 21555 Port 5 Analog InO 55 107 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz 780 PTP Setpoint 75 555 Refer to DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Cla
43. EEPROM Init Startup sequence detected a blank EEPROM map revision 34 Normal Startup The adapter successfully started up 35 Manual Reset The adapter was reset by changing its Reset Module parameter 36 EN Link Down The Ethernet link was removed from the adapter 37 ENLink Up An Ethernet link is available for the adapter 38 Response The adapter received a response to its BOOTP request 39 DupIP Addr The adapter uses the same IP address as another device on the network 40 PeerlO Open The adapter received the first Peer I O message 41 Peer IO Time Fit adapter has not received a Peer I O message for longer than the Peer I O Timeout 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 7 8 Troubleshooting Table 7 B Adapter Events Continued Code Event Description 42 Email Failed The adapter encountered an error attempting to send a requested e mail message 43 Msg Ctrl Open The timeout attribute in either the CIP Register or Assembly object was written with a non zero value allowing control messages to be sent to the adapter 44 Msg Ctrl Close The timeout attribute in either the CIP Register or Assembly object was written with a zero value disallowing control messages to be sent to the adapter 45 Msg Ctrl Timeout The timeout attribute in either the CIP Register or Assembly object elapsed between accesses of those objects 46 OPT Open The adapter
44. Figure 4 14 to begin the correlation process Figure 4 14 Drive Correlation Screen Wil Module Properties My EtherNet IP Bridge PowerFlex 70 EC E 3 2 General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Dive Drive Not Connected Connect to Drive Correlation with online drive has not been completed No drive data can be displayed until correlation has completed successfully Click the Connect to Drive button to begin correlation Status Faulted Cancel If the Differences Found screen Figure 4 15 appears which is typical click Download This will download the project settings from the controller to the drive and its connected adapter If Upload is clicked the drive and adapter settings are uploaded to the controller Figure 4 15 Differences Found Screen Differences Found Differences were found between the project and the drive How do you want to proceed Upload Download I Show Details When the Reset Comm Module screen Figure 4 16 appears click Yes to reset the communication adapter so that the new I O settings take effect Figure 4 16 Reset Comm Module Screen Reset Comm Module Datalink enable values have been downloaded to the Comm module Downloading new Datalink enable values requires the Comm module to be reset before the new settings will be activated Do you want to reset the Comm module now Ce C After resetting the communication module
45. Message Timeout 5 Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address 41 0 Message Enabled Local Remote Local MuliHop ves Routing Information File RI8 2 ic MSG Rung 42 4 MG12 0 General Ins amp dd Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This Processor 1 EtherNet P Device str 10 91 100 78 Setting This Controller data for MicroLogix 1100 Channel 1 integral Controller port to which the network is connected Communication Command 500CPU Write The controller type and command type for the controller to read or write data Since the MicroLogix 1100 is part of the SLC 500 controller family the SOOCPU controller type was selected The Write command type was selected to write data to the drive Data Table Address 7 N20 20 An unused controller data table address containing the data to be written to the drive Size in Elements 2 19 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout 5 Message timeout duration in seconds Data Table Address 9 N41 0 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive Routing Information File RI9 2 An unused routing information file for the controller MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79
46. Refer to the documentation for your controller Important There must be a request message and a response message for all Explicit Messages whether you are reading or writing data Figure 6 1 Explicit Message Process o Set up and send Explicit Message Request Complete Explicit A Message p zi iu 1 EESH Retrieve Explicit Eu tg o Message Response o A __ Ethernet Switch a ee ee Bh Event Description You format the required data and set up the ladder logic program to send an Explicit Message request to the scanner or bridge module download The scanner or bridge module transmits the Explicit Message Request to the slave device over the network The slave device transmits the Explicit Message Response back to the scanner The data is stored in the scanner buffer The controller retrieves the Explicit Message Response from the scanner s buffer upload The Explicit Message is complete For information on the maximum number of Explicit Messages that can be executed at a time refer to the user manual for the scanner or bridge and or controller that is being used 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 4 Using Explicit Messaging
47. Shows the adapter type or user configurable title Rockwell Automation logo This logo is a hyperlink Click it to view the Rockwell Automation web Home Page Viewing the Adapters Web Pages 8 3 Navigation Menu on Adapter Web Pages The navigation menu appears on the left side of the adapter Home Page and all of the adapter s other web pages The navigation menu consists of links and link folders which can be expanded or minimized The following table shows all navigation menu links and link folders Table 8 A Navigation Menu Links and Link Folders Link Folder Home link Description Click this link to view the adapters Home Page Figure 8 1 Process Display link Click this link to view the host drive s Process Display pop up window Figure 8 2 TCP IP configuration link Click this link to view the adapters TCP IP Configuration web page showing information about the TCP IP configuration such as the adapter s IP address and the number of packets being sent Figure 8 3 shows an example TCP IP Configuration web page Configure e mail notification link Click this link to view the adapter s Configure E mail Notification web page Figure 8 4 to configure the adapter to send automatic e mail messages E mail notification can accommodate specific needs such as when only selected faults occur Figure 8 5 An example e mail message is shown in Figure 8 7 Browse DPI devices folder Click this folder
48. Size in Bytes Receive CIP Generic N80 0 Bo Send 90 0 Send 30 Error ER Message done DN Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Target Device Message Timeout p Local Remote Extended Routing Info File RIX Service Local MultiHop 21 0 Yes Error Error Code Hex 0 Service Code hex 4c deck 147 dec 0 deck 0 Custom Class hex 5 Instance hex Attribute hex 0 Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write multiple parameters General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Comm Command Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address N80 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Size in Bytes 30 Number of bytes to be transferred Each byte size is an 8 bit integer Extended Routing RIX21 0 An unused routing information file for the controller Service 1 Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4C Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex 9 Class ID for the DPI Pa
49. The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 G Table 5 J starting on page 5 20 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 19 9 For N File details see N Files on page C 10 gt TIP This message will error out if the Control Timeout value is not changed from a non zero value Refer to page 4 40 for writing a value to the Control Timeout gt TIP If the controller is controlling more than one drive it is recommended to intersperse the control I O messaging for each drive to conserve network bandwidth and decrease response time That is sequence the message instructions for each drive so that its group of messages will occur at a different time than those for another drive 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 46 Configuring the I O Notes 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P About I O Messaging Chapter 5 Using the I O This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to control configure and monitor a PowerFlex 7 Class drive using the configured I O Topic Page About I O Messaging 5 1 Understanding the I O Image 5 2 Using Logic Command Status 5 5 Using Reference Feedback 5 5 Using Datalinks 5 7 Ex
50. in diagnostic item 7 5 on label 3 3 HIM Human Interface Module accessing parameters with 3 2 definition G 4 LCD model 3 2 LED model 3 2 hold last configuring the adapter for 3 15 definition G 4 Host DPI Parameter object C 30 host IDs G 5 about 5 1 configuring for ControlLogix controller 4 2 MicroLogix 1100 controller 4 38 PLC 5 controller 4 22 SLC 500 controller 4 30 configuring the adapter for 3 8 definition G 5 limitations when using PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 controller 4 21 understanding the I O image 5 2 using with ControlLogix controller 5 10 MicroLogix 1100 controller 5 18 PLC 5 controller 5 18 SLC 500 controller 5 18 I O Board option in DPI External Comms Kit configuring adapter to use optional I O data 9 3 understanding the I O image 9 2 using Datalink D to send I O data 9 2 viewing optional I O diagnostic data 9 4 Identity object C 2 idle action G 4 Idle Fit Action parameter B 3 installation applying power to the adapter 2 6 commissioning the adapter 2 8 connecting to the drive 2 3 connecting to the network 2 6 preparing for 2 1 Internal Interface cables connecting to the adapter 2 4 connecting to the drive 2 4 illustration 2 4 Index 3 IP Addr Cfg 1 4 parameters B 1 IP address definition classes G 5 setting with BOOTP 3 3 setting with parameters 3 6 L LCD HIM 3 2 LED HIM 3 2 LEDs see status indicators Logic Command Status bit defini
51. in message configuration screens but can be used to perform single parameter read or write and multiple parameter read or write explicit messages Also the Generic Set Attribute Service offers the choice of writing the data to the drive s Non Volatile Storage NVS or the drive s Random Access Memory RAM for Generic Set Attribute Single service only see page 6 64 Note that when selecting the data to be written to RAM the data will be lost if the drive loses power For supported classes instances and attributes refer to Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 54 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P MicroLogix 1100 1400 Explicit Messaging Using the Read Write Parameter Service MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A Read Parameter message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important Parameter Object Class code OxOF is not supported in PowerFlex 750 Series drives To do a single parameter read follow the MicroLogix 1100 1400 Generic Attribute Service single read example on page 6 60 Figure 6 66 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter B3 0 MSG J E Read Write Message CEN gt 0 MSG File 13 0 CDN gt Setup Screen
52. responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable 22 Idle Fit Action Default 0 Fault Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take if Values 0 Fault the adapter detects that the controller is in program 1 Stop mode or faulted This setting is effective only if I O that 2 Zero Data controls the drive is transmitted through the adapter 3 Hold Last When the controller is put back in Run mode the drive 4 Send Fit Cfg will automatically receive commands over the network PE Read Write again Reset Required No Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive when the controller is idle By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a faulted controller 23 DPI I O Cfg Default 0 0001 Bit Values 0 I O disabled Sets the I O that is transferred through the adapter 12 1 0 enabled Type Read Write Reset Required Yes ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 21 Comm ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 22 Idle Fit Bit 215 2 Definition 2
53. ribbon cable see Internal Interface cable RSLinx Classic documentation P 1 using 4 1 RSLogix 5 500 5000 G 7 S safety precautions 1 4 scanner G 7 SLC 500 controller configuring the I O 4 30 explicit messaging 6 29 limitations when using the I O 4 21 using the I O 5 18 specifications adapter A 1 EtherNet IP address G 3 EtherNet IP subnet mask G 7 status indicators definition G 7 locating 1 6 MOD 1 6 7 2 NET A 1 6 7 3 NET B 1 6 7 3 normal operation 2 6 PORT 1 6 7 2 troubleshooting with 7 2 to 7 3 understanding 7 1 Subnet Cfg 1 4 parameters B 2 subnet mask definition G 7 setting with BOOTP 3 3 setting with parameters 3 6 switches G 7 T TCP Transmission Control Protocol G 8 TCP IP Interface object C 36 technical support P 2 tools required 1 3 troubleshooting 7 1 to 7 8 U UDP User Datagram Protocol G 8 update see flash update W Web Enable parameter B 7 Web Features parameter B 8 Index 5 web pages enabling with parameter 3 16 for the adapter 8 1 to 8 11 Web site BOOTP utility G 1 DriveExecutive software G 2 DriveExplorer software G 2 DriveTools SP software G 2 EDS files G 3 EtherNet IP G 3 manuals P 1 ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor s Association G 3 RSLogix 5 500 5000 G 7 wiring see cables Z zero data configuring the adapter for 3 15 definition G 8 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Index
54. 0 1 gt Command Jog JE My PowerFlex Drive O Data 0 2 ae Command_Clear_Faults E My PowerFlex Drive O Data 0 3 E Jt Command Forward Reverse SUE My PowerFlex Drive O Data 0 4 a Command_Forward_Reverse My PowerFlex Drive O Data 0 5 VE MOV Move Source Dest My PowerFlex Drive O Data 1 Speed Reference 0e 0e Copy File Source CO Speed Reference Dest My PowerFlex Drive O Data 2 Length 2 PowerFlex 70 and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives PowerFlex 70 Drive Speed Reference PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Speed Reference 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 16 Using the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P Example Datalink Data The Datalink data used in the example program is shown in Figure 5 10 Note that to describe the parameters to which the Datalinks are assigned you may want to add descriptions to the automatically created generic controller tags or create a User Defined Data Types UDDT Figure 5 10 ControlLogix Example Datalinks for Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile Name My PowerFlex Drive l My PowerFlex Drive l Data My PowerFlex Drive l Data 0 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 1 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 2 My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 3 My _PowerFlex_Drive I Data 4 My Powe
55. 0 of Parameter 56 Web Features is used to protect the configured settings for e mail messaging By default settings are not protected and the user can make changes To protect the configured settings set the value of E mail Cfg Bit 0 to 0 Disabled You can unprotect the configuration by changing Bit 0 back to 1 Enabled E mail messaging will always remain active regardless of whether or not its settings are protected unless e mail messaging was never configured For more information about configuring adapter e mail messaging or to stop e mail messages see Configure E mail Notification Web Page on page 8 6 Figure 3 27 Example Web Features LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Bit Description 20 COMM E 0 E mail Cfg Default 1 Enabled Parameter 56 1 7 Not Used Web Features xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxlg E mail Cfg b00 Bit 0 is the right most bit In Figure 3 27 it is highlighted and equals 1 Changes to this parameter take effect immediately A reset is not required Changes to switch settings and some adapter parameters require that you reset the adapter before the new settings take effect You can reset the adapter by power cycling the drive or by using Parameter 20 Reset Module adapter is transmitting control I O to the drive the drive may fault when you reset the adapter Determine how your drive will respond before resetting a connected adapter ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipm
56. 1 Figure 4 1 Configure Drivers Screen with a Configured Driver Configure Drivers Available Driver Types C EtherNet IP Driver Add New Help Configured Drivers Name and Description Status AB ETHIP 1 Ethernet RUNNING Running 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 2 Configuring the I O ControlLogix Example 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 Click Close to close the Configure Drivers screen Keep RSLinx running 6 Verify that your computer recognizes the drive Select Communications gt RSWho and in the menu tree click the symbol next to the Ethernet driver Note that two other RSLinx drivers Ethernet devices or Remote Devices via Linx Gateway may be used Use one of these drivers if the EtherNet IP driver cannot see your drive Example Network After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple EtherNet IP network see Figure 4 2 In our example we will configure a ControlLogix controller with 1756 ENBT Series A bridge to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and 16 Datalinks 8 to read and 8 to write over the network Figure 4 2 Example ControlLogix EtherNet IP Network IP Address 10 91 100 80 ControlLogix Controller with 1756 ENBT B
57. 107 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz 780 PTP Setpoint 75 555 Refer to DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 57 Example Ladder Logic to Write Multiple Parameters B3 0 EEM J E EtherNet IP Explicit Message CEN 3 Control Block N16 0 DN 5 Control Block Length 58 ER gt Setup Screen Important If the explicit message scattered write must be written continuously then use a separate Generic Set service explicit message single write for each parameter using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 40 Attribute A writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example scattered write message using attribute 0 writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 48 Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 6 58 Custom Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screens 7 EEM N16 0 58 Elements General
58. 23 DPI I O Cfg and 35 M S Input and the size 16 bit or 32 bit of the Reference Feedback and Datalinks in the drive Refer to Table 4 A Table 4 B or Table 4 C on page 4 17 Configuration 6 This value is 0 This value is required required The following tables define the number of 16 bit words that you need to enter for the Input Size and Output Size boxes depending on your configuration Table 4 4 PowerFlex 70 700 700H and SMC Flex 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 16 bit User Configured Settings Command 16 bit Size in Words Par 23 35 Par 36 Status B C D put Output DPI VO Cfg M S Input M S Output v v 4 2 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 v v v 6 4 00011 1 00011 00011 v v v v 8 6 00111 00111 00111 v v vvv 10 8 01111 01111 1 0 1111 v v 12 0 2111111 21111111111 Table 4 B PowerFlex 700 VC 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings Command 16 bit Size in Words Par 23 Par 35 Par 36 Status B C D Input Output DPI VO Cfg M S Input M S Output v v 4 2 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 v v v 8 6 00011 1 00011 0 0011 v v v 12 10 00111 1 00111 00111 v v vvv 16 114 20111101111 1 0 1111 v v Vv v v
59. 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 7 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 7 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 7 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 9 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 9 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 9 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 14 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI periph
60. 3200 0 ms Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Status Offline Cancel In the Requested Packet Interval RPI box set the value to 5 0 milliseconds or greater This value determines the maximum interval that a controller should use to move data to and from the adapter To conserve bandwidth use higher values for communicating with low priority devices For this example leave the Inhibit Module and Major Fault boxes unchecked Click OK The new node for this example My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive now appears under the bridge for this example My EtherNet IP Bridge in the I O Configuration folder If you double click on the Controller Tags you will see that module defined data types and tags have been automatically created Figure 4 22 After you save and download the configuration these tags allow you to access the Input and Output data of the drive via the controller s ladder logic For this example all Datalinks A B C and D are enabled The Input Size is set to 12 words and the Output Size is set to 10 words Also the following adapter I O parameters are set to these values Adapter Parameter No Setting 23 DPI I O Cfg XXXX XXXX 1 1111 35 M S Input XXXX XXXX xxx 1111 36 M S Output XXXX XXXX xxx1 1111 Configuring the I O 4 19 9 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 17 o
61. 362 Dig In2 Sel are set to 0 Not Used 3 Verify that drive Parameter 213 Speed Ref Source is reporting that the source of the Reference to the drive is 22 DPI Port 5 This ensures that any Reference commanded from the network can be monitored by using drive Parameter 002 Commanded Speed If a problem occurs this verification step provides the diagnostic capability to determine whether the drive adapter or the network is the cause TIP For PowerFlex 750 Series drives use drive Parameter 545 Speed Ref A Sel to set the drive speed Reference A Set the Port field to Port 0 PowerFlex 75x B Set the Parameter field to point to the port in which the 20 COMM E adapter 20 750 20COMM Option Card are installed for example 876 Port 6 Reference Commissioning the Adapter To commission the adapter you must set a unique IP address on the 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P network Refer to the Glossary for details about IP addresses After installing the adapter and applying power you can set the IP address by using a BOOTP server or by setting adapter parameters See Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address on page 3 6 for details By default the adapter is configured so that you must set the IP address using a BOOTP server To set the IP address using adapter parameters you must disable the BOOTP feature See Disabling the BOOTP Feature o
62. 500 controller to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks over the network Figure 4 32 SLC 500 Example EtherNet IP Network IP Address 10 91 100 80 SLC 500 Controller with Embedded Ethernet IP Address 10 91 100 79 PowerFlex 70 Drive with 20 COMM E Adapter oj 9v 0 O oF Ethernet Switch Ca Computer with Ethernet Connection NOTE Information for PowerFlex 750 Series drives has been added to this manual where applicable 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Configuring the I O 4 31 Configuring Parameters for Network I O Since the I O for the drive is message based there is no need to configure any I O inside the RSLogix 500 version 7 or later project until using the I O as described in Chapter 5 However to get the adapter to operate with the I O created in Chapter 5 we need to configure the adapter to accept the I O and drive to point to the appropriate Datalinks 1 Forthis example the following adapter I O parameters are set to these values Adapter Parameter No Setting 23 DPI I O Cfg XXXX xxx 1111 35 M S Input XXXX XXXX xxx 1111 36 M S Output XXXX XXXX xxx1 1111 2 Resetthe adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 17 or power cycle the drive For the drive speed reference and Datalink parameter values
63. 55 Maximum Freq which has a default value of 130 Hz For all PowerFlex 70 700 drives default scaling is 0 15123 which is equal to 0 60 0 Hz This is based on the formula shown below Reference scaling is limited by drive parameter 82 Maximum Speed If the default value of 60 Hz for parameter 82 Maximum Speed is changed the speed Reference scaling also changes To determine Reference scaling use Parameter 82 Parameter 55 32767 Scaling Using parameter 82 and 55 default values speed Reference scaling is 60 Hz 130 Hz 32767 15123 Therefore 0 15123 0 60 0 Hz If parameter 82 Maximum Speed is changed to 90 Hz then 90 Hz 130 Hz 32767 22685 Therefore 0 22685 0 90 0 Hz A graphic representation of this Reference scaling is shown below 130 Hz 90 Hz 60 Hz 0 Hz 15123 22685 32767 Par 55 Maximum Freq Scaling Parameter 82 Parameter 55 32767 For PowerFlex 70 EC drives firmware version 2 xxx or later or PowerFlex 700 VC drives firmware version 3 xxx or later parameter 298 DPI Ref Select was added to simplify scaling for the speed Reference When parameter 298 DPI Ref Select is set to its default 0 Max Freq the speed Reference scaling is as shown above However when parameter 298 DPI Ref Select is set to 1 Max Speed the speed Reference scaling is equal to parameter 82 Max Speed Parameter 82 Scaling Using t
64. 6 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P U S Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Tel 1 262 512 8176 Fax 1 262 512 2222 Email support drives ra rockwell com Online www ab com support abdrives www tockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core E Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 20COMM UMO010E EN P July 2010 Supersedes 20COMM UMO10D EN P May 2007 Copyright 2010 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
65. Active Decimal Status At Speed Decimal Status Faulted Decimal Status Forward Decimal Status Ready Decimal Status Reverse Decimal For information on speed Reference and Feedback scaling see PowerFlex 7 Class Drives except PowerFlex 750 Series on page 5 6 or PowerFlex 750 Series Drives on page 5 7 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P Using the I O 5 15 Figure 5 8 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile for Logic Status Feedback My PowerFlex Drive l Data 2 0 jt Status Ready 2 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 2 1 Status Active My PowerFlex D rive Data 2 3 Status_Forward 2 My PowerFlex Drive I Data 2 3 Status Reverse My PowerFlex Drive l Data 2 7 Status Faulted My PowerFlex Drive l Data 2 8 Status At Speed D Move Dest Source My PowerFlex Drive l Data 3 0e MOV Speed Feedback 0e Copy File Source My PowerFlex Drive l Data 4 Dest Length Speed Feedback 2 PowerFlex 70 and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives PowerFlex 70 Drive Speed Feedback PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Speed Feedback Figure 5 9 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile for Logic Command Reference Command Stop XE My PowerFlex Drive O Data 0 O ab Command_Start ae My PowerFlex Drive O Data
66. Address This MicroLogix Channel 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 79 0 uliHop Send Data Receive Data This Controller Control Bits 1 integral Ignore if timed e TO 0 Communication Command CIP Generic Break Consaion 0 Data Table Address Receive N60 0 Send N70 0 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Size in Bytes Receive 30 Send 30 Error ER 0 Target Device Message done DN 0 Message Timeout a Message Transmitting ST 0 Message Enabled EN 0 Local Remote Local MuliHop Yes Extended Routing Info File RIX R1x19 0 Error Service Custom Service Code hex 4B Enor Code Hex 0 Class hex 93 dec 147 Instance hex 0 dec 0 Attribute hex 0 dec 0 Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read multiple parameters General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Comm Command CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address N60 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Size in Bytes 30 9 Number of bytes to be transferred Each byte size is an 8 bit integer Extended Routing RIX19 0 An unused routing information file for the controller Servi
67. B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 313 Data Out B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 314 Data Out C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 315 Data Out C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 316 Data Out D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 317 Data Out D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 545 Spd Ref A Sel Port 0 Port 6 Reference Assigns 20 COMM E to be used for the Reference 895 Data In A1 Port 0 Accel Time 1 Points to Par 535 in the drive 896 Data In A2 Port 0 Testpoint Sel 1 Points to Par 970 in the drive 897 Data In B1 Port 5 Anlg Out Hi Points to Par 90 in Port 5 module 905 Data Out A1 Port 0 DC Bus Volts Points to Par 11 in the drive 906 Data Out A2 Port 0 Open Loop Fdbk Points to Par 137 in the drive 907 Data Out B1 Port 5 Anlg Out0 Data Points to Par 77 in Port 5 I O module 04 IP Addr Cfg 1 10 91 100 79 IP address for the adapter 07 IP Addr Cfg 4 08 Subnet Cfg 1 255 255 248 0 Subnet mask for the adapter 11 Subnet Cfg 4 23 DPI I O Cfg xxx1 1111 Enables Cmd Ref and Datalinks A D 35 M S Input xxx1 1111 Configures the Data to be transferred from the controller on the network to the drive 36 M S Output xxx1 1111 Configures the Data to be transferred from the drive to the controller on the network 1 In this example the 20 COMM E adapter 20 750 20
68. Command 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Accel 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating Decel 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating Jogging 0 Not Jogging 1 Jogging X Fault 0 No Fault Par 323 324 325 1 Fault x Alarm 0 Alarm Par 326 327 328 1 Alarm X Flash Mode 0 Not in Flash Mode 1 Flash Mode X Run Ready 0 Not Ready to Run Par 156 1 Ready to Run x At Limit 0 Not At Limit Par 304 1 At Limit Tach Loss Sw 0 Not Tach Loss Sw 1 Tach Loss Sw X At Zero Spd 0 Not At Zero Speed 1 At Zero Speed X At Setpt Spd 0 Not At Setpoint Speed 1 At Setpoint Speed X Enable 0 Not Enabled 1 See Parameter 304 Lim 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 1 Enabled it Status in the PowerFlex 700S drive User Manual for a description of the limit status conditions Logic Command Status Words D 5 PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Important When using a 20 COMM E adapter with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the upper word bits 16 31 of the Logic Command and Logic Status words are not accessible and cannot be used Only when using a PowerFlex 750 Series drive with a 20 750 communication Option Module or the PowerFlex 755 drive s embedded EtherNet IP adapter is the upper word accessible and used Logic Command Word
69. D Data 5 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 5 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 7 0 Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 8 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 9 0 Decimal INT Saving the I O Configuration to the Controller After adding the bridge and drive adapter to the I O configuration you must download the configuration to the controller You should also save the configuration to a file on your computer TIP When using RSLogix 5000 version 16 or later you can add the I O configuration of a Generic Profile while the controller is online and in the Run mode 1 In the RSLogix 5000 window select Communications gt Download The Download dialog box Figure 4 23 appears Figure 4 23 Download Dialog Box Download Download offline project 15 Example using 20COMME to the controller Connected Controller Name no name gt Type 1756 L63 4 ControlLogix5563 Controller Path Ethemet 10 91 100 80 Backplane 0 Serial Number 00244888 Security No Protection Cancel Help 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 20 Configuring the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P TIP Ifa message box reports that RSLogix 5000 is unable to go online select Communications gt Who Active to find your controller in the Who Active screen After finding and selecting the controller click Set Project
70. Data Table Address 1 N20 1 An unused controller data table address containing the data to be read from the drive Size in Elements 2 19 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout 5 Message timeout duration in seconds Data Table Address 9 41 0 Specific starting address of the source file in the drive Routing Information File RI9 1 An unused routing information file for the controller MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 G Table 5 J starting on page 5 20 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 19 9 For N File details see N Files on page C 10 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 44 Configuring the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Creating MicroLogix 1100 1400 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command Reference and Datalink In 1 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG MGxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG12 n and nis an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG12
71. Divisor parameter instance WORD Base parameter instance WORD Offset parameter instance BYTE Formula number BYTE Pad byte always zero WORD Help instance WORD Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset 7 Get DPI Online Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 33 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value WORD Next parameter WORD Previous parameter STRING 4 Units for example Amps Hz WORD Multiplier 2 WORD Divisor 2 WORD Base 2 INT Offset 2 BYTE 3 Link source of the value 0 no link BYTE Always zero 0 STRING 16 Parameter name 8 Get DPI Descriptor BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 33 9 Get Set DPI Parameter Value Various Parameter value NVS 9 10 Get Set DPI RAM Parameter Value Various Parameter value in temporary memory Valid only for DPI drives 11 Get Set DPI Link BYTE 3 Link parameter or function block that is the source of the value 0 no link 12 Get Help Object Instance WORD ID for help text for this parameter 13 Get DPI Read Basic STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 33 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Units for example Amps Hz 14 Get DPI Parameter Name STRING 16 Parameter name 15 Get DPI Parameter Alias STRING 16 Custo
72. Drive New Module Screen Will New Module General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Drive Type PowerFlex 70 ECE AC Drive via 20 Vendor Allen Bradley Parent My EtherNet IP Bridge Name My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive Ethemet Address Private Network 192 168 1 Description GiPAddes 10 91 100 O Host Name Module Definition Revision 32 Compatible Module Connection Parameters via Datalinks Data Format Parameters Electronic Keying Status Creating ok On the General tab edit the following data about the drive adapter Box Setting Name A name to identify the drive Description Optional description of the drive adapter IP Address The IP address of the adapter On the New Module screen in the Module Definition section click Change to launch the Module Definition screen Figure 4 9 and begin the drive adapter configuration process In this example Datalinks are used to do the following Read Output Current Parameter 3 DC Bus Voltage Parameter 12 Fault 1 Code Parameter 243 Write to Accel Time 1 Parameter 140 Decel Time 1 Parameter 142 High Resolution Reference Parameter 308 Figure 4 9 Module Definition Screen Module Definition Revision 3 i2 wv Datalink Input Data Output Data Electronic Keying Drive Rating Connection Data Format Compatible Module
73. DriveE Its Cleared pal 25 Overspeed Limit 737 10 45 232 52 Faults Cleared 737 10 41 632 25 Overspeed Limit 737 10 26 512 3 Copyright 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Internet NOTE For drives that do not support an alarm queue the adapter will still display an alarm queue web page Figure 8 11 but show that the alarm queue is not available 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Viewing the Adapter s Web Pages 8 11 Figure 8 11 Example of Port 0 PowerFlex 70 Drive Alarm Queue Page Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer Edit View Favorites Tools 0 0 DAO imme 2 5 Address http 10 91 100 79 D um Alarm Queue Not Available Figure 8 12 shows an example event queue page for the Port 5 device 20 COMM E adapter Figure 8 12 Example of Port 5 20 COMM E Adapter Event Queue Page Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools O O A BA Jed SB0R003 Address ntto 10 91 100 n e 4 E EtherNet IP Adapte Rockwell iin 2 Automation Expand _ Minimize Description Time stamp EN Link Up 00 00 01 775 Control Enabled 00 00 00 610 DL Login 00 00 00 600 Type 0 Login 00 00 00 595 Online 125kbps 00 00 00 580 App Updated 00 00 00 000 No Event No Event No Event No Event No Event No Event No Event No Event No
74. Fit The adapter has not received a Datalink message within the specified time 17 Reserved Not used 18 Control Disabled The adapter has sent a Soft Control Disable command to the drive 19 Control Enabled The adapter has sent a Soft Control Enable command to the drive 20 Message Timeout A Client Server message sent by the adapter was not completed within 1 sec 21 Fit Cfg Error One of the Fit Cfg xx parameters is set to a value greater than 65535 and the drive requires a 16 bit value 22 App Updated Startup sequence detected new application firmware 23 EN Comm Fit The adapter detected a communications fault on the network 24 EN Sent Reset The adapter received a reset from the network 25 EN Close Fit An I O connection from the network to the adapter was closed 26 EN idle Fit The adapter is receiving idle packets from the network 27 EN Open An I O connection from the network to the adapter has been opened 28 EN Timeout Fit An I O connection from the network to the adapter has timed out 29 Close The device sending PCCC Control messages to the adapter has set the PCCC Control Timeout to zero 30 PCCCIO Open The adapter has begun receiving PCCC control messages the PCCC Control Timeout was previously set to a non zero value 31 PCCCIO Time Fit The adapter has not received a PCCC Control message for longer than the PCCC Control Timeout 32 Watchdog T O Fit The software detects a failure 33
75. Full STRUCT of STRING 16 Name of the timer LWORD or Elapsed time in milliseconds unless timer is STRUCT real time clock see attribute 2 BOOL 16 See attribute 3 1 Get Timer Text STRING 16 Name of the timer 2 Get Set Timer Value LWORD Elapsed time in milliseconds unless the timer is a or real time clock STRUCT of Real Time Clock Data WORD Milliseconds 0 999 BYTE Seconds 0 59 BYTE Minutes 0 59 BYTE Hours 0 23 BYTE Days 1 31 BYTE Months 1 January 12 December BYTE Years since 1972 3 Get Timer Descriptor BOOL 16 BOOL O 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used 4 Get International Read Full STRUCT of STRINGN International timer text STRUCT Timer value BOOL 16 Timer descriptor 5 Get International Timer Text STRINGN Name of this timer 6 Get Clock Status BOOL 32 Identifies clock status 8 Get Set Number of Leap Seconds INT Identifies the current number of Leap Seconds 9 Get Clock Options BOOL 32 Identifies the optional functionality available in the device s System Clock 10 Get Set Clock Options Enable BOOL 32 Identifies which of the clock s options are enabled 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 30 Host DPI Parameter Object EtherNet IP Objects Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal Ox9F 159 To access Device parameters use the DPI Parameter Object Class Code 0x93 Import
76. Hexadecimal Decimal 0x67 103 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance 0x4B No Yes Execute_PCCC 0x4C No Yes Execute_DH Instances Supports Instance 1 Class Attributes Not supported Instance Attributes Not supported Message Structure for Execute_PCCC Request Response Name Data Type Description Name Data Type Description Length USINT Length of requestor ID Length USINT Length of requestor ID Vendor UINT Vendor number of requestor Vendor Vendor number of requestor Serial UDINT ASA serial number of requestor Serial UDINT ASA serial number of requestor Number Number Other Product Identifier of user task etc on the Other Product Identifier of user task etc on the requestor Specific requestor Specific USINT Command byte CMD USINT Command byte STS USINT 0 STS USINT Status byte TNSW UINT Transport word TNSW UINT Transport word Same value as the request FNC USINT Function code not used for all CMDs EXT STS USINT Extended status not used for all CMDs PCCC ARRAY of CMD FNC specific parameters PCCC_ ARRAY of CMD FNC specific result data params USINT results USINT 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Message Structure for Execute EtherNet IP Objects C 9 Request Response Name Data Type Description Name Da
77. I O and explicit messages can be transmitted over the network Each device is assigned a unique IP address and transmits data on the network The number of devices that an EtherNet IP network can support depends on the class of IP address For example a network with a Class C IP address can have 254 nodes General information about EtherNet IP and the EtherNet IP specification are maintained by the Open DeviceNet Vendor s Association ODVA ODVA is online at http www odva org Explicit Messaging Explicit Messages are used to transfer data that does not require continuous updates They are typically used to configure monitor and diagnose devices over the network Fault Action A fault action determines how the adapter and connected drive act when a communications fault for example a cable is disconnected occurs or when the controller is switched out of run mode The former uses a communications fault action and the latter uses an idle fault action Fault Configuration When communications are disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and PowerFlex drive can respond with a user defined fault configuration The user sets the data that is sent to the drive using specific fault configuration parameters in the adapter When a fault action parameter is set to use the fault configuration data and a fault occurs the data from these parameters is sent as the Logic Command Reference and or Datalink s 20 COMM E Ethe
78. I O communications are disrupted Fit Cfg A1 In Fit Cfg A2 In Fit Cfg B1 In Fit Cfg B2 In Fit Cfg C1 In Fit Cfg C2 In Fit Cfg D1 In Fit Cfg D2 In Sets the data that is sent to the Datalink in the drive if any of the following is true e Parameter 21 Comm Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and I O communications are disrupted e Parameter 22 Idle Fit Action is set to 4 Send Cfg and the controller is idle e Parameter 41 Peer Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and Peer I O communications are disrupted Details Default xxx0 0001 Bit Values 0 I O disabled 1 1 0 enabled Type Read Only ink D ink C ink B inkA gt gt Bit 8 828zrzl l zlzl Definition 2 2 2 S S S S o e e e e 4 4 Default X X x 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Default 0000 0000 0000 0000 Minimum 0000 0000 0000 0000 Maximum 1111 1111 1111 1111 Type Read Write Reset Required No Default 0 Minimum 0 Maximum 4294967295 Type Read Write Reset Required No Important If the drive uses a 16 bit Reference the most significant word of this value must be set to zero 0 or a fault will occur Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum 4294967295 Type Read Write Reset Required No Impor
79. IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 24 EtherNet IP Objects DPI Alarm Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x98 152 Products such as PowerFlex drives use this object for alarms or warnings Adapters do not support this object Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of alarms supported by the queue The maximum number of alarms can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF Host 0 Class Attributes Drive Only host devices can have alarms 1 Most Recent Alarm 2 Second Most Recent Alarm Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances WORD Maximum number of alarms that the device can record in its queue 3 Set Alarm Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Clear Alarm 2 Clear Alarm Queue 3 Reset Device 4 Get Fault Data List STRUCT of Reserved BYTE BYTE WORD n 5 Get Number of Recorded Alarms WORD Number of alarms in the queue A 0 indicates the alarm queue is empty 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Instance Attributes EtherNet IP Objects C 25 Attribute ID Access Rule
80. IP address and disable BOOTP using a BOOTP server or set a unique IP address by using adapter parameters e Apply power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit Steady Red The adapter failed the duplicate IP Configure the adapter to use a unique IP address and cycle power address detection test Flashing Red An EtherNet IP connection has timed e Place the scanner in RUN mode or apply power to the peer device out that will send I O e Check the IGMP Snooping Ethernet Switches for correct operation e Check the amount of traffic on the network Flashing Red Green The adapter is performing a self test No action required Flashing Green The adapter is properly connected has an IP address and is connected to an EtherNet IP network but does not have an I O connection e Place the controller in RUN mode or apply power to the peer device that will send I O e Program the controller or peer device to recognize and transmit I O or make a messaging connection to the adapter e Configure the adapter for the program in the controller or the I O from the peer device Steady Green NET B Status Indicator Status Off The adapter is properly connected and communicating on the network to a controller No action required This green LED indicates the status of the adapter transmitting on the network as shown in the table below Cause The adapter is not powered or is not transmitting on
81. LSW 14 Datalink Out C1 LSW 15 Datalink In C2 MSW 15 Datalink Out C1 MSW 16 Datalink In D1 LSW 16 Datalink Out C2 LSW 17 Datalink In D1 MSW 17 Datalink Out C2 MSW 18 Datalink In D2 LSW 18 Datalink Out D1 LSW 19 Datalink In D2 MSW 19 Datalink Out D1 MSW 20 Datalink Out D2 LSW 21 Datalink Out D2 MSW 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 54 Using the I O PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Image The I O image for these controllers always has 19 words of output and 19 words of input However depending on the size of the drive s Reference Feedback and Datalinks specific words in the I O image may not be used Table 5 D Table 5 E and Table 5 F show the I O image when using various PowerFlex 7 Class drives and all Datalinks enabled Table 5 D PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 I O Image for PowerFlex 70 700 700H Drives and SMC Flex 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Logic Status 1 Not used 1 Not used 2 Reference MSW 2 Feedback MSW 3 Not used 3 Not used 4 Datalink In A1 MSW 4 Datalink Out A1 MSW 5 Not used 5 Not used 6 Datalink In A2 MSW 6 Datalink Out A2 MSW 7 Not used 7 Not used 8 Datalink In B1 MSW 8 Datalink Out B1 MSW 9 Not used 9 Not used 10 _ Datalink In B2 M
82. Load default values to active memory 3 Get NVS Parameter Value Checksum WORD Checksum of all parameter values in a user set in NVS 4 Get NVS Link Value Checksum WORD Checksum of parameter links in a user set in NVS 5 Get First Accessible Parameter WORD First parameter available if parameters are protected by passwords A 0 indicates all parameters are protected 7 Get Class Revision WORD 2 DPI 8 Get First Parameter Processing Error WORD The first parameter that has been written with a value outside of its range A 0 indicates no errors 9 Set Link Command BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Clear All Parameter Links This does not clear links to function blocks 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Instance Attributes EtherNet IP Objects C 17 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 6 Get DPI Offline Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Offline minimum value CONTAINER Offline maximum value CONTAINER Offline default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Offline parameter units WORD Online minimum parameter instance WORD Online maximum parameter instance WORD Online default parameter instance WORD Multiple parameter instance WORD Divisor parameter instance WORD Base parameter instance WORD Offset parameter instance BYTE Formula number BYTE Pad byte always zero WORD Help instance WORD Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINE
83. MSW N20 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 LSW N20 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 MSW N20 20 Logic Command see Appendix D N20 21 Reserved N20 22 Speed Reference N20 23 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 LSW N20 24 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 MSW N20 25 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 LSW N20 26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 MSW N20 27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 LSW N20 28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 MSW N20 29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 LSW N20 30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 MSW N20 31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 LSW N20 32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 MSW N20 33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 LSW N20 34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 MSW N20 35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 LSW N20 36 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 MSW N20 37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 LSW N20 38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 MSW 5 21 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 22 Using the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Ma
84. Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 3 12 Configuring the Adapter 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2070MM UMO10E EN P Setting the Adapter to Receive Peer to Peer Data 1 Verify that Parameter 47 Peer Enable is set to 0 Off This parameter must be Off while you configure the peer input parameters Figure 3 17 Example Peer Inp Enable LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device 20 COMM E Value Setting 0 Off Default Parameter 47 Peer Inp Enable 1 On Set Parameters 42 Peer Inp Addr 1 through 45 Peer Inp Addr 4 to the IP address of the node from which you want to receive data Valid nodes must have 20 COMM E adapters connected to drives with compatible Logic Command Status words Figure 3 18 Example Peer Inp Addr 1 LCD HIM Screen Off 2 Port 5 Device 20 COMM E Parameter 42 Peer Inp Addr 1 0 lt gt 255 3 IP Address of Node Transmitting Peer I O Default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 Peer Inp Addr 1 Peer Inp Addr 2 Peer Inp Addr 3 Peer Inp Addr 4 Set Parameter 38 Peer A Input to select the destination of the data that is input to the drive as Peer A Figure 3 19 Example Peer A Input LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM E 0 Off Default Parameter 38 1 Logic Command Reference Peer A 2 5 Datalink A B C or D Input Cmd Ref With the Series A adapte
85. N209 4 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 1 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 1 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 1 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 2 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 2 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 2 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 3 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 3 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 3 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 4 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 4 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 4 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 5 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 5 Parameters 125 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 5 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 6 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 6 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 6 The following N Files are supported on ly when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive N213 0 N213 2 N214 0 N215 0 N215 2 N216 0 N217 0 N217 2 N218 0 N219 0 N219 2 N220 0 N221 0 N221 2 N222 0 N223 0 N223 2 N224 0 N225 0 N225 2 N226 0 N227 0 N227 2 N228 0 d 249 249 1 249
86. Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All Information STRUCT of WORD Alarm code STRUCT of Alarm source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRING 16 Alarm text STRUCT of Alarm time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL O 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Reserved WORD Reserved CONTAINER R Reserved 1 Get Basic Information STRUCT of WORD Alarm code STRUCT of Alarm source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRUCT of Alarm time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL OJ 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Reserved 2 Get International Alarm Text STRINGN Text describing the alarm with support for Unicode 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 26 EtherNet IP Objects DPI Diagnostic Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x99 153 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of diagnostic items in the device The total number of diagnostic items can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive
87. Parameter Number 64 Parameter Value LSW 64 Pad Word 65 Parameter Value MSW 65 Pad Word MicroLogix 1100 1400 Examples Using Explicit Messaging 6 53 When using RSLogix 500 version 7 10 or earlier explicit messaging must be performed using the PCCC N File method For RSLogix 500 version 7 20 or later the CIP messaging method has been added along with the PCCC N File method However it is recommended to use the CIP method because it is easier to use and understand For this reason only instructions for the CIP method are provided If you must use the PCCC N File method refer to the PLC 5 Examples on page 6 23 The CIP messaging method provides two ways to perform explicit messaging e Read Write Parameter Service simplifies setup by requiring less data to be entered in message configuration screens However the Read Write Parameter Service can only be used to perform single parameter read or single parameter write explicit messages Multiple parameter reads or writes must be performed using the Generic Get Set Attribute Service described below Important When performing a Write Parameter message the data will always be written to the drive s Non Volatile Storage NVS Continuous NVS writes may damage the drive s EEPROM If continuous writes are necessary use the Generic Set Attribute Single Service and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 64 e Generic Get Set Attribute Service requires more setup data to be entered
88. Path to establish the path If your controller does not appear you need to add or configure the EtherNet IP driver in RSLinx See Using RSLinx Classic on page 4 1 for details Click Download to download the configuration to the controller When the download is successfully completed RSLogix 5000 goes into the Online mode and the I O OK box in the upper left of the screen should be steady green Select File gt Save If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears Navigate to a folder type a file name and click Save to save the configuration to a file on your computer To ensure that the present project configuration values are saved RSLogix 5000 prompts you to upload them Click Yes to upload save Any Datalinks that were enabled in the controller and adapter during I O configuration Table 4 A Table 4 B or Table 4 C must also be configured in the drive for example Datalink parameters 300 317 in PowerFlex 70 700 drives Each Datalink being used must be assigned to a specific parameter in the drive or connected peripheral If this is not done the controller will receive or send placeholder data instead of actual drive or peripheral parameter values Place the controller in Remote Run or Run Mode Limitations When Using PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 Configuring the I O 4 21 Controlling I O with explicit messages is relatively complex compared to normal implicit I O control C
89. REAL floating point parameters in PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives Figure 6 30 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Feed Single Write Message MSG Read Write Message EN 1 Control MG140 CDN mo Setup Screen lt lt ER gt Using Explicit Messaging 6 27 PLC 5 Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Figure 6 31 Write Single Message Configuration Screens 3 MSG MG14 0 2 Elements Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This PLCS 2 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 79 i MSG MG14 0 2 Elements This PLC 5 Control Bits Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Write Ignore if timed out TO DataTable Address N50 0 To be retried Size in Elements 2 Awaiting Execution EW Port Number 2 Continuous Run CO Error ER Target Device Message done DN Data Table Address N151 30 Message Transmitting ST MultiHop Yes Message Enabled EN Error Error 0 Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Write Controller
90. Rating Code 22 Writable Referenced This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference If the Parameter parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference then 0 The referenced parameter may be read only or writable 1 The referenced parameter must always be writable including while running 23 Disallow Zero This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference If the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference then 0 Allow zero 1 Disallow zero If this bit is cleared indicating that a value of zero is allowed the device must support the Zero Text parameter attribute so that a software tool or HIM can obtain text from the Zero Text parameter attribute If this bit is set indicating that a value of zero is disallowed a software tool or HIM will not allow the user to enter a value of zero 24 Datalink Out This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink Out parameter Bit 20 must also be set 25 Datalink In This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink In parameter Bits 20 and 22 must also be set 26 Not Writable While IO Active This parameter cannot be written if the I O data being exchanged between the Host and the 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P peripheral is valid Bit 27 Name EtherNet IP Objects C 21 Description C
91. Secondary DNS 78 Domain na home ra int com Entries D of 256 4 Editthe following Box Type Subnet Mask 7 subnet mask for the adapter s network Gateway 7 The IP address of the gateway device on the adapter s network Primary DNS The address of the primary DNS server to be used on the local end of the link for negotiating with remote devices Secondary DNS Optional the address of the secondary DNS server to be used on the local end of the link for negotiating with remote devices when the primary DNS server is unavailable Domain Name The text name corresponding to the numeric IP address that was assigned to the server that controls the network 1 For definitions of these terms refer to the Glossary 5 Click OK to apply the settings Devices on the network issuing BOOTP requests appear in the BOOTP Request History list 6 In the BOOTP Request History list either double click the adapter s Ethernet Address MAC noted in Step 1 or click New in the Relation List The New Entry dialog box Figure 3 3 appears In the first case the Ethernet Address MAC is automatically entered In the latter case you must manually enter it Figure 3 3 New Entry Dialog Box New Entry Ethemet Address MAC 00 00 BC 08 60 09 IP Address 10 91 100 79 Hostname 20COMME621A Description Bldg 6 Floor 2 Fan 1A OK Cancel 20 COMM E EtherNe
92. Seconds Minimum 0 01 Seconds Maximum 10 00 Seconds Type Read Write Reset Required No Default 1 Minimum 1 Maximum 16 Type Read Write Reset Required No Default XXXX xxO1 Bit Values 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Type Read Write Reset Required No Default e gt o 2 X 31 S x Not Used Bit Web Enable This parameter is only available for Series B version 3 xxx or later adapters Displays the setting of the adapter Web Pages Switch SW2 when the adapter was last reset go So S5 515 515 18 2 2 2 2 X x X X 0 1 29 28 5 3 1 0 Default 0 Disabled Values 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Type Read Only 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P B 8 Adapter Parameters Parameter No Name and Description Details 56 Features Default XXXX XXX1 This parameter is only available for Series B version Bit Values 5 deni 3 xxx or later adapters Type Read Write Sets the access to the Web interface and Reset Required No Web configurable e mail notification feature Bit Definition Default Bit x Not Used x Not Used x Not Used x Not Used x Not Used o E mail Cfg 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C Appendix C presents information about the EtherNet IP objects
93. User Manual Using Explicit Messaging Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P ControlLogix Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read Write Multiple Messaging all versions The data structures in Figure 6 20 and Figure 6 21 use 16 bit words and can accommodate up to 22 parameters in a single message In the Response Message a parameter number with the high bit set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code parameter number in response data will be negative Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 20 Data Structures for Scattered Read Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number 1 Pad Word 1 Parameter Value LSW 2 Word 2 Parameter Value MSW 3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number 4 Word 4 Parameter Value LSW 5 Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW 6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number 7 Pad Word 7 Parameter Value LSW 8 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW 9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number 10 Pad Word 10 Parameter Value LSW 11 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW 12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number 13 Pad Word 13 Parameter Value LSW 14 Pad Word 14
94. Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 896 Data In A2 LSW N20 26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 896 Data In A2 MSW N20 27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 897 Data In B1 LSW N20 28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 897 Data In B1 MSW N20 29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 898 Data In B2 LSW N20 30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 898 Data In B2 MSW N20 31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 899 Data In C1 LSW N20 32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 899 Data In C1 MSW N20 33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 900 Data In C2 LSW N20 34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 900 Data In C2 MSW N20 35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 901 Data In D1 LSW N20 36 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 901 Data In D1 MSW N20 37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 902 Data In D2 LSW N20 38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 902 Data In D2 MSW You can use the controller data table addresses to directly control and monitor the drive without creating any ladder logic program However if you intend to use Human Machine Interface devices Panel View etc to operate the drive and view its status you will need to create descriptive controller data table addresses Table 5 L and Table 5 M and a ladder logic program that will pass that data to the data table addresses used for messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20CO
95. Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 6 92 Example Scattered Write Response Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Data File N80 dec Radix Decimal Columns 10 C eS Usage Help The PowerFlex 750 Series drive uses 32 bit integer and REAL parameters A COP or CPW command must be used to copy the 16 bit integer or REAL values to the N90 integer array Figure 6 93 shows the ladder logic used for this example If the parameter data type is a 32 bit integer the data remains Using Explicit Messaging 6 73 split into two 16 bit integers since there are no 32 bit integers in the MicroLogix 1100 1400 If the parameter data type is a REAL then the source tag is a floating point See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type 32 bit integer or REAL Figure 6 93 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Request Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter 780 PTP Setpoint PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Parameter 536 Accel Time 2 538 26214 1681 0 16560 780 10019 2 BE Radx Decmd Columns 10 The results of the explicit message appear in the destination tag array N80 Figure 6 63 Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 6 95 Example Scattered Write Response Data File for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Data File N80 dec DER 0 21555 piel Radix Decimal E Columns 10 20 COMM E EtherNet I
96. Zero Position Dest Scattered Write Request 7 Length Copy File Source Analog InO Hi Dest Scattered Write Request 10 Length 2 Copy File Source PTP Setpoint Dest Scattered Write Request 13 Length 2 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 17 Figure 6 18 Example Scattered Write Request Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive amp Value DataType Description Scattered Write Request INT 15 Scattered Write Request 0 536 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Request 1 26214 Parameter Value LSW Scattered Write Request 2 16689 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered Write Request 3 538 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Fiequest 4 26214 INT Parameter Value LSW n Scattered Write Request 5 16817 INT _ Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Write_Request 6 725 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Wiite Request 7 33 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered Write Request 8 0 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Write_Request 9 21555 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Request 10 0 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered Write Request 11 16560 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered Write Request 12 780 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Request 13 10019 Parameter Value LSW Scaltered Write
97. assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 MSW N20 37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 LSW N20 38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 MSW Using the I O Table 5 H Controller Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700 VC Drives Data Table Address Description N20 1 Logic Status see Appendix D N20 2 Reserved N20 3 Speed Feedback N20 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 LSW N20 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 MSW N20 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 LSW N20 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 MSW N20 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 LSW N20 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 MSW N20 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 LSW N20 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 MSW N20 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 LSW N20 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 MSW N20 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 LSW N20 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 MSW N20 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 LSW N20 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1
98. be the source end of a link 1 May not be the source end of a link 27 Enhanced Bit ENUM Parameter supports enhanced bit ENUMs 28 Enhanced ENUM Parameter supports enhanced ENUMs 29 Uses DPI Limits Object Parameter uses the DPI Limits Object Intelligent offline tools make use of the Limits Object to select limits and units 30 Extended Descriptor Parameter uses Extended Descriptor bits which can be obtained by reading the DPI Extended Descriptor attribute for this parameter 31 Always Upload Download _ Parameter shall always be included in uploads and downloads 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 34 EtherNet IP Objects Extended Descriptor Attributes Bit Name Description 0 Indirect Mode 0 Analog selects entire parameters 1 Digital selects individual bits within parameters 1 Indirect Type 0 Analog input list Instance OxFFFF 2 Indirect Type 1 Digital input list Instance OXFFFE 3 Indirect Type 2 Feedback list Instance OXFFFD 4 Indirect Type 3 Analog output list Instance OXFFFC 5 Indirect Type 4 Digital output list Instance OxFFFB 6 Indirect Type 5 Undefined Instance OxFFFA 7 Indirect Type 6 Undefined Instance 0xFFF9 8 Indirect Type 7 Undefined Instance 0xFFF8 9 Indirect Type 8 Undefined Instance OxFFF7 10 Indirect Type 9 Undefined Instance 0xFFF6 11 Indirect Type 10 Undefined Instance Ox
99. between Peer messages Because the adapter transmits Peer messages when a change of state condition occurs minimum and maximum intervals are required The minimum interval ensures that the adapter does not transmit messages on the network too often thus minimizing network traffic It is set using Parameter 52 Peer Out Time The maximum interval ensures that the adapter transmits messages often enough so that the receiving adapter s can receive recent data and verify that communications are working or if communications are not working can timeout The maximum interval is the value of Parameter 52 Peer Out Time multiplied by the value of Parameter 53 Peer Out Skip In the Figure 3 16 example the minimum interval is set to 2 00 seconds Parameter 52 Peer Out Time and the maximum interval is set to 4 00 seconds 2 00 x 2 setting of Parameter 53 Peer Out Skip Figure 3 16 Example Peer Out Time and Peer Out Skip LCD HIM Screens Port 5 Device Port 5 Device 20 COMM E 20 COMM E Parameter 52 Parameter 53 Peer Out Time Peer Out Skip 2 00 5 2 0 lt gt 10 00 1 lt gt 16 Default 10 00 s Default 1 Set Parameter 51 Peer Out Enable to 1 On The adapter will transmit the data selected in Parameters 49 Peer A Output and 50 Peer B Output to the network Another adapter must be configured to receive the Peer I O data 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User
100. code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 89 Example Ladder Logic to Write Multiple Parameters MSG Read Write Message CEN MSG File MG18 0 CDN3 Setup Screen ER w Important If the explicit message scattered write must be written continuously then use a separate Generic Set service explicit message single write for each parameter using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x9F and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 64 Attribute A writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example scattered write message using attribute writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 71 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 6 90 Custom Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screens 3 MSG MG18 0 1 Elements Send Data Receive Data Ins Add Del Remove From Device This MicroLogix x3 MSG MG18 0 1 Elements MultiHop Send Data Receive Data Control Bits Ignore if timed out 0 Break Connection BK Awaiting Execution EW This Controller Channel 1 Integral Communication Command Data Table Address Receive
101. documentation to determine the parameter data type 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 46 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P Figure 6 56 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Response Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Parameter 001 Output Freq In this message example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Read Value Data Type 1 Output Freq 45 0 Hz REAL 7 Output Current 0 04 Amp REAL 137 Open Loop Fdbk 710659711 DINT 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data 45 0 Hz REAL 260 Analog InO Value 9 361 Volts REAL Using Explicit Messaging 6 47 SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service A Custom scattered write message is used to write to multiple parameters This write message example writes the following values to these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Write Value PowerFlex 750 Series Write Value Drive Parameter Drive Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 536 Accel Time 2 1t1Sec 143 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 105 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 725 Zero Position 33 106 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 21555 Port 5 Analog InO 55
102. down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 Only drive parameters Port 0 can be written to using Parameter Object Class code To write to a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 6 39 3 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit parameter If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter the Size in Words would be set to 2 When the parameter being written to is a 32 bit REAL floating point data type the size in words would be set to 2 See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL Using Explicit Messaging 6 35 SLC 500 Example Write Single Request Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 40 to store the request value 10 0 sec that was written to drive parameter 140 Accel Time 1 To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling refer to the specific drive documentation Figure 6 40 Example Write Single Request Data File Data File N50 dec Radix Decimal Symbol Columns 10 Desc N50 Properties Usage Help Figure 6 41 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for write messages in the SLC 500 Figure 6
103. drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable or faulted controller ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Changing the Fault Action Set the values of Parameters 21 Comm Flt Action and 22 Idle FIt Action to the desired responses Value Action Description 0 Fault The drive is faulted and stopped Default 1 Stop The drive is stopped but not faulted 2 Zero Data The drive is sent 0 for output data This does not command a stop 3 Hold Last The drive continues in its present state 4 Send Fit Cfg drive is sent the data that you set in the fault configuration parameters Parameters 25 Flt Cfg Logic through 34 FIt Cfg D2 In Figure 3 25 Example Fault Action LCD HIM Screens Port 5 Device Port 5 Device 20 COMM E 20 COMM E Parameter 21 Parameter 22 Comm Fit Action Idle Fit Action Fault Fault Changes to these parameters take effect immediately A reset is not required If communication is disrupted and then is re established the drive will automatically take commands from the network again 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 3 16 Configuring the Adapter Setting the Fault Configuration Parameters If you set Parameter 21 Comm Fit Action or 22 Idle Flt Action to Send Cfg the values in the following parameters are sent to
104. dust If the adapter is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere Certification Specification UL UL508C cUL CAN CSA C22 2 No 14 M91 CE EN50178 and EN61800 3 CTick EN61800 3 NOTE This is a product of category C2 according to IEC 61800 3 In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required Appendix B About Parameter Numbers Parameter List Adapter Parameters Appendix B provides information about the adapter parameters Topic Page About Parameter Numbers B 1 Parameter List B 1 The parameters in the adapter are numbered consecutively However depending on which configuration tool you use they may have different numbers Configuration Tool e HIM e DriveExplorer e DriveExecutive e Explicit Messaging Numbering Scheme The adapter parameters begin with parameter 01 For example Parameter 01 DPI Port is parameter 01 as indicated by this manual Refer to Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging and Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects for details Parameter No Name and Description Details 01 DPI Port Default 5 Displays the port to which the adapter is connected Minimum 0 This will usually be port 5 Maximum 7 Type Read Only 02 Data Rate Default 0 125 kbps Displays the data rate used by the drive
105. e Commanded Direction e Rotation Direction e Process Status 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 8 4 Viewing the Adapter s Web Pages Process Display Pop up Window 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P The Process Display pop up window dynamically shows the host drive s information To view this window click the Process display link in the navigation menu Figure 8 2 Example of Process Display Pop up Window nttp 10 91 100 79 Rockwell Automation Microsoft Internet Explorer EBR Process Display Product Text PowerFlex 70 EC 240V 4 2A Status Stopped Commanded Direction Forward Rotation Direction Forward 0 0 Hz Process Status 0 00 Amps 333 4 Bus VDC This page refreshes automatically every 3 seconds Internet Information Description Product Text Description of host drive Status Status of host drive Commanded Direction direction of host drive Rotation Direction Rotation direction of host drive Process Status 1st Line Dynamic value of the host drive feedback parameter not selectable Lines 2 and 3 Dynamic value of each default displayed host drive parameter selectable Line 2 and 3 default displayed host drive parameters can be changed using a HIM DriveExecutive software or DriveExplorer software TCP IP Configuration Web Page Viewing the Adapters Web Pages 8 5 The TCP IP
106. entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 For example to read parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the instance would be 21504 4 21508 See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F to determine the instance number 3 In this example Output Current is a 32 bit parameter If the parameter being read is a 16 bit parameter the Size in Bytes would be set to 2 When the parameter being read is a 32 bit REAL floating point data type the size in bytes would be set to 4 See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 4 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 62 Using Explicit Messaging MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Get Attribute Single Response Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 76 to store the response value 0 13 amps th
107. example Figure 8 8 shows module information for the Port 0 device host drive Diagnostic Items Shows diagnostic item information for the respective Port device For example Figure 8 9 shows diagnostic items for the Port 0 device host drive Fault Queue Shows fault queue information for the respective Port device For example Figure 8 10 shows the fault queue for the Port 0 device host drive Alarm Queue Shows alarm queue information for the respective Port device For example Figure 8 11 shows the alarm queue for the Port 0 device host drive Event Queue 7 Shows event queue information for the respective Port device For example Figure 8 12 shows the event queue for the Port 5 device 22 COMM E adapter 1 Information shown only when supported by the device Figure 8 8 Example of Port 0 PowerFlex 70 Drive Module Information Page Ai Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer Edt View Favorites Tools Qu X 2 5 Jer O G c LJ E 4 3 http 10 91 100 79 Allen Bradley ea aura SIN S Ee Expand Minimize 9 Home D Process display TCP IP configurati Configure e mail n amp Browse DPI device Port 0 PowerFlt Module inform 0 Diagnostics Fault queue Alarm queue G Port 1 LCD Moc G Port 2 1203 US G Port 3 Not Ava Gi Port 4 Not Ava G Port 5 20 COMI Gi Port 6 Not Ava D Online user manuz D Software to
108. file Size in Bytes 29 Number of bytes to be transferred Each byte size is an 8 bit integer Extended Routing RIX16 0 An unused routing information file for the controller Service 1 Write Parameter Code for the requested service Instance 2 140 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable Only drive parameters Port 0 can be written to using Parameter Object Class code OxOF To write to a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 6 63 3 n this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit parameter If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter the Size in Bytes would be set to 4 When the parameter being written to is a 32 bit REAL floating point data type the size in bytes would be set to 4 See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 59 MicroLogix 110
109. from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller When using PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series drives which contain both DINT 32 bit format and REAL floating point format data types you will always read from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller first Then if the data value exceeds 16 bits the remaining 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P value will be in the MSW data table address Table 5 G Controller Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 70 SC EC PowerFlex 700 SC and PowerFlex 700H Drives and SMC Flex Data Table Address Description N20 1 Logic Status see Appendix D N20 2 Reserved N20 3 Speed Feedback N20 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 LSW N20 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 MSW N20 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 LSW N20 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 MSW N20 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 LSW N20 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 MSW N20 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 LSW N20 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 MSW N20 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 LSW N20 13 Value of
110. higher values for communicating with low priority devices The Inhibit Module box when checked inhibits the module from communicating with the RSLogix 5000 project When the Major Fault on box is checked a major controller fault will occur when the module s connection fails while the controller is in the Run Mode For this example leave the Inhibit Module and Major Fault On boxes unchecked Unicast support has been added to RSLogix 5000 version 18 However to also support unicast the controller firmware must be version 18 or later and the 20 COMM E Series B adapter at version 4 001 or later Unicast is recommended whenever possible For the benefits of unicast operation see Preparing for an Installation on page 2 1 If unicast is selected and the 20 COMM E adapter does not support it the connection will be rejected In this case either update the 20 COMM E firmware to version 4 001 or later or uncheck the Use Unicast Connection over EtherNet IP checkbox Figure 4 10 On the New Module screen click the Port Configuration tab Figure 4 11 Figure 4 11 New Module Port Configuration Tab Screen New Module General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Drive IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Enable BootP Status Offline 10 In the Port Configuration tab screen edit the following information Box Setting IP Address The I
111. how to flash update using DriveExplorer DriveExecutive ControlFLASH or HyperTerminal Using RSLinx Classic Chapter 4 Configuring the I O This chapter provides instructions on how to configure a Rockwell Automation ControlLogix PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller to communicate with the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive Topic Page Using RSLinx Classic 4 1 ControlLogix Example 4 2 Limitations When Using PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 4 21 PLC 5 Example 4 22 SLC 500 Example 4 30 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example 4 38 RSLinx Classic in all its variations Lite Gateway OEM etc is used to provide a communication link between the computer network and controller RSLinx Classic requires its network specific driver to be configured before communications are established with network devices To configure the RSLinx driver 1 Start RSLinx and select Communications gt Configure Drivers to display the Configure Drivers screen 2 From the Available Driver Types pull down box choose EtherNet IP Driver and then click Add New to display the Add New RSLinx Driver screen 3 Usethe default name or type a new name and click OK The Configure driver screen appears 4 Depending on your application select either the browse local or remote subnet option and click OK The Configure Drivers screen reappears with the new driver in the Configured Drivers list Figure 4
112. indicates that the bit is used to specify the node For example a subnet mask on a network may appear as follows 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 255 255 255 192 This mask indicates that 26 bits are used to identify the network and 6 bits are used to identify devices on each network Instead of a single physical Class C network with 254 devices this subnet mask divides it into four networks with up to 62 devices each Switches Network devices that provide virtual connections that help to control collisions and reduce traffic on the network They are able to reduce network congestion by transmitting packets to an individual port only if they are destined for the connected device In a control application in which real time data access is critical network switches may be required in place of hubs 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P G 8 Glossary 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P TCP Transmission Control Protocol EtherNet IP uses this protocol to transfer Explicit Messaging packets using IP TCP guarantees delivery of data through the use of retries UDP User Datagram Protocol EtherNet IP uses this protocol to transfer I O packets using IP UDP provides a simple but fast capability to send I O messaging packets between devices This protocol ensures that adapters transmit the most recent data because it does not use acknowledgements or retrie
113. instance of the TCP IP Interface object Number Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Object Attributes Class Attributes AitbuleD AccessRule Name Data Type Description 1 WORD The revision of this object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Interface Speed DWORD Speed in megabits per second Mbs 2 Get Interface Flags DWORD Bit Value 0 Link status 0 inactive 1 active 1 Duplex 0 half duplex 1 full duplex 2 31 Reserved 3 Get Physical Address BYTE 6 MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX The first octet USINT 0 is on the left 4 Get Interface Counters STRUCT of DWORD Octets received DWORD Unicast packets received DWORD Non unicast packets received DWORD Inbound packets received but discarded DWORD Inbound packets with errors not discarded DWORD Inbound packets with unknown protocol DWORD Octets sent DWORD Unicast packets sent DWORD Non unicast packets sent DWORD Outbound packets discarded DWORD Outbound packets with errors 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 38 EtherNet IP Objects Attribute ID 5 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Access Rule Get Name Media Counters Data Type STRUCT of DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD DWORD Description RX Received TX Transmitted RX frames not having
114. integral number of octets long RX frames not passing FCS check TX frames having one collision TX frames having multiple collisions Number of times of SQE test error message TX Frames delayed first attempt by busy medium Collisions detected later than 512 bit times in trans TX frames failing due to excessive collisions TX frames failing due to intern MAC sublayer TX error Times of carrier sense condition loss during trans RX frames exceeding the maximum frame size RX frames failing due to intern MAC sublayer RX error PowerFlex 70 70EC PowerFlex 700 700VC and PowerFlex 700H Drives Logic Bits Appendix D Logic Command Status Words Appendix D presents the definitions of the Logic Command and Logic Status words that are used for some products that can be connected to the adapter If the Logic Command Logic Status for the product that you are using is not listed refer to your product s documentation Logic Command Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 71161541312 1 0 Description x Stop 7 0 Not Stop 1 Stop X Start 02 0 Not Start 1 Start Jog 0 Not Jog Par 100 1 Clear Faults 0 Not Clear Faults 1 Clear Faults Direction 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control Local Control 0 No Local Control 1 Local Control MOP Increment 0 Not Increment 1 Increment
115. is under the adapter before tightening screw After tightening the screw verify continuity exists between the head of the screw and drive ground PowerFlex 700H Frames 9 and Larger PowerFlex 700S Frames 9 and Larger Adapter mounts behind HIM panel NOTE When installing the adapter in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive refer to the 20 750 20COMM Option Card Installation Instructions publication 750COM IN001 supplied with the option card 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 2 6 Installing the Adapter Connecting the Adapter to the Network Applying Power 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists The PowerFlex drive may contain high voltages that can cause injury or death Remove power from the drive and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing the adapter 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Use static control precautions 3 Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the network See Figure 2 4 for an example of wiring to an EtherNet IP network Figure 2 44 Connecting the Ethernet Cable to the Network Controller PowerFlex 7 Class Drives ControlLogix shown with each with a 20 COMM E Adapt
116. later In addition you can use a BOOTP server to configure the network address for the adapter Status indicators that report the status of the drive communications the adapter and network They are visible when the drive cover is open or closed Parameter configured I O Logic Command Reference and up to four pairs of Datalinks to accommodate application requirements Explicit Messaging support Master Slave or Peer to Peer hierarchy that can be set up so that the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive transmit data to and from either a scanner or another PowerFlex drive on the network User defined fault actions to determine how the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive respond to messaging communication disruptions Comm FIt Action Controllers in idle mode Idle Flt Action Web pages viewed using a web browser that show information about the adapter connected drive and other DPI devices connected to the drive Configurable e mail messaging to desired addresses when selected drive faults occur and or are cleared and or when the adapter takes a communication or idle fault action Access to any PowerFlex drive and its connected peripherals on the network to which the adapter is connected Compatible Products Required Equipment Getting Started 1 3 DPI is a second generation peripheral communication interface and a functional enhancement to SCANport The adapter is compatible with Allen Bradley Power
117. occurred Figure 6 60 Example Scattered Write Response Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive ta File N80 dec Radix Decimal Symbol Columns 10 v Desc N80 Properties Usage Help The PowerFlex 750 Series drive uses 32 bit integer and REAL parameters A COP command must be used to copy the 16 bit integer or REAL values to the N90 integer array Figure 6 61 shows the ladder logic used for this example If the parameter data type is a 32 bit integer the data remains split into two 16 bit integers since there are no 32 bit integers in the SLC 500 If the parameter data type is a REAL the floating point value in the SLC 500 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 50 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P is copied COP to two 16 bit integers Then the MSW most significant word and LSW least significant word must be swapped before moving MOV the values to the array to be written to See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type 32 bit integer or REAL Figure 6 61 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Request Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter 780 PTP Setpoint PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Copy File Source Dest Parameter 536 Accel Time 2 Using Explicit Messaging 6 51 Figure 6 62 Example Scattered Write Request Data File for PowerFlex 750 Series Dri
118. out TO To be retried Awaiting Execution EW Continuous Run C0 Error ER Message done DN 500CPU Write IN20 20 Target Device Message Timeout 5 Data Table Address N41 0 Local MultiHop 3 MSG Rung 42 4 N12 0 Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled Waiting for Queue Space EBEE elele ee c Local Remote Del Remove Hop From Port To Address 1 EtherNet IP Device str To Address 10 31 100 78 From Device Ins Add Hop This Processor Setting Communication Command This setting is unavailable grayed out and is established when the message is created in the ladder rung Data Table Address N20 20 An unused controller data table address containing the data to be written to the drive Size in Elements 2 19 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout 5 Message timeout duration in seconds Data Table Address N41 0 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive MultiHop MultiHop Tab Box To Address Yes Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the adapter drive When Yes is selected a MultiHop tab appears on the message configu
119. parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 MSW N20 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 LSW N20 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 MSW N20 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 LSW N20 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 MSW N20 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 LSW N20 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 MSW N20 20 Logic Command see Appendix D N20 21 Reserved N20 22 Speed Reference N20 23 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 LSW N20 24 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 MSW N20 25 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 LSW N20 26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 MSW N20 27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 LSW N20 28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 MSW N20 29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 LSW N20 30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 MSW N20 31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 LSW N20 32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 MSW N20 33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 LSW N20 34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 MSW N20 35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 LSW N20 36 Value of parameter
120. read message example reads the values of these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 003 Output Current e Parameter 007 Output Current e Parameter 006 Output Voltage e Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk e Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage e Parameter 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data e Parameter 017 Analog In1 Value e Parameter 260 Analog 1 0 Value Refer to DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 82 Example Ladder Logic to Read Multiple Parameters 3 0 MSG E Read Write Message CEN 2 MSG File MG17 0 DN Setup Screen lt Using Explicit Messaging 6 67 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 6 83 Custom Scattered Read Message Configuration Screens 0 General Send Data Receive Data Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To
121. refer to Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings on page 5 18 Creating RSLogix 500 version 7 or later Project To transmit read and write data between the controller and drive you must create message instructions that allocate data table addresses in the controller for Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks Selecting the Controller 1 Start RSLogix 500 The RSLogix 500 window appears Select File gt New to display the Select Processor Type screen Figure 4 41 Figure 4 41 MicroLogix 1100 Select Processor Type Screen Select Processor Type Processor Name EXAMPLE Micrologix 1500 LSP Series B Cancel MicroLogix 1500 LSP Series MicroLogix 1200 Series C 1 or 2 Comm Ports Help MicroLogix 1200 Series B MicroLogix 1200 Series Micrologix 1100 Series MicroLogix 1000 Analog MicroLogix 1000 DH 485 HDSlave Bul 1761 MicroLogix 1000 1747 L40A 24 115 VAC In 16 RLY Out 1747 L40B 24 115 VAC In 16 TRIAC Out 1747 L40C F 24 DC SNK In 16 RLY Out 1747 L40E 24 0 SNK In 16 TRANS SRC Out 1747 L40L 24 DC SRC In 16 TRANS SNK Out Communication settings Driver Processor Node Reply Timeout Ethernet xj M8 Decal Who Active 10 261 Octal 2 Assign for the processor In the list select the MicroLogix 1100 Then select the appropriate choices for the fields in the screen to match your application and click OK The RSLogix 500 project window appears 20 COMM E Ethe
122. the Control Timeout class attribute 100 has been set to a non zero value 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C4 EtherNet IP Objects Register Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x07 7 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances Instance Description 1 All I O data being read from the DPI device read only 2 All I O data written to the DPI device read write 3 Logic Status and Feedback data read only 4 Logic Command and Reference data read write 5 Datalink A input data from device to scanner read only 6 Datalink A output data from scanner to device read write 7 Datalink B input data from device to scanner read only 8 Datalink B output data from scanner to device read write 9 Datalink C input data from device to scanner read only 10 Datalink C output data from scanner to device read write 11 Datalink D input data from device to scanner read only 12 Datalink D output data from scanner to device read write 13 Logic Status and Feedback Data read only 14 Mask 7 read write 15 Logic Status read only 16 Logic Command read write 17 Feedback read only 18 Reference read write 1 The mask command word is set to the value of the first word of the data where there are ones in th
123. the Online mode and the I O Not Responding box in the upper left of the window should be flashing green Also a yellow warning symbol should be displayed on the I O Configuration folder in the treeview and on the drive profile If the controller was in Run Mode before clicking Download RSLogix 5000 prompts you to change the controller mode back to Remote Run In this case choose the appropriate mode for your application If the controller was in Program Mode before clicking Download this prompt will not appear 3 Select File gt Save If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears Navigate to a folder type a file name and click Save to save the configuration to a file on your computer To ensure that the present project configuration values are saved RSLogix 5000 prompts you to upload them Click Yes to upload save Correlating the Drive with the Controller You must now correlate the drive settings to the RSLogix 5000 project I O settings so that they match This requires loading the project I O settings into the drive 1 In the treeview under I O Configuration right click on the drive profile for this example My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive and select Properties 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 12 Configuring the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P 2 Click the Drive tab and then click Connect to Drive
124. the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 For example to write to parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the instance would be 21504 4 21508 See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F to determine the instance number 3 Setting the Attribute value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Non Volatile Storage EEPROM memory so the parameter value will remain even after the drive is power cycled Important When set to 9 be very cautious as the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the Attribute value to 10 will write the parameter value to temporary memory so the parameter value will be lost after the drive is power cycled It is recommended to use the 10 setting when frequent write messages are required 4 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit parameter If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter the Size in Bytes would be set to 4 5 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manua
125. to Write a Single Parameter Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service A Generic Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 46 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter B3 0 EEM JE EtherNet IP Explicit Message I CEN 1 Control Block N14 0 CDN 5 Control Block Length 58 lt ER Setup Screen lt 20 EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 40 Using Explicit Messaging SLC 500 Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 6 47 Generic Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens 72 EEM N14 0 58 Elements General Send Data Receive Data Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This SLC500 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 79 72 EEM N14 0 58 Elements Send Data Receive Data This Controller Message Control Bits Channel 1 Ignore if timed out 0 Size in Words Receive Data 0 Send Data 1 Awaiting Execution EW Data Table Address Receive Data N A Send Data
126. value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value WORD Pad Word WORD Pad Word STRING 4 Units for example Amp Hz WORD Multiplier 2 WORD Divisor WORD Base 2 INT Offset 2 DWORD Link source of the value 0 no link STRING 16 Diagnostic name text 1 Get Set Value Various Diagnostic item value 2 Get International Diagnostic Item Text STRUCT of STRINGN Diagnostic name text STRINGN Diagnostic units text 3 Get International Full Read All STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Value CONTAINER Minimum CONTAINER Maximum CONTAINER Default WORD Pad Word WORD Pad Word WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset DWORD Pad BOOL 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN Diagnostic name text STRINGN Diagnostic units text 1 A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32 bits 2 This value is used in the formulas used to convert the value between display units and internal units Refer to Formulas for Converting on page C 21 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 28 EtherNet IP Objects DPI Time Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0 9 155 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
127. value is 35 5 amps Reading the associated parameter Datalink received by the controller the value would be 355 By using ladder logic divide the value by 10 in the controller to get the correct scaling PowerFlex 750 Series Drives When using RSLogix 5000 version 16 or later Datalink scaling is done automatically However when using RSLogix 5000 version 15 or earlier or when using a PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller Datalinks require scaling in the following way Parameters are either 32 bit integers or REALs When the parameter is a 32 bit integer the data needs to be copied using a COP command to a DINT tag Since PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 1400 controllers do not support 32 bit integers the data must be separated into two 16 bit integers When the parameter is a REAL the data needs to be copied using a COP command to a REAL tag Refer to subsequent sections in this chapter for ladder logic examples Using 16 Bit Datalinks to Read Write 32 Bit Parameters This subsection only pertains to PowerFlex 70 SC or EC PowerFlex 700 SC and PowerFlex 700H drives which use 16 bit Datalinks To read or write a 32 bit parameter using 16 bit Datalinks typically both Datalinks of a pair A B C D are set to the same 32 bit parameter For example to read Parameter 10 Elapsed Run Time in a PowerFlex 70 drive both Datalink A Out Parameter 310 and Datalink A2 Out Parameter 311 are set to 10 Data
128. with any application Rockwell Automation Inc does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication Quick Start Getting Started 1 5 This section is provided to help experienced users quickly start using the adapter If you are unsure how to complete a step refer to the referenced chapter Step Action Refer to 1 Review the safety precautions for the adapter Throughout This Manual 2 Verify that the PowerFlex drive is properly installed Drive User Manual 3 Install the adapter PowerFlex 7 Class DPI Verify that the PowerFlex drive is not powered Then connect the jede adapter to the network using an Ethernet cable and to the drive Instructions publication using the Internal Interface cable Use the captive screws to 20COMM IN004 and secure and ground the adapter to the drive Chapter 2 NOTE When installing the adapter in a Installing the Adapter e DPI External Comms Kit refer to the 20 XCOMM DC BASE Installation Instructions publication 20COMM IN001 supplied with the kit e PowerFlex 750 Series drive refer to the 20 750 20COMM Option Card Installation Instructions publication 750COM IN001 supplied with the option card 4 Apply power to the adapter Chapter 2 A The adapter receives power from the drive Verify that the Installing the Adapter adapter is installed correctly and then apply power to the dri
129. 0 Then press Enter Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG12 0 for the message created in Step 1 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter In the MSG instruction double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 47 Figure 4 46 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command Reference and Datalink In MSG Read Write Message MSG File 612 0 DN5 pus tide I ER 5 MG12 0 MG12 0 all CU DN EN MG12 0 ER 4 Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen General Tab Box Configuring the I O 4 45 Figure 4 47 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Command Reference and Datalink In 3 MSG Rung 42 4 MG12 0 ultiHop This Controller Control Bits Channel 1 Integral Ignore if timed out 0 0 Communication Command 500CPU Write Eiei Eriata 0 Data Table Address 2020 Awaiting Execution EW o Size in Elements 19 Error ER p Target Device Message done DN 0
130. 0 1400 Example Write Single Request Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 72 to store the request value 10 0 sec that was written to drive parameter 140 Accel Time 1 To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling refer to the specific drive documentation Figure 6 72 Example Write Single Request Data File Z Data File N50 dec DEK 2 Radix Decimal Symbol Columns 10 Desc N50 m Properties Help Figure 6 73 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for write messages in the MicroLogix 1100 1400 Figure 6 73 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Writes For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point F8 4 arameters Dest N50 0 Length 2 PowerFlex 700S Drives 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 60 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P MicroLogix 1100 1400 Explicit Messaging Using the Generic Get Set Attribute Service MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A Generic Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output
131. 0 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Port Number 2 Controller port to which the network is connected Data Table Address N150 6 Specific starting address of the source file in the drive MultiHop Yes Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the drive MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 Because the N files used for the data transfer occupies two contiguous 16 bit words the Size in Elements must always be set to 2 regardless of whether the parameter being read is a 16 bit parameter or a 32 bit parameter 2 See page C 11 for N file addressing Below are some examples of how to address N files 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P N File Address Data Type Description Notes N150 6 32 bit integer Parameter of PowerFlex 70 drive N155 14 32 bit REAL Parameter 7 of PowerFlex 750 Series drive E MUROS mem Gana xample ladder logic rungs N155 200 32 bit integer Parameter 725 of PowerFlex 750 Series drive are shown in Figure 6 29 for N209 154 32 bit REAL Port 5 Parameter 77 of 24V I O module in these three different PowerFlex 750 Series drive parameter data types N211 50 16 bit integer Port 6 Parameter 25 of 20 COMM E adapter in PowerFlex 750 Series drive Using Explicit Messaging 6 25 PLC 5 Example Single Read Re
132. 2 Press the Enter key to enter your selection Main Menu 3 Press the or G key to scroll to the adapter Diagnostics 20 COMM E Parameter 4 Press the Enter key to select the adapter A parameter XMAS database is constructed and then the main menu for the adapter is displayed Port 5 Device 5 Edit the parameters using the same techniques that you use to 20 COMM E edit drive parameters Main Menu Diagnostics Device Select NOTE configuration procedures throughout this chapter use the PowerFlex 7 Class LCD HIM to access parameters in the adapter and show example LCD HIM screens gt TIP When using a PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM refer to its User Manual publication 20 HIM UM001 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Using BOOTP Configuring the Adapter 3 8 By default the adapter is configured so that you can set its IP address subnet mask and gateway address by using a BOOTP utility You can select from a variety of BOOTP utilities These instructions use Rockwell s BOOTP Server version 2 3 or later a free stand alone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BOOTP utilities with a graphical interface It is available from http www software rockwell com support download detail cfm ID 3390 Refer to the Readme file and online Help for directions and more information TIP If desired you can disable BOO
133. 2 2 S S S olo o St E ee oe Default 0 0 1 Bit 7 6 5 3 2 0 20 EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 Adapter Parameters 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Parameter No Name and Description 24 25 26 DPI 1 0 Act Displays the I O that the adapter is actively transmitting The value of this parameter will usually be equal to the value of Parameter 23 DPI I O Cfg Fit Cfg Logic Sets the Logic Command data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true e Parameter 21 Comm Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and I O communications are disrupted e Parameter 22 Idle Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and the controller is idle e Parameter 41 Peer Fit Action is set to 4 Send Cfg and Peer I O communications are disrupted The bit definitions will depend on the product to which the adapter is connected See Appendix D or the documentation for the drive being used Fit Cfg Ref Sets the Reference data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true e Parameter 21 Comm Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and I O communications are disrupted e Parameter 22 Idle Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and the controller is idle e Parameter 41 Peer Flt Action is set to 4 Send Cfg and Peer
134. 2 bit integer or REAL 4 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO10E EN P 6 38 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Using Explicit Messaging Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P SLC 500 Example Get Attribute Single Response Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 44 to store the response value 0 13 amps that was read from drive parameter 003 Output Current To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling refer to the specific drive documentation Figure 6 44 Example Get Attribute Single Response Data File Data File N40 dec BEE BIE Radix Decimal Pj Columns 10 Figure 6 45 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for get messages in the SLC 500 Figure 6 45 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Gets N40 0 For 16 bit Integer 0 Parameters All N41 0 PowerFlex Drives o lt For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives N41 4 F8 3 H Using Explicit Messaging 6 39 SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program
135. 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter Allen Bradley Series A FRN 2 xxx Series B FRN 4 xxx User Manual Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information
136. 41 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Writes For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives OP For 32 bit REAL It as Floating Point Dest N51 4 Parameters Length 2 PowerFlex 700S Drives 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 36 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P SLC 500 Explicit Messaging Using the Generic Get Set Attribute Service SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A Generic Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 42 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter EEM EtherNet IP Explicit Message I EN Control Block N13 0 CDN Control Block Length 58 CER Setup Screen lt Using Explicit Messaging 6 37 SLC 500 Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 6 43 Generic Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens H EEM N13 0 58 Elements General
137. Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P General Tab Box This PLC 5 Configuring the I O 4 29 Figure 4 31 PLC 5 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Command Reference and Datalink In 3 MSG Rung 2 4 MG12 0 1 MutiH op This PLC 5 Control Bits Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Write Ignore if timed out 0 Data Table Address To be retried NR Size in Elements Port Number Awaiting Execution EW Continuous Run CO Error Target Device Message done DN Data Table Address Message Transmitting ST MultiHop Message Enabled EN 1 3 MSG Rung 42 4 MG12 0 Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This PLC5 2 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 79 Setting Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Write The controller type and command type for the controller to write data to the drive Data Table Address N20 20 An unused controller data table address containing the data to be written to the drive Size in Elements 2 19 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Port Number 2 Controller port to which the network is connected Target Device data for adapter drive Data Table Address N41 0 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive MultiHop MultiHop Tab Box To Addre
138. CIP Common Industrial Protocol G 1 classes of IP addresses G 5 Comm Fit Action parameter B 3 commissioning the adapter 2 8 communications module see adapter compatible products 1 3 components of the adapter 1 1 configuration tools 3 1 connecting adapter to the drive 2 3 network 2 6 ControlFLASH G 1 controller G 1 ControlLogix controller configuring the I O 4 2 explicit messaging 6 4 using the I O 5 10 D data rate definition G 2 setting 3 8 Datalink Size parameter B 2 Datalinks definition G 2 in I O image 5 2 using 5 7 using Datalink D to send optional I O Board data 9 2 diagnostic items 7 4 dimensions A 2 DPI connector on adapter 1 1 data rates A 1 definition G 2 Internal Interface cable 2 3 2 4 peripheral G 2 products 1 3 G 2 DPI Alarm object C 24 DPI Data Rate parameter B 1 DPI Device object C 13 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Index 2 DPI Diagnostic object C 26 DPI External Comms Kit using adapter in 9 1 DPI Fault object C 22 DPI I O Act parameter B 4 DPI I O Cfg parameter B 3 DPI Parameter object C 16 DPI Port parameter B 1 DPI Time object C 28 DriveExecutive software adapter configuration tool 3 1 definition web site G 2 DriveExplorer software adapter configuration tool 3 1 definition web site G 2 free lite version G 2 drives see PowerFlex drives DriveTools SP software G 2 duplex communication mode defi
139. COMM Option Card is installed in Port 6 and a 24V I O module is installed in Port 5 Also Data In B2 D2 Parameters 898 902 and Data Out B2 D2 Parameters 908 912 are enabled but not used 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2070MM UMO10E EN P TIP Data In parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs for example data to write to a drive parameter Data Out parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter Using the I O 5 19 TIP When using a drive that has 16 bit Datalinks PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 and PowerFlex 700H to transfer a 32 bit parameter two contiguous drive Datalink parameters for example Data Out A1 A2 B1 B2 etc are required To determine if a parameter is a 32 bit parameter see the Parameter section in the drive documentation and look for a V7 symbol in the No column All parameters in PowerFlex 700 Series B drives are 32 bit parameters For example parameter 3 Output Current in a PowerFlex 70 EC drive is a 32 bit parameter When using a drive that has 32 bit Datalinks PowerFlex 700 VC and PowerFlex 700S only one drive Datalink parameter is required to transfer any parameter Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses Since PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 1400 controllers are 16 bit platforms and are used with the 32 bit 20 COMM E adapter the data will be transposed f
140. COMM UM010E EN P Components Chapter 1 Getting Started The adapter is intended for installation into a PowerFlex 7 Class drive and is used for network communication The Series B 20 COMM E adapter FRN 3 xxx or later can also be installed in an External DPI Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE For PowerFlex 755 drives it is recommended to use its embedded EtherNet IP adapter instead of the 20 COMM E adapter to take advantage of the embedded adapter s advanced capability When used with PowerFlex 750 Series drives including the PowerFlex 753 drive the 20 COMM E adapter must have firmware version 4 001 or later and must be installed using the 20 750 20COMM Option Card This manual includes information on using the 20 COMM E adapter with the PowerFlex 753 drive but it also applies to the PowerFlex 755 drive Topic Page Components 14 Features 8 Compatible Products 1 3 Required Equipment 1 3 Safety Precautions 14 Quick Start 1 5 Status Indicators 1 6 Figure 1 1 Components of the Adapter Not provided on Series A adapter Item Part Description Q Status Indicators Four LEDs that indicate the status of the DPI the adapter and network connection Refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting o DPI Connector A 20 pin single row shrouded male header An Internal Interface cable is connected to this connector and a connector on the drive e Ethernet Connector An RJ 45 conn
141. Class Drive Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Scattered Write Request Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 91 to store the request values to be written to these drive parameters 143 Decel Time 2 105 Preset Speed 5 106 Preset Speed 6 107 Preset Speed 7 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P Address Write Value PowerFlex 750 Series Write Value Data Type Drive Parameter N90 1 11 1 Sec 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec REAL N90 4 22 2 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec REAL N90 7 33 3 Hz 725 Zero Position 33 32 bit integer N90 10 44 4 Hz 21555 Port 5 Analog InO Hi 15 5 REAL N90 13 55 5 Hz 780 PTP Setpoint 75 555 32 bit integer Refer to DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for parameter numbering Figure 6 91 or Figure 6 94 shows the parameter values Figure 6 91 Example Scattered Write Request Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive 13 Data File N90 dec Radix Decimal pe Symbol Columns 10 Desc H Properties MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Scattered Write Response Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 92 to store the response values that were written to the requested drive parameters
142. Configuration web page provides information about the adapter s Ethernet settings and network activities To view this web page click the TCP IP configuration link highlighted in Figure 8 3 in the navigation menu Figure 8 3 Example of TCP IP Configuration Web Page Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer Edit View Favorites Tools Q JO search A A B Address http 10 91 100 79 Allen Bradley EEE TTE SESS SPI SET Minimize TCP IP Configuration IPE amp OB Rockwell Automation Process display D TCP IP configurati Configure e mail n Li Browse DPI device Online user manu Software tools We Launch my DriveE Launch my DriveE O E mail technical s IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address BOOTP Ethernet Address MAC Ethernet Received Packets 2881 Ethernet Receive Errors Ethernet Receive Overruns Ethernet Transmitted Packets Ethernet Transmit Errors EtherNet IP Missed I O Packets 10 91 100 79 255 255 248 0 10 91 96 1 Disabled 00 00 BC 08 7C E2 Copyright 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Information Description IP Address IP address of the adapter Subnet Mask Subnet mask for the adapter s network Gateway Address Address for the gateway device on the adapter s network BOOTP Shows status for BOOTP which may be used to configure the adapter s network information Ethern
143. Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 74 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter MSG Read Write Message MSG File MG13 0 CDN5 Setup Screen lt 25 Using Explicit Messaging 6 61 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 6 75 Generic Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens MSG MG13 0 1 Elements General Send Data Receive Data Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop To Address 10 91 100 79 From Port Channel 1 To Address Type EtherNet IP Device str From Device This MicroLogix 3 MSG MG13 0 1 Elements MultiHop Send Data Receive Data Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO Break Connection iis Controller Channel 1 Integral Communication Command CIP Generic Data Table Address Receive N40 0 Size in Bytes Receive 4 Target Device Message Timeout Awaiting Execution EW Error ER Message done DN Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled Local Remote Local M
144. Data Receive Data Channel 1 Send Data 1 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 79 Message Control Bits Ignore if timed out 0 Awaiting Execution EW N A Send Data IN50 0 Continuous Run CO Message Timeout x1 sec Write Parameter Service Code hex Class hex F 15 Instance hex BC 140 Attribute hex 1 1 ion Error ER Done DN Transmitting ST Enabled EN Waiting for Queue Space MultiHop Error Error Code hex The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description Size in Words 18 Number of words to be transferred Each word size is a 16 bit integer Data Table Address N50 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the source file Service 1 Write Parameter Code for the requested service Instance 2 140 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull
145. Data 18 Datalink Qut D1 LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 19 Datalink Qut D1 MSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 20 INT Datalink Out D2 LSW My PowerFlex Drivel Data 21 Datalink Qut D2 MSW 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 14 Using the I O Figure 5 6 ControlLogix Output Image for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Name amp DataType Description My PowerFles Drive O AB ETHER My Drive Q Data INT 10 Dutput Image My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 0 INT Logic Command My PowerFlex Drive O Data 1 INT Speed Reference My Powerlex Drive O Datal2 INT Datalink In A1 PowerFlex 70 Drive PowetFlex_Drive 0 Data 3 Datalink In A2 16 bit Speed Reference and PowerFlex_Drive O Data 4 INT Datalink In B1 Datalinks c My Drive O Data 5 INT Datalink In B2 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 6 INT Datalink In C1 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data INT Datalink In C2 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 8 INT Datalink In D1 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 3 INT Datalink In D2 A Data Type Description My_PowerFlex_Drive O AB ETHER My PowerFlex Drive D Data INT 20 Dutput Image My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 0 INT Logic Command My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 1 INT Not Used My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 2 INT Reference LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 3 INT Reference MSW My _Power
146. Data Table Address Description N20 1 Logic Status see Appendix D N20 2 Speed Feedback LSW N20 3 Speed Feedback MSW N20 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 905 Data Out A1 LSW N20 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 905 Data Out A1 MSW N20 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 906 Data Out A2 LSW N20 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 906 Data Out A2 MSW N20 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 907 Data Out B1 LSW N20 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 907 Data Out B1 MSW N20 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 908 Data Out B2 LSW N20 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 908 Data Out B2 MSW N20 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 909 Data Out C1 LSW N20 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 909 Data Out C1 MSW N20 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 910 Data Out C2 LSW N20 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 910 Data Out C2 MSW N20 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 911 Data Out D1 LSW N20 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 911 Data Out D1 MSW N20 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 912 Data Out D2 LSW N20 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 912 Data Out D2 MSW N20 20 Logic Command see Appendix D N20 21 Speed Reference LSW N20 22 Speed Reference MSW N20 23 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 895 Data In A1 LSW N20 24 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 895 Data In A1 MSW N20 25
147. Done Length 0 Eror Code Timed Out Eror Path Eror Text Cancel The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type 1 Set Attribute Single This service is used to write a parameter value Service Code 1 10 Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 2 140 Dec Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute 9 9 or A Hex Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Source Element Accel Time 1 8 Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Source Length 2 6 Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 9 My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single_Write_Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable The ins
148. Drives Wii Select Module Module Description Drives a 150 SMC Flex E 150 SMC Flex via 20 COMM E 1305 ACDrive EN1 1305 AC Drive via 1203 EN1 1336E IMPACTDrive EN1 1336 IMPACT Drive via 1203 EN1 1336F PLUSIIDrive EN1 1336 PLUS II Drive via 1203 EN1 1336R REGENBrake EN1 1336 REGEN Brake via 1203 EN1 1336T FORCEDriveCNA EN1 1336 FORCE Drive ControlNet Adapter via 1203 EN1 1336T FORCEDrivePLC EN1 1336 FORCE Drive PLC Comm Adapter via 1203 EN1 1336T FORCEDriveStd EN1 1336 FORCE Drive Standard Adapter via 1203 EN1 1397DigitalDCDrive EN1 1397 Digital DC Drive via 1203 EN1 PowerFlex 70 E PowerFlex 70 Drive via 20 COMM E Wil Module Properties My EtherNet IP Bridge PowerFlex 70 EC E 3 2 General Connection Module Info Power Setup Type PowerFlex 70 EC E PowerFlex 70 EC Drive via 20 COMM E Vendor Allen Bradley Name My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive Address Host Name Description PAddress 10 91 100 79 Host Name Datalinks 4 Each datalink has two inputs and two outputs size 16 bit Comm Format Bevision 2 a Electronic Keying Compatible Keying E Status Offline Cancel When Datalinks are used you must enable the desired Datalinks and assign names to their non descriptive controller tags When a Datalink is enabled you must set the following adapter I O parameters 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN
149. EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 Using Explicit Messaging 6 49 SLC 500 Example Scattered Write Request Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 59 or to store the request values to be written to these drive parameters 143 Decel Time 2 105 Preset Speed 5 106 Preset Speed 6 107 Preset Speed 7 Address Write Value PowerFlex 750 Series Write Value Data Type Drive Parameter N90 1 11 1 Sec 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec REAL N90 4 22 2 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec REAL N90 7 33 3 Hz 725 Zero Position 33 32 bit integer N90 10 44 4 Hz 21555 Port 5 Analog InO Hi 5 5 REAL N90 13 55 5 Hz 780 PTP Setpoint 75 555 32 bit integer Refer to DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for parameter numbering Figure 6 59 or Figure 6 62 shows the parameter values Figure 6 59 Example Scattered Write Request Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Data File N90 dec Radix Decimal X Columns 10 v SLC 500 Example Scattered Write Response Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 60 to store the response values that were written to the requested drive parameters Values of 0 indicate no errors
150. Event No Event No Event No Event 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 8 12 Viewing the Adapter s Web Pages Notes 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Installing the Adapter Chapter 9 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to use the adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE The adapter is typically installed in the internal communication slot on the PowerFlex 7 Class drive However an externally mounted adapter may be desired when e The PowerFlex drive is already connected to an existing network such as Remote I O and a second network is desired for software tools DriveExplorer DriveExecutive etc data collection etc e The PowerFlex drive is remotely located next to some I O devices that also need to be networked The DPI External Comms Kit has an option slot for general purpose network I O that a controller can use Both the drive and I O devices are handled as one node on the network to reduce the network node count Topic Page Installing the Adapter 91 Board Option 20 XCOMWM IO OPT1 9 2 Understanding the I O Image Drive O Option 9 2 Configuring the Adapter to Use the Optional O Data 9 3 Viewing Optional I O Diagnostic Items 9 4 The adapter can be installed in a DPI External Comms Kit
151. Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter version 15 or later A Parameter Write message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important Parameter Object Class code OxOF is not supported in PowerFlex 750 Series drives To do a single parameter write follow the RSLogix 5000 all versions single write example on page 6 21 Table 6 C Example Controller Tags to Write a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Write Message Data Type XIC Execute Single Write Message BOOL MSG Single Write Message MESSAGE Figure 6 4 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Execute_Single_Write_Message MSG JE Message CEN Message Control Single Write Message CDND FCER2 Important If the explicit message single write must be written continuously use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 22 This writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example single write message using Class code F writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Formatting a Message to Write a Single Pa
152. FFF5 12 Indirect Type 11 Undefined Instance OxFFF4 13 Indirect Type 12 Undefined Instance OXFFF3 14 Indirect Type 13 Undefined Instance OxFFF2 15 Indirect Type 14 Parameter specific list 16 FP Max Decimals Bit 0 These four bits are used on REAL parameters only They indicate the maximum number of 17 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 decimal places to be displayed for small values A value of 0 indicates to not limit the 18 EP Max Decimals Bit 2 number of decimal places used 19 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 20 Extended Parameter 0 Not an Extended Parameter Reference Reference 1 Extended Parameter Reference An Extended Parameter Reference contains a reference to another parameter The value is formatted the same as an analog mode Indirect Selector parameter SSpppp where SS slot number of device to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing and pppp number of the parameter or diagnostic item to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing Note that an Extended Parameter Reference can only select parameters unlike an Indirect Selector An Extended Parameter Reference could be used to configure a Datalink or show the source of a Reference among other uses 21 Uses Rating Table Object This parameter has rating dependent defaults and limits that can be obtained from the Rating Table Object The Offline Read Full will include the default value for the smallest rating and limits that will accommodate the full range of values allowe
153. Flex 7 Class drives and other products that support DPI At the time of publication compatible products include e PowerFlex 70 70EC drives PowerFlex 750 Series drives 1 e PowerFlex 700 700VC drives e PowerFlex Digital DC drives e PowerFlex 700H drives e DPI External Comms Kit e PowerFlex 700 drives e SMC M Flex e PowerFlex 700L drives 1 The 20 COMM E adapter must have firmware version 4 001 or later to be compatible with PowerFlex 750 Series drives Equipment Shipped with the Adapter When you unpack the adapter verify that the package includes Q One adapter A 2 54 cm 1 in and a 15 24 cm 6 in Internal Interface cable only one cable is needed to connect the adapter to the drive for which cable to use see Figure 2 2 on page 2 4 One PowerFlex 7 Class DPI Drive Peripheral Interface Network Communication Adapter Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO004 TIP When mounting the 20 adapter in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive you must use a 20 750 20COMM Option Card publication 750COM INOO1 and the adapter must have firmware version 4 001 or later User Supplied Equipment To install and configure the adapter you must supply A small flathead screwdriver Ethernet cable refer to the EtherNet IP Media Planning and Installation Manual publication ENET INOO1 Ethernet switch refer to the EtherNet IP Performance Application Solution publication ENET AP001
154. Flex 700L User Manual 201 0 001 PowerFlex 750 Series AC Drives PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Installation Instructions 750 INO01 PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Programming Manual 750 PM001 PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual PowerFlex 20 750 20COMM Option Card 750COM UMO01 750COM INO01 PowerFlex Digital DC Drive PowerFlex Digital DC Drive User Manual 20P UM001 RSLinx Classic Getting Results with RSLinx Guide and online help 2 LINX GR001 RSLogix 5 RSLogix 5 Getting Results Guide and online help 2 LG5 GR002 RSLogix 500 RSLogix 500 Getting Results Guide and online help LG500 GR002 RSLogix 5000 RSLogix 5000 Getting Results Guide and online help 2 9399 RLD300GR ControlLogix and 1756 ENBT 1756 EN2T EtherNet IP Modules Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual ENET UMO001 PLC 5 Enhanced and Ethernet PLC 5 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1785 UM012 SLC 500 and 1747 L5 xxx SLC 500 Modular Hardware Style User Manual 1747 UM011 MicroLogix 1100 MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1763 UM001 MicroLogix 1400 MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1766 UM001 1 Use this link to the ODVA EtherNet IP library for these publications http odva org Home ODVATECHNOLOGIES EtherNetIP EtherNet PLibrary tabid 76 Default aspx The online help is installed with the software Documentation can be obtained online at http literature r
155. Flex_Drive 0 Data 4 INT Datalink In A1 LSW My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 5 INT Datalink In MSW My PowerFlex 6 INT Datalink In A2 LSW PowerFlex 750 Series Drive My PowerFlex Drive 0 Data 7 INT Datalink In A2 MSW 32 bit Speed Reference and My PowerFlex Drive D Data S Datalink In B1 LSW Datalinks My PowerFles Drive O Data 3 INT Datalink In B1 MSW PowerFlex Drive D Data 10 Datalink In B2 LSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data 11 Datalink In B2 MSW My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 12 Datalink In C1 LSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data 13 Datalink In C1 MSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data 14 Datalink In C2 LSW My PowerFlex Drive D Data 5 Datalink In C2 MSW My PowerFlex Drive D Data 15 Datalink In D1 LSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data 17 Datalink In D1 MSW My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 18 Datalink In D2 LSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data 13 Datalink In D2 MSW Program Tags To use the Controller tags that are automatically created you need to create the following Program tags for this example program Figure 5 7 ControlLogix Program Tags for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Name amp Style Data Type Command Clear Faults Decimal Command Forward Reverse Decimal Command Jog Decimal Command Start Decimal Command Stop Decimal Speed Feedback Decimal F Speed Reference Decimal Status
156. Gateway Cfg 3 Gateway Cfg 4 Important To set the gateway address using these parameters Parameter 03 BOOTP must be set to 0 Disabled EN Rate Cfg Sets the network data rate at which the adapter communicates Updates Parameter 17 EN Rate Act after a reset EN Rate Act Displays the network data rate actually used by the adapter Ref Fdbk Size Displays the size of the Reference Feedback The drive determines the size of the Reference Feedback Datalink Size Displays the size of each Datalink word The drive determines the size of Datalinks Details Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Values Type Reset Required Default Values Type Default Values Type Default Values Type 255 Read Write Yes 255 Read Write Yes 0 Autodetect 0 Autodetect 1 10 Mbps Full 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half Read Write Yes 0 No Link 0 No Link 1 10 Mbps Full 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half Read Only 0 16 bit 0 16 bit 1 32 bit Read Only 0 16 bit 0 16 bit 1 32 bit Read Only Adapter Parameters B 3 Parameter No Name and Description Details 20 Reset Module Default 0 Ready Values 0 Ready No ac
157. IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P this value is always 1 when faulted EtherNet IP Objects C 23 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 5 Get Fault Data List STRUCT of Number of faults events in the queue A 0 BYTE indicates the fault queue is empty BYTE WORDJIn 6 Get Number of Recorded Faults WORD Number of faults events in the queue A 0 indicates the fault queue is empty 7 Get Fault Parameter Reference WORD Number of faults events in the queue A 0 indicates the fault queue is empty Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All Information STRUCT of WORD Fault code STRUCT of Fault source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRING 16 Fault text STRUCT of Fault time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL OJ 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used WORD Reserved CONTAINER n Reserved 1 Get Basic Information STRUCT of WORD Fault code STRUCT of Fault source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRUCT of Fault time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL OJ 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used 2 Get International Fault Text STRINGN Text describing the fault with support for Unicode 20 COMM E EtherNet
158. Logix 1100 1400 Example EtherNet IP Network IP Address 10 91 100 81 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller IP Address 10 91 100 79 PowerFlex 70 Drive with AO a 20 COMM E Adapter n n D H O Ethernet Switch SSN Computer with Ethernet Connection NOTE Information for PowerFlex 750 Series drives has been added to this manual where applicable 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Configuring the I O 4 39 Configuring Parameters for Network I O Since the I O for the drive is message based there is no need to configure any I O inside the RSLogix 500 version 7 or later project until using the I O as described in Chapter 5 However to get the adapter to operate with the I O created in Chapter 5 we need to configure the adapter to accept the I O and drive to point to the appropriate Datalinks 1 Forthis example the following adapter I O parameters are set to these values Adapter Parameter No Setting 23 DPI I O Cfg XXXX xxx 1111 35 M S Input XXXX XXXX xxx 1111 36 M S Output XXXX XXXX xxx1 1111 2 Resetthe adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 17 or power cycle the drive For the drive speed reference and Datalink parameter values and the adapter setup parameter values
159. M UM010E EN P C 18 EtherNet IP Objects Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 18 Get International DPI Offline STRUCT of Parameter Text STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International offline units 19 Get International DPI Online STRUCT of Parameter Text STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International offline units 20 Get International DPI Online STRUCT of Read Full BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Online minimum value CONTAINER Online maximum value CONTAINER Online default value WORD Next WORD Previous WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset BYTE 3 Link BYTE Pad word always zero BOOL 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International online parameter units 21 Get DPI Extended Descriptor DWORD Extended descriptor see page C 20 22 Get International DPI Offline STRUCT of Read Full BOOL Descriptor CONTAINER Offline minimum value CONTAINER Offline maximum value CONTAINER Offline default value WORD Online minimum parameter instance WORD Online maximum parameter instance WORD Online default parameter instance WORD Multiple parameter instance WORD Divisor parameter instance WORD Base parameter instance WORD Offset parameter instance BYTE Formula number BYTE Pad byte always zero WORD Help instance WORD Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base IN
160. MM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to use Explicit Messaging to configure and monitor the adapter and connected PowerFlex 7 Class drive or PowerFlex 750 Series drive Important When used in a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the 20 COMM E adapter must have firmware version 4 001 or later to support explicit messaging to drive parameters Port 0 Furthermore the adapter requires firmware version 4 002 or later for explicit messaging to parameters of peripherals in drive Ports 1 14 Topic Page About Explicit Messaging 6 2 Performing Explicit Messages 6 3 ControlLogix Examples 6 4 PLC 5 Examples 6 23 SLC 500 Examples 6 29 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Examples 6 53 A AN ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation Inc does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists If Explicit Messages are programmed to write parameter data to Non Volatile Storage NVS frequently the NVS will quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Do not create a pro
161. MM UM010E EN P Using the I O 5 25 Table 5 L Controller and Program Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Status Feedback Ladder Logic Program Description Table Address Description Tapie Address Drive Ready N20 1 0 Status Ready B3 1 0 Drive Active N20 1 1 Status Active B3 1 1 Actual Direction XIO N20 1 3 Status Forward B3 1 3 Actual Direction XIC N20 1 3 Status Reverse B3 1 4 Drive Faulted N20 1 7 Status Faulted B3 1 7 Drive At Speed N20 1 8 Status At Speed B3 1 8 Speed Feedback N20 3 Speed Feedback B30 3 Table 5 M Program and Controller Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Command Reference Ladder Logic Program Description Table Address Desoription Table Address Command Stop B3 20 0 Drive Stop N20 20 0 Command Start B3 20 1 Drive Start N20 20 1 Command Jog B3 20 2 Drive Jog N20 20 2 Command Clear Faults B3 20 8 Drive Clear Faults N20 20 3 Command Forward Reverse XIO B3 20 4 Drive Forward N20 20 4 Command Forward Reverse XIC B3 20 4 Drive Reverse N20 20 5 Speed Reference N30 22 Speed Reference N20 22 An example ladder logic program that uses these descriptive controller data table addresses and passes their data to the descriptive program data table addresses is shown in Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 and Figure 5 16 Figure 5 13 PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Ladder Logic Program for Lo
162. Not Ava Life Pwr Cycles Gi Port 4 Not Ava Life MW Fraction Gi Port 5 20 COMI Life MW Units Port 6 Not Ava Online user manu Reserved Software tools We Raw In 1 ma Launch my DriveE Raw In 1 volts Launch my DriveE Raw In 2 plus Raw In 2 minus CS Msg Rx Cnt CS Msg Tx Cnt CS Timeout Cnt o E mail technical 5 m Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer Edit View Favorites Tools Ox O HAH Psat O 2 G B h KM Address 4 http 10 91 100 79 Net IP Adapter AUSTR Expand Minimize Port 0 Fault Queue Home A ui 1 Fault code Description Time stamp configurati ATA D Configure e mail n 49 Drive Powerup 288 05 27 048 Browse DPI device 52 Faults Cleared 239 37 03 472 Port 0 PowerFlc 85 Port 5 DPI Loss 239 37 00 952 22 Module inform 82 Port 2 DPI Loss 236 51 56 992 Diagnostics Fault queue 52 Faults Cleared 236 50 41 752 zn Alarm queue 81 Port 1 DPI Loss 188 07 45 952 Port 1 LCD Moc 52 Faults Cl d 43 45 04 792 C Port 2 1203 05 aro sab Port 3 Not Ava 81 Port 1 DPI Loss 904 25 18 592 Gi Port 4 Not Ava 52 Faults Cleared 859 13 46 312 2 e MI 0 No Fault 00 00 00 000 ort 6 Not Ava B Online user manu 52 Faults Cleared 854 52 59 272 9 Software tools We 25 Overspeed Limit 854 49 59 992 unch my DriveE 52 Faults Cleare 737 11 18 352 Launch my
163. P Configuring the I O 4 15 Parameter 23 DPI I O Cfg turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM E adapter will communicate that Datalink s information with the drive Parameter 35 M S Input turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM E adapter will input that Datalink s information from the controller Parameter 36 M S Output turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM E adapter will output that Datalink s information to the controller When using Datalinks up to 8 drive Data In xx parameters 300 307 and or up to 8 Data Out xx parameters 310 317 must be assigned to point to the appropriate drive parameters for your application Using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile all versions The basic RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile is only recommended when A specific drive profile in other versions of RSLogix 5000 is unavailable Users are already familiar with a drive Generic Profile and do not want to convert an existing project to a Classic Profile versions 13 15 ora drive Add On Profile version 16 or later A project must maintain specific revision level control The controller cannot be taken offline RSlogix 5000 version 16 or later enables the drive Generic Profile to be added while the controller is online and in the Run mode Adding the Drive Adapter to the I O Configuration To transmit data between the bridge and the drive you must add the drive as a child device to the paren
164. P DWORD 0 Not configured Network 1 Valid configuration Interface 2 15 Reserved 2 Get Configuration DWORD Bit Value 0 False 1 True Capability 0 Supports BOOTP 1 DNS Client able to resolve host names by query to DNS server 2 DHCP Client able to obtain network configuration through DHCP 3 DHCP DNS Update able to send its host name in the DHCP request 4 Configuration Settable able to set the network configuration via TCP IP 5 31 Reserved 3 Set Configuration DWORD Bit Value Control 1 3 Startup configuration 0 Use configuration saved in NVS 1 Obtain configuration via BOOTP 2 Obtain configuration via DHCP 3 15 Reserved 4 DNS Enabled resolves host names by query to DNS server 5 31 Reserved 4 Get Physical Link STRUCT of Object WORD Path size Padded EPATH Path 5 Get Interface STRUCT of Configuration DWORD Adapters IP address DWORD Adapter s subnet mask DWORD Adapter s gateway address DWORD Primary name server DWORD Secondary name server STRING Default domain name 6 Get Host Name STRING Host name when using DHCP 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P EtherNet IP Objects C 37 Ethernet Link Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal OxF6 246 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0 4 Yes Get and Clear Instances The adapter supports one
165. P Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 74 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Using Explicit Messaging Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P MicroLogix 1100 1400 Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read Write Multiple Messaging The data structures in Figure 6 96 and Figure 6 97 use 16 bit words and can accommodate up to 22 parameters in a single message In the Response Message a parameter number with the high bit set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code parameter number in response data will be negative Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 96 Data Structures for Scattered Read Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Parameter Number Parameter Number 1 Word Parameter Value LSW 2 Pad Word Parameter Value MSW 3 Parameter Number Parameter Number 4 Pad Word Parameter Value LSW 5 Pad Word Parameter Value MSW 6 Parameter Number Parameter Number 7 Pad Word Parameter Value LSW 8 Pad Word Parameter Value MSW 9 Parameter Number Parameter Number 10 Pad Word Parameter Value LSW 11 Pad Word Parameter Value MSW 12 Parameter Number Parameter Number 13 Pad Word Paramet
166. P address of the adapter that was already set in the General tab This field is not configurable grayed out Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask configuration setting of the network This setting must match the setting of other devices on the network for example 255 255 255 0 Gateway The Gateway Address configuration setting of the network This setting must Address match the setting of other devices on the network for example 10 91 100 1 Enable BootP When this box is checked BOOTP is enabled in the adapter and will ignore the IP address set in the General tab When unchecked the controller uses the set IP address This is another method to enable disable BOOTP in the adapter For this example leave this box unchecked 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 10 Configuring the I O 11 Click Set to save the Port Configuration information which sets the corresponding offline Subnet Cfg x and Gateway Cfg x parameters in the adapter 12 Click OK on the New Module screen The new node for this example PowerFlex 70 EC Drive now appears under the bridge for this example My EtherNet IP Bridge in the I O Configuration folder If you double click on the Controller Tags you will see that module defined data types and tags have been automatically created Figure 4 12 Note that all tag names are defined and Datalinks include the assigned drive parameter name After you save
167. Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service A Write Parameter message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important Parameter Object Class code OxOF is not supported in PowerFlex 750 Series drives To do a single parameter write follow the SLC 500 Generic Attribute Service single write example on page 6 63 Figure 6 70 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Single Write Message MSG Read Write Message MSG File MG14 0 CDNO Setup Screen lt CER 5 Important If the explicit message single write must be written continuously use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 64 This writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example single write message using Class code F writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 58 Using Explicit Messaging MicroLogix 1100 1400 Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service Figure 6 71 Write Parameter Message Configuration Screens MSG MG14 0 1 Elements General Ins Add Hop 23 MSG MG14 0 1 Elements Send Data Receive Data Del Remove Hop From Device
168. Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 44 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Using Explicit Messaging Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P SLC 500 Example Scattered Read Request Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 52 or Figure 6 53 to store the request values to be read from these drive parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 003 Output Current e Parameter 007 Output Current e Parameter 006 Output Voltage e Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk e Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage e Parameter 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data e Parameter 017 Analog Ini Value e Parameter 260 Analog In0 Value Refer to DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for parameter numbering Figure 6 52 Example Scattered Read Request Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive i Data File N70 dec mr Radix Decimal Dolumns 10 I EI Radix Decimal bd Columns 10 SLC 500 Example Scattered Read Response Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 54 or Figure 6 55 to store the response values that were read from the requested drive parameters Figu
169. Parameter Value LSW m Scattered Read Response 5 15605 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered Read Response 5 137 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Head Response 7 23698 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered Read Response 8 26035 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered Read Response 3 21581 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Response 10 0 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered Read Response 11 16948 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered Read Response 12 260 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Response 13 9437 INT Parameter Value LSW m Scattered Read Response 14 16661 INT Parameter Value MSW The PowerFlex 750 Series drive uses 32 bit integer and REAL parameters A COP command must be used to copy the Scattered Read Response integer array to a 32 bit integer or REAL tag Figure 6 12 shows the ladder logic used for this example If the parameter data type is a REAL then the destination tag is a REAL If the parameter data type is a 32 bit integer then the destination tag is a DINT See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 12 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Figure 6 12 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Response Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Copy File OP Source Scattered Read Response 1 Output Frequency
170. Parameter Value MSW 63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number 64 Pad Word 64 Parameter Value LSW 65 Word 65 Parameter Value MSW Figure 6 21 Data Structures for Scattered Write Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Parameter Number Parameter Number 1 Parameter Value LSW Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW Pad Word 3 Parameter Number Parameter Number 4 Parameter Value LSW Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW Pad Word 6 Parameter Number Parameter Number 7 Parameter Value LSW Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW Pad Word 9 Parameter Number Parameter Number 10 Parameter Value LSW Pad Word Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Using Explicit Messaging 6 19 Explicit Messaging Using RSLogix 5000 all versions ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Paramete
171. PowerFlex 7 Class drive for example start stop direction It consists of one 16 bit word of output to the adapter from the network The definitions of the bits in this word depend on the drive and are shown in Appendix D The Logic Status is used to monitor the PowerFlex 7 Class drive for example operating state motor direction It consists of one 16 bit word of input from the adapter to the network The definitions of the bits in this word depend on the drive and are shown in Appendix D 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P G 6 Glossary 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Master Slave Hierarchy An adapter configured for a master slave hierarchy exchanges data with the master device Usually a network has one scanner which is the master device and all other devices for example drives connected to EtherNet IP adapters are slave devices On a network with multiple scanners called a multimaster hierarchy each slave device must have a scanner specified as a master NVS Non Volatile Storage NVS is the permanent memory of a device Devices such as the adapter and drive store parameters and other information in NVS so that they are not lost when the device loses power NVS is sometimes called EEPROM PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Command PCCC is the protocol used by some controllers to communicate with devices on a networ
172. R Parameter value WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset 7 Get DPI Online Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 19 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value WORD Next parameter WORD Previous parameter STRING 4 Units for example Amp Hz WORD Multiplier 2 WORD Divisor WORD Base 2 INT Offset 2 BYTE 3 Link source of the value 0 no link BYTE Always zero 0 STRING 16 Parameter name 8 Get DPI Descriptor BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 19 9 Get Set DPI Parameter Value Various Parameter value NVS 10 Get Set DPI RAM Parameter Value Various Parameter value in temporary memory Valid only for DPI drives 11 Get Set DPI Link BYTE 3 Link parameter or function block that is the source of the value 0 no link 12 Get Help Object Instance WORD ID for help text for this parameter 13 Get DPI Read Basic STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page C 19 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Units for example Amp Hz 14 Get DPI Parameter Name STRING 16 Parameter name 15 Get DPI Parameter Alias STRING 16 Customer supplied parameter name 16 Get Parameter Processing Error BYTE 0 No error 1 Value is less than the minimum 2 Value is greater than the maximum 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COM
173. Ready Par 214 1 Ready Active 0 Not Active Running 1 Active Command Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Accel 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating Decel 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating Alarm 0 No Alarm Par 211 amp 212 1 Alarm Fault 0 No Fault Par 243 1 Fault At Speed 0 Not At Reference 1 At Reference Local Control 000 Port 0 TB 001 Port 1 010 Port 2 011 Port 3 100 Port 4 101 Port 5 110 Port 6 111 No Local 1 See Owners in drive User Manual for further information 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2070MM UMO10E EN P Reference 0000 Ref A Auto Par 90 0001 Ref B Auto Par 93 0010 Preset 2 Auto 0011 Preset 3 Auto 0100 Preset 4 Auto 0101 Preset 5 Auto 0110 Preset 6 Auto 0111 Preset 7 Auto 1000 Term Blk Manual 1001 DPI 1 Manual 1010 DPI 2 Manual 1011 DPI 3 Manual 1100 DPI 4 Manual 1101 DPI 5 Manual 1110 DPI 6 Manual 1111 Jog Ref Logic Command Status Words D 3 PowerFlex 700 Drives Logic Command Word Phase II Control Logic Bits 15 14 13121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Description Normal Stop 0 Not Normal Stop 1 Normal Stop Start 7 0 Not Start 1 Start x Jog 1 0 Not Jog using Jog Speed 1 Par
174. Request 14 2 INT _ Parameter Value MSW The results of the explicit message appear in the destination tag Scattered Write Response Figure 6 19 Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 6 19 Example Scattered Write Response Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive amp Value DataType Description Scattered Write Response Scattered Write 0 536 INT Parameter Number decimal EH Scattered Write Response 1 0 Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 2 o INT Pad Word Scattered_Wrte_ Response 3 538 INT d Parameter Number decimal H Scattered Write Response 4 u E Pad Word or Error Code EH Scattered Write Response 5 _ _0 INT Pad Word m Scattered Write Response 5 725 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Response 7 o INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 8 0 INT Pad Word EH Scattered Write Response 3 21555 ust Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Response 10 0 INT Pad Word or Error Code EH Scattered Write Response 11 0 ANTO _ Pad Word H Scattered Write Response 12 780 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Write_Response 1 3 0 Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 14 0 INT Pad Word 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 18 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter
175. Response 2 INT Pad Word Scattered Write Response 3 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Response 4 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 5 INT Pad Word Scattered Write Response b INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Response 7 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 8 INT Pad Word Scattered Write Response 3 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Response 10 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 11 INT Pad Word Scattered Write Response 12 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Response 13 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 14 INT Pad Word The PowerFlex 750 Series drive uses 32 bit integer and REAL parameters A COP command must be used to copy the 32 bit integer and REAL values to the Scattered Write Request integer array Figure 6 17 shows the ladder logic used for this example If the parameter data type is a REAL then the source tag is a REAL If the parameter data type is a 32 bit integer then the source tag is a DINT See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type 32 bit integer or REAL Figure 6 17 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Request Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive OP Copy File Source Accel_Time2 Dest Scattered Write Request 1 Length 2 Copy File Source Decel Time2 Dest Scattered Write Request 4 Length 2 Copy File Source
176. SE 9 3 The data from the I O Board is loaded into the Datalink word starting with bit 0 of Datalink D1 and concluding with bit 14 Bit 15 of Datalink D1 is reserved as an input valid Status flag When the input data is valid bit 15 1 For example for the 20 XCOMM IO OPT1 the digital inputs and digital outputs are mapped as shown in Figure 9 4 and Figure 9 5 respectively Figure 9 4 Board Option Digital Input Mapping Datalink Out D1 Word Bit 1514131211109 876543210 x HK HK Status ING NI Figure 9 5 Board Option Digital Output Mapping Datalink In D1 Word Bit 15 14 13 1211109 8 76 5432 10 L QUTI OUT2 Important On power up or reset the outputs will be in a non activated state To configure the adapter to use the optional I O Board Parameters 23 DPI I O Cfg 35 M S Input and 36 M S Output must be set To send input output data from the optional I O board to the network e Turn on bit 4 1 in Parameter 35 M S Input e Turn on bit 4 1 in Parameter 36 M S Output e Turn off bit 4 in Parameter 23 DPI I O Cfg Setting the Datalink D bit 4 in the M S Input and M S Output parameters directs the communication adapter to send Datalink D back to the controller Turning off bit 4 in the DPI I O Cfg parame
177. SW 10 Datalink Out B2 MSW 11 Not used 11 Notused 12 Datalink In C1 MSW 12 Datalink Out C1 MSW 13 Notused 13 Not used 14 Datalink In C2 MSW 14 Datalink Out C2 MSW 15 Not used 15 Not used 16 Datalink In D1 MSW 16 Datalink Out D1 MSW 17 Notused 17 Notused 18 Datalink In D2 MSW 18 Datalink Out D2 MSW Table 5 E PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 I O Image for PowerFlex 700 VC Drives 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Logic Status 1 Not used 1 Not used 2 Reference MSW 2 Feedback MSW 3 Datalink In A1 LSW 3 Datalink Out A1 LSW 4 Datalink In A1 MSW 4 Datalink Out A1 MSW 5 Datalink In A2 LSW 5 Datalink Out A2 LSW 6 Datalink In A2 MSW 6 Datalink Out A2 MSW 7 Datalink In B1 LSW 7 Datalink Out B1 LSW 8 Datalink In B1 MSW 8 Datalink Out B1 MSW 9 Datalink In B2 LSW 9 Datalink Out B2 LSW 10 _ Datalink In B2 MSW 10 Datalink Out B2 MSW 11 Datalink In C1 LSW 11 Datalink Out C1 LSW 12 Datalink In C1 MSW 12 Datalink Out C1 MSW 13 Datalink In C2 LSW 13 Datalink Out C2 LSW 14 Datalink In C2 MSW 14 Datalink Out C2 MSW 15 Datalink In D1 LSW 15 Datalink Out D1 LSW 16 Datalink In D1 MSW 16 Datalink Out D1 MSW 17 Datalink In D2 LSW 17 Datalink Out D2 LSW 18 Datalink In D2 MSW 18 Data
178. Sel Port 0 Port 6 Reference Assigns 20 COMM E to be used for the Reference 895 Data In A1 Port 0 Accel Time 1 Points to Par 535 in the drive 896 Data In A2 Port 0 Testpoint Sel 1 Points to Par 970 in the drive 897 Data In B1 Port 5 Anlg Out Hi Points to Par 90 in Port 5 module 905 Data Out A1 Port 0 DC Bus Volts Points to Par 11 in the drive 906 Data Out A2 Port 0 Open Loop Fdbk Points to Par 137 in the drive 907 Data Out B1 Port 5 Anlg OutO Data Points to Par 77 in Port 5 I O module 04 IP Addr Cfg 1 10 91 100 79 IP address for the adapter 07 IP Addr Cfg 4 08 Subnet Cfg 1 255 255 248 0 Subnet mask for the adapter 11 Subnet Cfg 4 23 DPI I O Cfg xxx1 1111 Enables Cmd Ref and Datalinks A D 35 M S Input xxx1 1111 Configures the Data to be transferred from the controller on the network to the drive 36 M S Output xxx1 1111 Configures the Data to be transferred from the drive to the controller on the network 7 n this example the 20 COMM E adapter 20 750 20COMM Option Card is installed in Port 6 and a 24V I O module is installed in Port 5 Also Data In B2 D2 Parameters 898 902 and Data Out B2 D2 Parameters 908 912 are enabled but not used 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P TIP Data In parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outpu
179. T Offset BOOL 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN International DPI parameter name STRINGN International DPI offline parameter units 1 A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a parameter value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32 bits 2 This value is used in the formu Converting on page C 21 3 Do NOT continually write parameter data NVS Refer to the attention on page 6 1 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P as used to convert the parameter value between display units and internal units Refer to Formulas for EtherNet IP Objects C 19 Descriptor Attributes Bit Name Description 0 Data Type Bit 1 Right bit is least significant bit 0 1 Data Type Bit 2 000 BYTE used as an array of Boolean 001 WORD used as array of Boolean BL 010 BYTE 8 bit integer 011 WORD 16 bit integer 100 DWORD 32 bit integer 101 TCHAR 8 bit not unicode or 16 bits unicode 110 REAL 32 bit floating point value 111 Use bits 16 17 18 3 Sign Type 0 Unsigned 1 Signed 4 Hidden 0 Visible 1 Hidden 5 Not a Link Sink 0 Parameter can sink a link 1 Parameter cannot sink a link 6 Not Recallable 0 Recallable from NVS 1 Not Recallable from NVS 7 ENUM 0 No ENUM
180. TP and configure the IP address subnet mask and gateway address by setting parameters For details see Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address on page 3 6 Configuring the Adapter Using BOOTP Server 1 On the adapter label note the adapter s hardware Ethernet Address MAC which will be used in Step 6 2 Onacomputer connected to the EtherNet IP network start the BOOTP software The BOOTP Server window Figure 3 1 appears Figure 3 1 BOOTP Server Window BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 File Tools Help Request History hrminisec Type IP Address Hostname 13 31 00 13 30 59 00 08 13 30 54 00 00 BC 08 60 09 13 30 51 00 00 BC 08 60 09 Relation List New Ethemet Address MAC IP Address Hostname Description Status Entries D of 256 3 To properly configure devices on your EtherNet IP network you must configure settings in the BOOTP software to match the network Select Tools Network Settings to display the Network Settings window Figure 3 2 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 34 Configuring the Adapter Figure 3 2 Network Settings Window BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 Request History hrminsec Type Ethernet Address MAC IP Address Hostname Network Settings Defaults Subnet Mask 248 Gateway 96 Relation List New Primary DNS 78 Ethemet Address
181. The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type 1 Get Attribute Single This service is used to read a parameter value Service Code 1 e Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 2 3 Dec Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute 9 Hex Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Destination Output Current 5 The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single Read Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 For example to read parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the instance would be 21504 4 21508 See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0
182. This data rate Values is set in the drive and the adapter detects it ps Type Read Only 03 BOOTP Default 1 Enabled Configures the adapter to use BOOTP so that you can Values E set its IP address subnet mask and gateway address Toni Be mit yi with a BOOTP server ype Reset Required Yes 04 IP Addr Cfg 1 Default 0 05 IP Addr Cfg 2 Default 0 06 IP Addr Cfg 3 Default 0 07 IP Addr Cfg 4 Default 0 Minimum 0 Sets the bytes in the IP address Maximum 255 255 255 255 255 Type Read Write Reset Required Yes IP Addr Cfg 1 IP Addr Cfg 2 IP Addr Cfg 3 IP Addr Cfg 4 Important To set the IP address using these parameters Parameter 03 BOOTP must be set to 0 Disabled 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P B 2 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Adapter Parameters Publication 2070MM UMO10E EN P Parameter No Name and Description Subnet Cfg 1 Subnet Cfg 2 Subnet Cfg 3 Subnet Cfg 4 Sets the bytes of the subnet mask 255 255 255 255 Subnet Cfg 1 Subnet Cfg 2 Subnet Cfg 3 Subnet Cfg 4 Important To set the subnet mask using these parameters Parameter 03 BOOTP must be set to 0 Disabled Gateway Cfg 1 Gateway Cfg 2 Gateway Cfg 3 Gateway Cfg 4 Sets the bytes of the gateway address 255 255 255 255 Gateway Cfg 1 Gateway Cfg 2
183. Type XIC Execute Single Write Message BOOL MSG Single Write Message MESSAGE Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 24 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Execute Single Write Message MSG JE Message CEN Message Control Single Write Message HK DN gt LCER 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 22 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter all versions Figure 6 25 Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Single Write Message Message Configuration Single Write Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Single_Write_Message Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Path My_PowerFlex_Drive Configuration Communication Tag CIP Generic 7 Message Type Service Source Element Type Accel_Time_1 2 2 New Tag EZ Bytes Ef Set Attribute Single Source Length Service Code 10 Instance Class 93 Attribute 3 140 Hex Enable Enable Waiting Done Extended Eror Code Stat
184. _Single Object Specific Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Allocation Size in bytes Class Instance Par Number Par Value 0x4B Yes No Get_Attributes_Scattered 2 2 0 4 Yes No Set Attributes Scattered 2 2 Ox4D Yes No Get Attributes Scattered 4 4 Ox4E Yes No Set Attributes Scattered 4 4 1 These services are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive The table below lists the parameters for the Get Attributes Scattered and Set Attributes Scattered object specific service Name Data Type Description Parameter Number DWORD Parameter to read or write Parameter Value DWORD Parameter value to read or write zero when reading 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 22 EtherNet IP Objects DPI Fault Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x97 151 Products such as PowerFlex drives use this object for faults Adapters use this object for events Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of faults or events supported in the queue The maximum number of faults events can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex 0 Device Example Descri
185. ad Response Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Data File N60 dec oor Radix Decimal I Columns 10 Using Explicit Messaging 6 69 In this example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter Address Read Value 1 Output Freq N60 1 32 5 Hz 3 Output Current N60 4 0 01 Amp 6 Output Voltage N60 7 118 7 VAC 12 DC Bus Voltage N60 10 329 2 VDC 17 Analog In2 Value N60 13 8 318 mA Figure 6 87 Example Scattered Read Response Data File for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Z Data File N60 dec 7 15729 15605 137 24751 2097 16662 0 0 Radix Decimal x Columns 10 TSS The PowerFlex 750 Series drive uses 32 bit integer and REAL parameters A COP or CPW command must be used to copy the N60 integer array to a 16 bit integer or floating tag Figure 6 88 shows the ladder logic used for this example If the parameter data type is a 32 bit integer the data remains split into two 16 bit integers since there are no 32 bit integers in the MicroLogix 1100 1400 If the parameter data type is a REAL then the destination tag is a floating point See the drive documentation to determine the parameter data type 32 bit integer or REAL Figure 6 88 Example Ladder Logic to Copy Response Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Parameter 001 Output Fr
186. adapter has sent 53 EN Tx Errors Number of transmit errors reported by the Ethernet hardware 54 Last TCP Reset Last reason that the adapter reset or rejected a TCP IP connection 55 Missed IO Pkts Number of incoming I O connection packets that the adapter did not receive 56 OPT Status Operating status of optional I O board in DPI External Comms Kit For the meanings of the individual bits see Viewing Optional I O Diagnostic Items on page 9 4 57 OPT RX Errors Number of optional I O board receive errors 58 OPT FW Version Firmware version of optional I O board in DPI External Comms Kit 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P T 6 Troubleshooting Viewing and Clearing Events 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P The adapter has an event queue to record significant events that occur in the operation of the adapter When such an event occurs an entry is put into the event queue You can view the event queue using an LCD PowerFlex 7 Class HIM DriveExplorer version 2 01 or later software DriveExecutive version 1 01 or later software or other clients using the DPI Fault object The event queue can contain up to 32 entries Eventually the event queue will become full since its contents are retained through adapter resets At that point a new entry replaces the oldest entry Only an event queue clear operation or adapter power cycle will clear the event queue cont
187. ailable drives with their communication adapters Figure 4 7 Drive Select Module Screen Wii Select Module Description 1397DigitalDCDrive EN1 1397 Digital DC Drive via 1203 EN1 2364F RGU EN1 2364F Regen Bus Supply via 1203 EN1 PowerFlex 4 PowerFlex 4 Drive via 22 COMM E PowerFlex 40 E PowerFlex 40 Drive via 22 COMM E PowerFlex 40P E PowerFlex 40P Drive via 22 COMM E PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 70 Drive via 20 COMM E PowerFlex 400 E PowerFlex 400 Drive via 22 COMM E PowerFlex 700 Vector 200V E PowerFlex 700 Vector Drive 208 240V via 20 COMM E PowerFlex 700 Vector 400V E PowerFlex 700 Vector Drive 400 480V via 20 COMM E PowerFlex 700 Vector 600V E PowerFlex 700 Vector Drive 600V via 20 COMM E PowerFlex 700 200V E PowerFlex 700 Drive 208 240V via 20 COMM E PowerFlex 700 400V E PowerFlex 700 Drive 400 480V via 20 COMM E EM Find Add Favorite By Category By Vendor Favorites J 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 6 Configuring the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P TIP If the PowerFlex drive is not shown go to www ab com support abdrives webupdate and download the latest RSLogix 5000 drive Add On Profile From the list Figure 4 7 select the drive and its connected adapter For this example we selected PowerFlex 70 EC E Then click OK The drive s New Module screen Figure 4 8 appears Figure 4 8
188. al tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen General Tab Box Configuring the I O 4 41 Figure 4 43 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Message Configuration Screens for the Control Timeout 3 MSG Rung 42 0 MG10 0 DER i MultiHop is Controller Control Bits 1 Integral Ignore if timed out TO Communication Command 500CPU Write BK Data Table Address N20 0 Awaiting Execution EW Size in Elements 1 Error ER Target Device Message done DN Message Timeout 5 Message Transmitting ST Data Table Address N42 3 Message Enabled Local Remote MultiHop Routing Information File RI9 0 EIEIEIE 1 MSG Rung 2 0 MG10 0 General Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This Processor 1 EtherNetIP Device str 10 91 100 79 Setting This Controller data for MicroLogix 1100 Channel 1 integral Controller port to which the network is connected Communication Command 500CPU Write The controller type and command type for the controller to read or write data Since the MicroLogix 1100 is part of the SLC 500 controller family the SOOCPU controller type was selected The Write command type was selected to write the control timeout value to the drive Data Table Address 7 N20 0 An unused co
189. also Scanner CAN Controller Area Network CAN is a serial bus protocol on which DPI is based CIP Common Industrial Protocol CIP is the transport and application layer protocol used for messaging over EtherNet IP ControlNet and DeviceNet networks The protocol is used for implicit messaging real time I O and explicit messaging configuration data collection and diagnostics ControlFLASH An Allen Bradley software tool that lets users electronically update firmware on printed circuit boards Controller A controller also called programmable logic controller is a solid state control system that has a user programmable memory for storage of instructions to implement specific functions such as I O control logic timing counting report generation communication arithmetic and data file manipulation A controller consists of a central processor input output interface and memory See also Scanner 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P G 2 Glossary 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Data Rate The speed at which data is transferred on the EtherNet IP network You can set the adapter to a data rate of 10 Mbps Full Duplex 10 Mbps Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex or 100 Mbps Half Duplex If another device on the network sets or auto negotiates the data rate you can set the adapter to automatically detect the data rate Datalinks A Datalin
190. alue of parameter assigned to Parameter 738 739 Data Out D2 MSW N20 20 Logic Command see Appendix D N20 21 Speed Reference LSW N20 22 Speed Reference MSW N20 23 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 707 708 Data In A1 LSW N20 24 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 707 708 Data In A1 MSW N20 25 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 709 710 Data In A2 LSW N20 26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 709 710 Data In A2 MSW N20 27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 711 712 Data In B1 LSW N20 28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 711 712 Data In B1 MSW N20 29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 713 714 Data In B2 LSW N20 30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 713 714 Data In B2 MSW N20 31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 715 716 Data In C1 LSW N20 32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 715 716 Data In C1 MSW N20 33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 717 718 Data In C2 LSW N20 34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 717 718 Data In C2 MSW N20 35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 719 720 Data In D1 LSW N20 36 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 719 720 Data In D1 MSW N20 37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 721 722 Data In D2 LSW N20 38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 721 722 Data In D2 MSW Using the I O 5 23 Table 5 J Controller Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase
191. ample Ladder Logic Program Information 5 9 ControlLogix Example 5 10 PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example 5 18 examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation Inc does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication A ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The On CIP based networks including EtherNet IP I O connections are used to transfer the data which controls the PowerFlex drive and sets its Reference T O can also be used to transfer data to and from Datalinks in PowerFlex 7 Class drives The adapter provides many options for configuring and using I O including e Configuring the size of I O by enabling or disabling the Logic Command Reference and Datalinks e Setting a Master Slave hierarchy or a Peer to Peer hierarchy Chapter 3 Configuring the Adapter and Chapter 4 Configuring the I O discuss how to configure the adapter and controller on the network for these options The Glossary defines the different options This chapter discusses how to use I O after you have configured the adapter and controller 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 2 Using the I O Understanding the I O Image The terms input and output are defined from the controller s poi
192. an I O connection Steady Normal Operation The adapter is properly connected and communicating on the network to a controller NETB Green Off Normal Operation The adapter is properly connected but is idle Flashing Normal Operation The adapter is properly connected BOOTP is enabled and the adapter is transmitting data packets on the network For more details on status indicator operation refer to page 7 2 and page 7 3 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 2 8 Installing the Adapter Configuring Verifying Key Drive Parameters The PowerFlex 7 Class drive can be separately configured for the control and Reference functions in various combinations For example you could set the drive to have its control come from a peripheral or terminal block with the Reference coming from the network Or you could set the drive to have its control come from the network with the Reference coming from another peripheral or terminal block Or you could set the drive to have both its control and Reference come from the network The following steps in this section assume that the drive will receive the Logic Command and Reference from the network 1 Use drive Parameter 090 Speed Ref A Sel to set the drive speed Reference to 22 DPI Port 5 2 If hard wired discrete digital inputs are not used to control the drive verify that unused digital input drive Parameters 361 Dig In1 Sel and
193. and Command Set Manual Allen Bradley publication 1770 6 5 16 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 10 EtherNet IP Objects 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P N Files N File Description N40 This N file lets you use Emulated Block Transfer messages to read and write many types of DPI messages To use Emulated Block Transfer messages you send a Write message to N40 0 N40 63 wait until the adapter responds with a reply message and then read the response data in N40 0 N40 63 with a Read message For details about Block Transfer messages and the data required for each byte in the N File refer to the Remote I O Adapter User Manual publication 2000MM UMO004 Bits 15 8 are the Most Significant Byte Bits 7 0 are the Least Significant Byte Write Read Bits 15 0 15 0 N40 0 0x00 Length in Bytes 0x00 Length in Bytes N40 1 DPI Port 0x81 Status Size Status Type N40 2 0x00 CIP Service Data N40 3 CIP Class length varies based on message N40 4 CIP Instance N40 5 CIP Attribute N40 6 Data length varies based on message N40 63 N41 This N file lets you read and write control I O messages You can write control I O messages only when all of the following conditions are true e The adapter is not receiving I O from a scanner For example there is no scanner on the network the scanner i
194. and download the configuration these tags allow you to access the Input and Output data of the drive via the controller s ladder logic Figure 4 12 Controller Tags Name amp Value Force Mask Style Data Type My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l 53 AB PowerFlex70E My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive l DriveStatus 2 0000 Binary INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus Ready 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus Active 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus CommandDir Decimal BOOL PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus ActualDir 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus Accelerating 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus Decelerating 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus Alarm 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus Faulted 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus AtSpeed Decimal BOOL My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive DriveStatus_LocallDO 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus LocallD1 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus LocallD2 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus SpdReflDO 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus SpdReflD1 0 Decimal BOOL PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus SpdReflD2 Decimal BOOL My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive l DriveStatus_SpdReflD3 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l OutputFreq 0 Decimal INT PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Outpu
195. and the adapter setup parameter values refer to Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings on page 5 18 Creating RSLogix 500 version 7 or later Project To transmit read and write data between the controller and drive you must create message instructions that allocate data table addresses in the controller for Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks Selecting the Controller 1 Start RSLogix 500 The RSLogix 500 window appears Select File gt New to display the Select Processor Type screen Figure 4 33 Figure 4 33 SLC 500 Select Processor Type Screen Select Processor Type Processor Name EXAMPLE 1747 L553B C 5 05 CPU 64K Mem 05501 Series C 1747 L552B C 5 05 CPU 32K Mem 05501 Series C 1747 L551B C 5 05 CPU 16K Mem 05501 Series C 1747 L553 5 05 CPU 64K Mem 05501 1747 L552 5 05 CPU 32K Mem 5501 1747 L551 5 05 CPU 16K Mem OS501 1747 L553 5 05 CPU 64K Mem 05500 5 05 CPU 5 04 CPU 5 04 CPU 5 04 CPU 16K Mem 05401 Series C 5 04 CPU 64K Mem 05401 1747 L542B 5 04 CPU 32K Mem 05401 Communication settings Driver Processor Node Reply Timeout Ethernet xj 149 Who Active 10 61 Octal 16K Mem 05500 64K Mem 05401 Series C 32K Mem OS401 Series C 5 05 CPU 32K Mem 05500 2 Assign name for the processor In the list select a 1747 L55x type controller Then select the appropriate choices for the fields in the screen to match yo
196. ant The Host DPI Parameter Object is supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Instances The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the device The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 0 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Reserved 16384 Attributes Adapter 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 16385 Adapter Parameter 1 Attributes 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 16386 Adapter Parameter 2 Attributes 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 0x4CO00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 17408 Class Attributes HIM 0x5000 0xX53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 17409 HIM Parameter 1 Attributes 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 17410 HIM Parameter 2 Attributes 0x5800 0xX5BFF 22528 23551 DPI 6 Ox5C00 0x5FFF 23552 24575 DPI Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF 24576 25599 DPI Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 DPI Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 DPI Port 10 Ox6C00 0x6FFF 27648 28671 DPI Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 DPI Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 DPI Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 Port 14 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of parameters in the device 1 Set Write Pr
197. ar IP multicast group Switches that support IGMP snooping managed switches learn which ports have devices that are part of a particular multicast group and only forward the multicast packets to the ports that are part of the multicast group Be careful as to what level of support a switch has of IGMP snooping Some layer 2 switches that support IGMP snooping require a router which could be a layer 3 switch to send out IGMP polls to learn what devices are part of the multicast group Some layer 2 switches can use IGMP snooping without a router sending polls If your control system is a stand alone network or is required to continue performing if the router is out of service make sure the switch you are using supports IGMP snooping without a router being present e Refer to Appendix A for the number of CIP connections supported by the 20 COMM E adapter e Verify that you have all required equipment Refer to Required Equipment on page 1 3 To use the adapter web pages the Web Pages Switch not provided on Series A adapter must be set to its Enable Web position For information to enable disable web pages for a Series A adapter refer to Setting Web Access Control on page 3 16 Important A new switch setting is recognized only when power is applied to the adapter or the adapter is reset If you change a switch setting cycle power or reset the adapter to apply the change contains ESD Electrostatic Discharge s
198. at was read from drive parameter 003 Output Current To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling refer to the specific drive documentation Figure 6 76 Example Get Attribute Single Response Data File 75 Data File N40 dec DER Radix Decimal 1 Columns 10 Properties Usage Help Figure 6 77 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for read messages in the MicroLogix 1100 1400 Figure 6 77 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Gets For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 63 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service A Generic Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 78 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Singl
199. ata Type field must be set to DINT Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for example 4 bytes for a DINT or a REAL When using a PowerFlex 700S or PowerFlex 750 Series drive Accel Time 1 is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when creating the controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P PLC 5 Examples Using Explicit Messaging 6 23 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program to Read or Write Multiple Parameters all versions Since the example ladder logic rungs configuration screens and request response data to read or write multiple parameters using RSLogix 5000 all versions are identical to those for RSLogix 5000 version 15 or later please refer to the information contained on page 6 8 through page 6 18 for complete details Important The PLC 5 must be Series E Rev D 1 or later to support the MultiHop feature that routes messaging to the drive Important Due to inherent limitations with the PCCC N File method only contiguous multiple parameters can be read or written using explicit messaging For this explicit message example we use the N150 N Files because they are already mapped to specific parameters in the drive and its con
200. ault A E mail technical s O11 No Fault 112 HW OverCurrent 113 Ground Fault 014 No Fault 115 Load Loss 116 Motor Thermistor 117 Input Phase Loss 018 ShearPinNoAccel 019 No Fault 120 No Fault 121 Output PhaseLoss E122 No Fault 023 No Fault 124 Decel Inhibit 025 Overspeed Limit 126 No Fault 127 No Fault 128 No Fault 129 Analog In Loss E130 No Fault 031 No Fault 132 No Fault 133 Auto Rstrt Tries 034 No Fault http www rockwellautomation com C Click the desired fault alarm check boxes and click Save Changes D Click the Back to E mail Configuration Page link 2 Type the following information in their respective boxes Information Description IP address of Type in the address of the mail server that will be used to deliver the e mail messages When the IP address is unknown read the TIP shown below this table to determine the mail server address E mail addresses to notify Type in addresses to where you want e mail messages to be sent Multiple addresses can be used but they must be separated by commas comma delimited Subject of e mail message Type in the desired subject text for the e mail message TIP If the IP address of the e mail server is unknown you can contact your IT department or use the following DOS command instructions to find its IP address A Onthe Windows task bar click Start Run to d
201. autions are required when handling the adapter If you are unfamiliar with static control procedures refer to Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage publication 8000 4 5 2 ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If the adapter is transmitting control I O to the drive the drive may fault when you reset the adapter Determine how your drive will respond before resetting an adapter ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameters 21 Comm FIt Action 22 Idle Flt Action and 41 Peer Flt Action let you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if communications are disrupted or the controller is idle By default these parameters fault the drive You can set these parameters so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the settings of these parameters do not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable or a faulted controller ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists When a system is configured for the first time there may be unintended or incorrect machine motion Disconnect the motor from the machine or process during initial system testing ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements
202. be contained in the same N File Two elements words are required for each parameter being read or written For example to read 5 contiguous parameters 10 elements words must be used When using RSLogix 500 version 7 10 or earlier explicit messaging must be performed using the PCCC N File method For RSLogix 500 version 7 20 or later the CIP messaging method has been added along with the PCCC N File method However it is recommended to use the CIP method because it is easier to use and understand For this reason only instructions for the CIP method are provided If you must use the PCCC N File method refer to the PLC 5 Examples on page 6 23 The CIP messaging method provides two ways to perform explicit messaging e Read Write Parameter Service simplifies setup by requiring less data to be entered in message configuration screens However the Read Write Parameter Service can only be used to perform single parameter read or single parameter write explicit messages Multiple parameter reads or writes must be performed using the Generic Get Set Attribute Service described below Important When performing a Write Parameter message the data will always be written to the drive s Non Volatile Storage NVS Continuous NVS writes may damage the drive s EEPROM If continuous writes are necessary use the Generic Set Attribute Single Service and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 40 e Generic Get Set Attribute Service requires m
203. began exchanging I O data with the I O option of the DPI External Comms Kit 47 OPT Close The adapter forced a fault condition on the I O option of the DPI External Comms Kit 48 Timeout Communication between the adapter and I O option of the DPI External Comms Kit was disrupted 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO010E EN P Chapter 8 Accessing the Adapter s Web Home Page Viewing the Adapter s Web Pages This chapter provides instructions on how to monitor the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive by using the adapter s web interface Topic Page Accessing the Adapter s Web Home Page 8 1 Process Display Pop up Window 8 4 TCP IP Configuration Web Page 8 5 Configure E mail Notification Web Page 8 6 DPI Device Information Pages 8 9 Future enhancements may result in adapter web pages that look different than the examples shown in this chapter After configuring the adapter you can view its web pages These pages present information about the adapter the drive to which it is connected and the other DPI devices connected to the drive such as a HIM TIP Series A adapter web pages are enabled differently than Series B e Series A adapter version 2 003 or earlier By default the adapter web pages are enabled To disable the web pages use Bit 0 of Parameter 54 Access Control Refer to Setting Web Access Control on page 3 16 for more information
204. bits are used on REAL parameters only They indicate the maximum number of 17 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 decimal places to be displayed for small values A value of 0 indicates to not limit the 18 FP Max Decimals Bit 2 number of decimal places used 19 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 20 Extended Parameter 0 Not an Extended Parameter Reference Reference 1 Extended Parameter Reference An Extended Parameter Reference contains a reference to another parameter The value is formatted the same as an analog mode Indirect Selector parameter SSpppp where SS slot number of device to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing and pppp number of the parameter or diagnostic item to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing Note that an Extended Parameter Reference can only select parameters unlike an Indirect Selector An Extended Parameter Reference could be used to configure a Datalink or show the source of a Reference among other uses 21 Uses Rating Table Object This parameter has rating dependent defaults and limits that can be obtained from the Rating Table Object The Offline Read Full will include the default value for the smallest rating and limits that will accommodate the full range of values allowed in the family of devices using this particular combination of Family Code and Config Code The Online Read Full will include the rating dependent default and limit values for this particular combination of Family Code Config Code and
205. c Command Command Stop Drive Stop B3 20 N20 20 3 al 0 0 Command Start Drive Start B3 20 N20 20 J E e Us 1 _ Command Jog DriveJog e N20 20 s gt PowerFlex 70 and PowerFlex Command Clear Faults 750 Series B3 20 N20 20 TT Drives 23 A5 3 3 PE p B3 20 N20 20 3 E C m tL 4 4 TET B3 20 N20 20 3t C 3 4 5 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 28 Using the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P Figure 5 16 PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Ladder Logic Program for Speed Reference LES ADD Less Than A lt B Add Source A F8 1 Source A F8 1 45000 0 45000 0 SoureB 327680 SourceB 655360 327680 LOX Dest N20 21 20536 45000 0 lt SourceB 327680 327680 Continued on next page PowerFlex 70 Drive Speed Reference PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Speed Reference Using the I O 5 29 LIN Limit Test Lowlim 327680 327680 Test F8 1 45000 0 lt High Lim 10 10 lt PowerFlex 750 Series Test Drive Speed Reference 327670 327670 High Lin SUB Subtract Source A F8 1 45000 0 lt SoureB 655360 655360 Dest N20 21 20536 Greater Than gt Source B 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 30 Using the I O Notes 20 CO
206. ce 1 Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4B Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex 9 Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Dec Required for scattered messages MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 In this example we are reading five parameters Each parameter being read requires three contiguous 16 bit words Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size Therefore the Size in Bytes must be set to 30 The data structure format is the same as shown on page 6 74 Maximum length is 66 words 132 bytes which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DP Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F 3 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explic
207. circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss WARNING Identifies information about practices or Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures gt Allen Bradley Rockwell Software and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes made to this manual since its last release May 2007 De
208. code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Table 6 D Example Controller Tags to Read Multiple Parameters Operand Controller Tags for Read Multiple Message Data Type XIC Execute Scattered Read Message BOOL MSG Scattered Read Message MESSAGE Figure 6 6 Example Ladder Logic to Read Multiple Parameters Execute Scattered Read Message MSG JE Message Message Control Scattered Read Message KH DN gt CER2 Using Explicit Messaging 6 9 ControlLogix Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters all versions Figure 6 7 Scattered Read Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Configuration Communication Scattered_Read_Message Tag Name Configuration Communication Tag Scattered Read Message Message Configuration Scattered Read Message Path My PowerFlex Drive Message Configuration Scattered Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Type Service Type Service Code Instance Enable Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text CIP Generic 4b Custom 0 Enable Waiting Source Length Class Attribute Stat Extended Error Code Source Element Destination Done zl Scattered_Read_Rec v o 3i Scattered Read Re v New Tag Bytes Done Length 0 Timed Out
209. consists of one word of output to the adapter from the network The size of the word either a 16 bit word or 32 bit word is determined by the drive Feedback is used to monitor the speed of the drive It consists of one word of input from the adapter to the network The size of the word either a 16 bit word or 32 bit word is determined by the drive RSLogix 5 500 5000 RSLogix software is a tool for configuring and monitoring controllers to communicate with connected devices It is a 32 bit application that runs on various Windows operating systems Information about RSLogix software can be found at http www software rockwell com rslogix Scanner A scanner is a separate module of a multi module controller or a built in component of a single module controller that provides communication with adapters connected to a network See also Controller Status Indicators Status indicators are LEDs that are used to report the status of the adapter network and drive They are on the adapter and can be viewed on the front cover of the drive when the drive is powered Subnet Mask An extension to the IP addressing scheme that lets you use a single network ID for multiple physical networks bit mask identifies the part of the address that specifies the network and the part of the address that specifies the unique node on the network A 1 in the subnet mask indicates the bit is used to specify the network A 0 in the subnet mask
210. containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Service Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4B Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex 9 Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Dec Required for scattered messages MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable n this example we are reading five parameters Each parameter being read requires three contiguous 16 bit words Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size The data structure format is the same as shown on page 6 52 Maximum length is 66 words which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F 9 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI
211. control message page 4 36 will error out The Control Timeout is stored in RAM If the adapter is power cycled the Control Timeout Message must be re sent 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 34 Configuring the I O Creating SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status Feedback and Datalink Out 1 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG READ 500CPU LOCAL Nxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example N11 n and nis an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example N11 0 Then press Enter 2 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC Nxx n DN NXB XIC Nxx n ER BND OTU Nxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example N11 0 for the message created in Step 1 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter 3 In the MSG instruction double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 37 Figure 4 36 SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status Feedback and Datalink Out MSG Read Write Message CEND Type Peer To Peer Read Write Read DN2 Target Device 500CPU Local Remote Local CER gt C
212. d by holding last Hold last results in the drive receiving the last data received via the network connection before the disruption If the drive was running and using the Reference from the adapter it will continue to run at the same Reference Host Parameters PowerFlex 750 Series drives only Host parameters are used to configure peripherals connected to a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Host parameters when viewed using DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive appear below the specific peripheral listing in the treeview in a separate Host Parameters folder When using a PowerFlex 7 Class HIM 20 HIM A3 A5 C3S C5S these parameters do not appear When viewed using a PowerFlex 750 Series HIM 20 HIM A6 C65 these parameters appear in the HOST PARAM folder Idle Action An idle action determines how the adapter and connected drive act when the controller is switched out of run mode Glossary G 5 T O Data I O data sometimes called implicit messages or input output is time critical data such as a Logic Command and Reference The terms input and output are defined from the controller s point of view Output is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter Input is produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller IP Addresses A unique IP address identifies each node on an EtherNet IP network An IP address consists of 32 bits that are divided into four segments of one byte each It appears as four decimal in
213. d in the family of devices using this particular combination of Family Code and Config Code The Online Read Full will include the rating dependent default and limit values for this particular combination of Family Code Config Code and Rating Code 22 Writable Referenced This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference If the Parameter parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference then 0 The referenced parameter may be read only or writable 1 The referenced parameter must always be writable including while running 23 Disallow Zero This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference If the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference then 0 Allow zero 1 Disallow zero If this bit is cleared indicating that a value of zero is allowed the device must support the Zero Text parameter attribute so that a software tool or HIM can obtain text from the Zero Text parameter attribute If this bit is set indicating that a value of zero is disallowed a software tool or HIM will not allow the user to enter a value of zero 24 Datalink Out This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink Out parameter Bit 20 must also be set 25 Datalink In This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink In parameter Bits 20 and 22 must also be set 26 Not Writable While IO Active This parameter cannot b
214. data PowerFlex 750 Series drive types N201 14 16 bit integer Port 1 Parameter 7 of 20 HIM A6 HIM in PowerFlex 750 Series drive 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 28 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P PLC 5 Example Single Write Response Data In this specific N151 30 message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 32 to store the request value 10 0 sec that was written to drive parameter 140 Accel Time 1 To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling refer to the specific drive documentation Figure 6 32 Example Single Write Response Data File File N50 dec Radix Decimal E Symbol Columns 10 v Desc N50 Properties Usage Help Figure 6 33 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for write messages in the PLC 5 Figure 6 33 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Writes For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives SLC 500 Examples Using Explicit Messaging 6 29 PLC 5 Reading Writing Multiple Parameters You can read or write only contiguous parameters Also the range of contiguous parameters must
215. database revision use one of the following buttons at the bottom left of the Module Definition screen e Create Database Creates a database from an online network drive Clicking this button displays an RSLinx RSWho window Browse to the online drive for this example PowerFlex 70 EC select it and click OK The database will be uploaded and stored on the computer Thereafter close the Module Definition screen and then re open it to display the new revision e Web Update When a drive is not available online opens the Allen Bradley Drives Web Updates web site to download a specific database file After downloading the file close the Module Definition screen and then re open it to display the new revision e Match Drive Use this button when the drive being added to the network matches the drive profile revision rating configuration settings etc of an existing online network drive Click this button to conveniently create a duplicate drive profile from the online drive and automatically load this identical information into the Module Definition screen This eliminates the need to manually enter the information each time a new drive with a matching profile is added to the network Electronic Keying Compatible Module The Compatible Module setting for Electronic Keying ensures the physical module is consistent with the software configuration before the controller and bridge make a connection Therefore ensure that you ha
216. drives that provide descriptive controller tags for basic control I O words Logic Command Status and Reference Feedback and Datalinks Additionally Datalinks automatically take the name of the drive parameter to which they are assigned These profiles virtually eliminate I O mismatch errors and substantially reduce drive configuration time New Drive tab eliminates the need for a separate drive software configuration tool Drive configuration settings are saved as part of the RSLogix 5000 v16 or later project file ACD and also downloaded to the controller Unicast connection version 18 or later Drive Add On Profiles can be updated anytime When a new drive is used or to benefit from new updates for Add On Profiles you will need the newest Add On Profile update Go to www ab com support abdrives webupdate to download the latest RSLogix 5000 drive Add On Profile To determine your drive Add On Profile version refer to Allen Bradley Knowledgebase document 65882 Adding the Drive Adapter to the I O Configuration To transmit data between the bridge and the drive you must add the drive as a child device to the parent bridge In this example RSLogix 5000 version 16 is used with drive Add On Profile version 3 01 1 In the treeview right click on the bridge and select New Module to display the Select Module screen In our example we right click on the 1756 ENBT A bridge Expand the Drives group to display all of the av
217. e Configuration Communication Tag Name Configuration Communication Tag Scattered Write Message Message Configuration Scattered Write Message Path My PowerFlex Drive Message Configuration Scattered Write Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Type Service Type Service Code Instance Enable Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text cie Generic Custom 4 Class 93 Source Length 30 0 Attribute 0 Enable Waiting Extended Eror Code Stat Source Element Destination Done E Scattered Write Req i Bytes Scaltered Write Re v New Tag Done Length 0 Timed Out The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write multiple parameters Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type 1 Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 1 4c Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Hex Required for scattered messages Source Element Scattered Write Request Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from scanner or bridge to the adapter drive
218. e Reset Required Yes 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P B 6 Adapter Parameters 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Parameter No Name and Description 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Peer Flt Action Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take if the adapter detects that Peer I O communications have been disrupted This setting is effective only if I O is transmitted through the adapter Details Default 0 Fault Values 0 Fault 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4 Send Fit Cfg Type Read Write Reset Required No Fit Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if the ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 41 Peer adapter is unable to communicate with the designated peer By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable Peer Inp Addr 1 Peer Inp Addr 2 Peer Inp Addr 3 Peer Inp Addr 4 Sets the bytes in the IP address that specifies the device from which the adapter receives consumes Peer I O data 255 255 255 255
219. e to read parameter 1 read two elements beginning at N150 2 As another example to read parameters 2 6 read ten elements beginning at N150 4 Number of parameters in the drive Drive parameters 1 124 Drive parameters 125 249 Drive parameters 250 374 Drive parameters 375 499 N150 0 1 N150 2 249 N151 0 249 N152 0 249 N153 0 249 N199 0 249 Drive parameters 6125 6249 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 12 EtherNet IP Objects 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P N File N201 N212 N201 0 N201 2 N202 0 N203 0 N2032 N204 0 N205 0 N2052 N206 0 N207 0 N207 2 N208 0 N209 0 N20922 N210 0 N211 0 N211 2 N212 0 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 1 249 249 Description These N files let you read and write values to DPI and Host parameters in Ports 1 14 for example a HIM or adapter as 32 bit double words You can interpret the data in various ways for example 32 bit real 32 bit integer To read a parameter you need to send a message with two elements For example to read parameter 1 in the peripheral connected to DPI port 1 read two elements beginning at N201 2 As another example to read parameters 2 6 in the peripheral connected to DPI port 5 the adapter read ten elements beginning at
220. e Code hex Error Code Hex 0 Class hex 93 dec 147 Instance hex 8 dec 140 Attribute hex 9 9 Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Comm Command Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address N50 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Size in Bytes 2 Number of bytes to be transferred Each byte size is an 8 bit integer Extended Routing RIX16 0 An unused routing information file for the controller Service 1 Generic Set Attribute Single Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 2 140 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number Attribute 9 9 or 10 Dec Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from
221. e I O Configuration folder 3 See Table 6 4 on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 4 n this example we are reading five parameters Each parameter being read requires an array of three INT registers Therefore a controller tag was created with its Data Type field set to INT 15 Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for this example 30 bytes for an INT 15 array Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size Maximum length is 132 bytes or 66 words which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DP Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 10 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Example Scattered Read Request Data In this message example we use the data structure in Figure 6 8 or Figure 6 9 in the source tag named Scattered Read Request to read these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 001 Output Freq Parameter 003 Output Current Parameter 007 Output Current Parameter 006
222. e Non Volatile Storage in a device 12 Get Class Revision WORD 2 DPI 13 Get Character Set Code BYTE 0 SCANport HIM 1 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 2 ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 3 ISO 8859 3 Latin 3 4 ISO 8859 4 Latin 4 5 ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic 6 ISO 8859 6 Arabic 7 ISO 8859 7 Greek 8 ISO 8859 8 Hebrew 9 ISO 8859 9 Turkish 10 ISO 8859 10 Nordic 255 ISO 10646 Unicode 14 Get Product Option Support BOOL 64 15 Get Languages Supported STRUCT of BYTE Number of Languages BYTE n Language Codes see Class Attribute 2 16 Get Date of Manufacture STRUCT of WORD Year BYTE Month BYTE Day 17 Get Product Revision STRUCT of BYTE Major Firmware Release BYTE Minor Firmware Release 18 Get Serial Number DWORD Value between 0x00000000 and OxFFFFFFFF 19 Set Language Selected BYTE 0 Default HIM will prompt at start up 1 Language was selected no prompt 20 Set Customer Generated Firmware STRING 36 GUID Globally Unique Identifier identifying customer firmware flashed into the device 30 Get International Status Text STRINGN Text describing the status of device with support for Unicode 31 Get Set International User Definable Text STRINGN Text identifying the device with a user supplied name with support for Unicode 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P EtherNet IP Objects C 15 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 34 Get Ke
223. e Parameter EJ Single Write Message B3 0 MSG J E Read Write Message CEN 1 MSG File MG14 0 CDN Setup Screen CER 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 64 Using Explicit Messaging MicroLogix 1100 1400 Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 6 79 Generic Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens General Ins Add Hop 3 MSG MG14 0 1 Elements Send Data Receive Data l DER Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This MicroLogix MSG MG14 0 1 Elements Send Data Receive This Controller Channel 1 Integral Channel 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 73 5j Data Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO Communication Command CIP Generic Break Connection BK Size in Bytes Receive N A Target Device Message Timeout 33 Send N50 0 Awaiting Execution EW Send 2 Error ER Message done DN Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Local Remote Local MuliHop Yes Extended Routing Info File Rlx R1x16 0 Error Service Generic Set Attribute Single Servic
224. e Parameter Value attribute Source Element Accel Time 1 9 Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Source Length 2 Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Communication Tab Example Value Description Path My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single Write Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable Only drive parameters Port 0 can be written to using Parameter Object Class code 0x0F To write to a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 6 21 3 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder 4 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit parameter requiring the tag Data Type field to be set to INT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter the tag Data Type field must be set to DINT Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in by
225. e Series B adapter version 3 xxx or later By default the adapter web pages are disabled To enable the web pages set the Web Pages Switch SW2 in Figure 2 1 to its Enable Web position and reset the adapter Parameter 55 Web Enable can be used to display the setting Enabled or Disabled of this switch The adapter can be configured to automatically send e mail messages to desired addresses when selected drive faults occur and or are cleared and or when the adapter takes a communication or idle fault action For Series A adapters Bit 1 of Parameter 54 Access Control can be used to protect the configured settings for the e mail messaging feature For Series B adapters Bit 0 of Parameter 56 Web Features can be used to protect the configured settings For more details see Configure E mail Notification Web Page on page 8 6 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 8 2 Viewing the Adapter s Web Pages 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Viewing the Web Pages of the Adapter 1 Onacomputer with access to the EtherNet IP network on which the adapter drive is installed launch a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer version 5 0 or later The computer can access the adapter web pages if it is connected to e The same network as the adapter e Anetwork with access to the adapter s network via a gateway device for example a router
226. e data to be read from the drive Size in Elements 2 19 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout 5 Message timeout duration in seconds Data Table Address 9 41 0 Specific starting address of the source file in the drive MultiHop Yes Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the adapter drive When Yes is selected a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 G Table 5 J starting on page 5 20 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 19 9 For N File details see N Files on page C 10 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 36 Configuring the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 1 Creating SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command Reference and Datalink In Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG WRITE 500CPU LOCAL Nxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example N12 n and nis an u
227. e desired I O in Parameter 23 DPI I O Cfg See Figure 3 10 2 Set the bits in Parameter 35 M S Input This parameter determines the data received from the master by the drive A 1 enables the I O and a 0 disables the I O Figure 3 11 Example M S Input LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Bit Description 20 COMM E 0 Logic Command Reference Default Parameter 35 1 Datalink A Input M S Input 2 Datalink B Input CREE 0 Of 3 Datalink C Input 4 Datalink D Input 5 15 Not Used Bit 0 is the right most bit In Figure 3 11 itis highlighted and equals 1 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 3 10 Configuring the Adapter 3 Setthe bits in Parameter 36 M S Output This parameter determines the data transmitted from the drive to the scanner A 1 enables the I O and a 0 disables the I O Figure 3 12 Example M S Output LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Bit Description 20 COMM E 0 Status Feedback Default Parameter 36 1 Datalink A Output M S Output 2 Datalink B Output ce oda d ae 0 Off 3 Datalink C Output 4 Datalink D Output 5 15 Not Used Bit 0 is the right most bit In Figure 3 12 it is highlighted and equals 1 4 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 17 The adapter is ready to receive I O from the master that is scanner You must now configure the scanner to rec
228. e file Service 1 Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4C Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 9F Hex 9 Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Dec Required for scattered messages MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable n this example we are writing to five parameters Each parameter being written to requires three contiguous 16 bit words Scattered write messages always assume that every parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size The data structure format is the same as shown on page 6 52 Maximum length is 66 words which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F 3 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 20 COMM E
229. e not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 For example to write to parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the instance would be 21504 4 21508 See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F to determine the instance number 9 Setting the Attribute value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Non Volatile Storage EEPROM memory so the parameter value will remain even after the drive is power cycled Important When set to 9 be very cautious as the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the Attribute value to A 10 decimal will write the parameter value to temporary memory so the parameter value will be lost after the drive is power cycled It is recommended to use the A 10 decimal setting when frequent write messages are required 4 n this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit parameter If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter the Size in Words would be set to 2 When the parameter being written to is a 32 bit REAL floating point data type the size in words would be set to 2 See the drive documentation to determine the siz
230. e of Contents About This Manual Related Documentation i Lv eor eee eR a ee RR IRR P 1 Rockwell Automation Support 0 0 0 cette eee eens P 2 Conventions Used in This 1 P 3 Getting Started Components o euismo I t t Paene 1 1 Feat res ee once en Sie es Er PRG ni e eto RAM meats 1 2 Compatible Products llle 1 3 Required Equipment E eens 1 3 Safety Precautions s iusta ed bie ope iaaa 1 4 Quick Start 4 aee qe pL qued bud aus 1 5 Status Indicators uev REX ue ERR NER a E SA ERA SERE E 1 6 Installing the Adapter Preparing for an Installation l lleleeeee II 2 1 Setting the Web Pages Switch Series B 2 2 Connecting the Adapter to the Drive lees 2 3 Connecting the Adapter to the 2 6 Applyang Powet opc RI ELA esu Ure ey UE Reg 2 6 Commissioning the 2 8 Configuring the Adapter Confistiration Tools oeei 25e eb ee tb Pa terum Paese ute eiue 3 1 Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM lsseeee IRR 3 2 Using BOQTP ettet Wesen er a eet ee 3 3 Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway 5
231. e of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 5 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 41 SLC 500 Example Set Attribute Single Request Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 48 to store the request value 10 0 sec that was written to drive parameter 140 Accel Time 1 To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling refer to the specific drive documentation Figure 6 48 Example Set Attribute SIngle Request Data File Data File N50 dec Radix Decimal Symbol Columns 10 _ Desc N50 m Properties Usage Help Figure 6 49 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for set messages in the SLC 500 Figure 6 49 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Sets For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 7005 and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 42 Using Explicit Messaging
232. e second word of the data Command word 1 and not word 2 or word 1 and word 2 This only controls specified bits in the Logic Command data to the DPI product and does not change the Reference value Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 100 WORD Control timeout in seconds Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Bad Flag BOOL If set to 1 then attribute 4 may contain invalid data 0 good 1 bad 2 Get Direction BOOL Direction of data transfer 0 Producer Register drive to network 1 Consumer Register network to drive 3 Get Size WORD Size of register data in bits 4 Conditional Data ARRAY of BITS Data to be transferred 1 For this attribute the Access Rule is Get if Direction 0 The Access Rule is Set if Direction 1 Important Setting a Register object attribute can be done only when the Control Timeout class attribute 100 has been set to a non zero value 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Parameter Object Attribute ID 1 EtherNet IP Objects C 5 Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal OxOF 15 Important This object is not supported when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance 0x01 Yes Yes Get Attributes All 0x05 Yes No Reset Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Si
233. e to be written Size in Elements 2 1 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout 5 Message timeout duration in seconds Data Table Address 9 N42 3 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive MultiHop Yes Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the adapter drive When Yes is selected a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 7 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 G Table 5 J starting on page 5 20 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 19 3 For details on setting the control timeout value and its function see N Files on page C 10 The Control Timeout N42 3 is stored in RAM If the 20 COMM E adapter is power cycled the Control Timeout Message must be re sent If the Control Timeout is not changed from a non zero value the control message page 4 36 will error out TIP The Control Timeout N42 3 must be changed to a non zero value 5 20 seconds recommended If the Control Timeout is not changed from a non zero value the
234. e written if the I O data being exchanged between the Host and the 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P peripheral is valid Bit 27 Name EtherNet IP Objects C 35 Description Command Parameter This parameter commands the drive to take an action such as Reset Defaults or Autotune and then returns to a value of zero Offline software tools will not allow setting this parameter to anything other than a value of zero If an offline file contains a Command Parameter with a non zero value the offline software tool will change the value to zero Note that command parameters cannot have values that do not return to zero 28 Current Value Is Default This bit identifies a parameter that will not change if a Reset Defaults is commanded For example if a drive contains a Language parameter that is set to German setting defaults will leave the parameter set to German Likewise if the parameter is set to French setting defaults will leave the parameter set to French 29 Use Zero Text If the Disallow Zero bit is set this bit must be cleared If the Disallow Zero bit is cleared then 0 Use Disabled Text parameter class attribute 1 Use Zero Text parameter instance attribute 30 31 Reserved Reserved Formulas for Converting Display Value Internal Value Offset x Multiplier x Base Divisor x 10 Decima Places Internal Val
235. ector for the Ethernet cable The connector is CAT 5 compliant to ensure reliable data transfer on 100Base TX Ethernet connections Web Pages Switch Enables or disables the adapter web pages Refer to Setting the SW2 Web Pages Switch Series B only on page 2 2 SW1 is unused 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 12 Getting Started Features 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P The features of the adapter include Typical mounting in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive The Series B 20 COMM E adapter FRN 3 xxx or later can also be installed in a DPI External Comms Kit and used with the kit s optional I O board See Chapter 9 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE for more information DPI External Comms Kit Compatibility 20 COMM E Adapter Operation With DPI External Comms Kit Optional I O Board Series Firmware Version 20 XCOMM DC BASE 20 XCOMM IO OPT1 A 2 and earlier No No B 3 xxx and later Yes Yes Captive screws to secure and ground the adapter to the drive or when mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit to the kit s metal enclosure Compatibility with various configuration tools to configure the adapter and connected drive The tools include the PowerFlex HIM on the drive and drive configuration software such as DriveExplorer version 2 01 or later or DriveExecutive version 3 01 or
236. ed lt Status Running Cancel 5 When finished click OK to close the Module Properties screen for the drive 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 14 Configuring the I O Using the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile versions 13 15 When compared to using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile all versions the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile provides these advantages e Profiles for specific drives Figure 4 18 that provide descriptive controller tags for basic control I O words Logic Command Status and Reference Feedback The controller tags for Datalinks however have non descriptive UserDefinedData n names e Improved I O configuration no I O assembly configuration required Basic control I O is defined but Datalinks still need to be configured mapped e The Setup tab includes a DriveExecutive icon link to conveniently launch DriveExecutive when installed on computer to match the adapter I O configuration with the controller and to assign the Datalink parameters in the drive This reduces I O mismatches gt TIP Since the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile has been significantly improved upon by RSLogix 5000 Drive Add On Profiles version 16 or later it is highly recommended to use RSLogix 5000 Drive Add On Profiles to take advantage of its benefits more intuitive time saving and less likely to make I O configuration errors Figure 4 18 Classic Profile Screens for
237. ed After configuration settings can be protected by using Parameter 56 Web Features to set E mail Cfg Bit 0 value to 0 Disabled To change a protected configuration it must first be unprotected by setting the E mail Cfg Bit 0 value back to 1 Enabled To configure e mail notification 1 Click the desired Send an e mail message when check boxes you want to occur that will send e mail notification If you only want e mail notification when selected faults alarms occur A Click the respective fault and or alarm radio buttons B Click the selected faults link and or selected alarms link Figure 8 5 shows an example faults configuration page Viewing the Adapters Web Pages 8 7 Figure 8 5 Example of Selected Faults Configuration Page Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer Edit View Favorites Tools Help Qe x 6 uc Search he Favorites LJ E 1 3 ddress http 10 91 100 79 Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley EEE Minimize Select Faults Process display Choose the faults for which you would like e mail notification below 3 TCP IP configurati E E Configure e mail n E11 No Fault E12 Auxiliary Input Gi Browse DPI device L13 Power Loss 04 UnderVoltage o Online user mant 35 Overvoltage 16 Motor Stalled PARA LIE 07 Motor OverLoad 18 Heatsink OvrTemp 8 Launch my DriveE 09 Trnsistr OvrTemp 010 No F
238. ed Read Message Configuration Screens 3 EEM N15 0 58 Elements Send Data Receive Data Ins Add Del Remove Hop From Device To Address FromPot To Address Type This SLCS00 EEM N15 0 58 Elements General Send Data Receive Data This Controller Channel 1 Size in Words Receive Data 15 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 79 Message Control Bits Ignore if timed out 0 Awaiting Execution EW Send Data 15 Data Table Address Receive Data N amp 0 0 Send Data N70 0 Continuous Run CO Target Device Message Timeout x1 sec Service Custom Service Code Error ERI Done DN Transmitting ST Enabled Waiting for Queue Space MuliHop Class hex deck 147 Instance hex deck 0 Attribute hex deel 0 Error Code hex 0 Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read multiple parameters General Tab Example Value Description Size in Words 15 2 Number of words to be transferred Each word size is a 16 bit integer Data Table Address N60 0 An unused controller data table address
239. ence least significant Feedback least significant N45 3 Reference most significant Feedback most significant N45 4 DL From Net 01 least significant DL To Net 01 least significant N45 5 DL From Net 01 most significant DL To Net 01 most significant N45 6 DL From Net 02 least significant DL To Net 02 least significant N45 7 DL From Net 02 most significant DL To Net 02 most significant N45 8 DL From Net 03 least significant DL To Net 03 least significant N45 9 DL From Net 03 most significant DL To Net 03 most significant N45 10 DL From Net 04 least significant DL To Net 04 least significant N45 11 DL From Net 04 most significant DL To Net 04 most significant N45 12 DL From Net 05 least significant DL To Net 05 least significant N45 13 DL From Net 05 most significant DL To Net 05 most significant N45 14 DL From Net 06 least significant DL To Net 06 least significant N45 15 DL From Net 06 most significant DL To Net 06 most significant N45 16 DL From Net 07 least significant DL To Net 07 least significant N45 17 DL From Net 07 most significant DL To Net 07 most significant N45 18 DL From Net 08 least significant DL To Net 08 least significant N45 19 DL From Net 08 most significant DL To Net 08 most significant N45 20 DL From Net 09 least significant DL To Net 09 least significant N45 21 DL From Net 09 most significant DL To Net 09 most significant N45 22 DL From Net 10 least signif
240. ensitive parts that can be damaged if you do not follow ESD control procedures Static control precautions are required when handling the adapter If you are unfamiliar with static control procedures refer to Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage publication 8000 4 5 2 0 ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists The adapter Set the Web Pages Switch SW2 in Figure 2 1 to enable or disable the adapter web pages By default the adapter web pages are disabled For complete details on adapter web pages see Viewing the Adapter s Web Pages on page 8 1 Connecting the Adapter to the Drive Installing the Adapter 2 3 Figure 2 1 Setting Web Pages Switch WEB PAGES SWITCH UNUSED SWITCH Enable Web Position Disable Web Position SW2 Setting Description Down OFF position Disables the adapter web pages default setting Up ON position Enables the adapter web pages drive may contain high voltages that can cause injury or death Remove power from the drive and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing the adapter A ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists The PowerFlex 1 Remove power from the drive Use static control precautions Remove the drive cover or open the drive door Connect the Internal Interface cable to the DPI port on the drive and then to the DPI connector on the adapter see Figure 2 2 5 Secure and ground the ada
241. ent damage and or AN personal injury note that changes to adapter Parameter 37 Ref Adjust take effect immediately A drive receiving its Reference from the adapter will receive the newly scaled Reference resulting in a change of speed If the adapter is receiving a Reference set Parameter 37 Ref Adjust to the desired scaling factor Figure 3 24 Example Ref Adjust LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Default 100 0096 20 COMM E Parameter 37 Ref Adjust 100 00 0 00 lt gt 200 00 The adjustment takes effect as soon as it is entered Setting a Fault Action Configuring the Adapter 3 15 By default when I O communications are disrupted for example a cable is disconnected or the controller is idle in program mode or faulted the drive responds by faulting if it is using I O from the network You can configure a different response to e Disrupted I O communication using Parameter 21 Comm Fit Action e An idle controller using Parameter 22 Idle Flt Action Parameters 21 Comm FIt Action and 22 Idle FIt Action let you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if I O communications are disrupted or the controller is idle By default these parameters fault the drive You can set these parameters so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the settings of these parameters do not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the
242. ent damage exists If the Set Parameter 20 Reset Module to 1 Reset Module Figure 3 28 Example Reset Module LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM E 0 Ready Default Parameter 20 1 Reset Module Reset 2 Set Defaults Reset Module When you enter 1 Reset Module the adapter will be immediately reset When you enter 2 Set Defaults the adapter will set all adapter 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 3 18 Configuring the Adapter Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters Flash Updating the Adapter 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P parameters to their factory default values After performing a Set Defaults enter 1 Reset Module so that the new values take effect The value of this parameter will be restored to 0 Ready after the adapter is reset The following parameters provide information about the status of the adapter You can view these parameters at any time Parameter Description 17 EN Rate Act The data rate used by the adapter 18 Ref Fdbk Size The size of the Reference Feedback It will either be 16 bits or 32 bits It is set in the drive and the adapter automatically uses the correct size 19 Datalink Size The size of the Datalinks It will either be 16 bits or 32 bits It is set in the drive and the adapter automatically uses the c
243. ents Resetting the adapter to defaults has no effect on the event queue Using the HIM to View and Clear Events Step Example Screen Viewing Events 1 Access parameters in the adapter Refer to Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM on page 3 2 Main Menu 2 Press the or GD key to scroll to Diagnostics Parameter 3 Press the Enter key to display the Diagnostics menu the Device Select adapter 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Events option and then View Event Queue option 5 Press the or key to scroll through events The most Event E3 recent event is Event 1 Ping Time Fit Clearing Events 1 Access parameters in the adapter Refer to Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM on page 3 2 2 Press the G key to scroll to Diagnostics 3 Press the Enter key to display the Diagnostics menu in the adapter 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Events option and then the Clear Event option or Clr Event Queue option A message will pop up to confirm that you want to clear the message or queue 5 Press the Enter key to confirm your request If Event 097 Events Queue was selected all event queue entries will then display No View Event Queue Event Clear Event Troubleshooting T 7 Events Many events in the event queue occur under normal operation If you encounter unexpected communications problems the events may help you or Allen Bradle
244. eq 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 70 Using Explicit Messaging In this message example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Parameter Read Value Data Type 1 Output Freq 45 0 Hz REAL 7 Output Current 0 03 Amp REAL 137 Open Loop Fdbk 3055441 DINT 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data 45 0 Hz REAL 260 Analog InO Value 9 377 Volts REAL MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service A Custom scattered write message is used to write to multiple parameters This write message example writes the following values to these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Write Value PowerFlex 750 Series Write Value Drive Parameter Drive Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 143 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 105 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 725 Zero Position 33 106 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 21555 Port 5 Analog InO Hi 55 107 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz 780 PTP Setpoint 75 555 Refer to DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class
245. er Figure 6 3 Parameter Read Single Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Single Read Message Message Configuration Single Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Configuration Communication Tag Single_Read_Message Message Configuration Single Read Message Path My_PowerFlex_Drive Configuration Communication Tag Message Type Service Type Service Code Instance Enable Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text CIP Generic gi Parameter Read 3 Attribute 1 Hex Enable Waiting Start Extended Error Code e Hex Class f Hex DESSIN Done Dutput Current New Tag Done Length 0 Timed Out x coa a _ The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type 1 Parameter Read This service is used to read a parameter value Service Code 1 e Hex Code for the requested service Class f Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 2 3 Dec Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute 1 Hex Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Destination Output Current The tag where the data t
246. er 1756 ENBT Bridge e eg FE Ethernet Switch RE nuu o 4 Route the other end of the Ethernet cable through the bottom of the PowerFlex drive Figure 2 3 and insert its Ethernet cable plug into the mating adapter receptacle exists Unpredictable operation may occur if you fail to verify that parameter settings are compatible with your application Verify that settings are compatible with your application before applying power to the drive ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage injury or death Install the drive cover or close the drive door and apply power to the drive The adapter receives its power from the connected drive When you apply power to the adapter for the first time its topmost PORT status indicator should be steady green or flashing green after an initialization If it is red there is a problem Refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Start Up Status Indications After power has been applied the status indicators for the drive and communications adapter can be viewed on the front of the drive Figure 2 5 Possible start up status indications are shown in Table 2 A Installing the Adapter 2 7 Figure 2 5 Drive and Adapter Status Indicators location on drive may vary PORTO MODO Q wm AO NETBO C CX OO OOOOO OOOOO OOOO C OOQOOO Allen Bradley Table 2 A Drive and Adapter Start Up Stat
247. er Value LSW 14 Pad Word Parameter Value MSW 63 Parameter Number Parameter Number 64 Pad Word Parameter Value LSW 65 Pad Word Parameter Value MSW Figure 6 97 Data Structures for Scattered Write Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number 1 Parameter Value LSW 1 Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW 2 Pad Word 3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number 4 Parameter Value LSW 4 Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW 5 Pad Word 6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number 7 Parameter Value LSW 7 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW 8 Pad Word 9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number 10 Parameter Value LSW 10 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW 11 Word 12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number 13 Parameter Value LSW 13 Word 14 Parameter Value MSW 14 Pad Word 63 Parameter Number 63 Parameter Number 64 Parameter Value LSW 64 Pad Word 65 Parameter Value MSW 65 Pad Word Chapter 7 Troubleshooting This chapter provides information for diagnosing and troubleshooting potential problems with the adapter and network Topic Page Understanding the Status Indicators 7 1 PORT Status Indicator 7 2 MOD Status Indicator 7 2 NET A Status Indicator 7 3 NET B Status Indicator 7 8 Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items 7 4 Viewin
248. er to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks over the network Figure 4 24 PLC 5 Example EtherNet IP Network IP Address 10 91 100 80 PLC 5 40E Controller with Embedded Ethernet OOOO IP Address 10 91 100 79 PowerFlex 70 Drive with 20 COMM E Adapter Lr Pml Ethernet Switch FS Computer with mE Ethernet Connection gt NOTE Information for PowerFlex 750 Series drives has been added to this manual where applicable 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Configuring the I O 4 23 Configuring Parameters for Network I O Since the I O for the drive is message based there is no need to configure any I O inside the RSLogix 5 version 7 or later project until using the I O as described in Chapter 5 However to get the adapter to operate with the I O created in Chapter 5 you need to configure the adapter to accept the I O and the drive to point to the appropriate Datalinks 1 For this example the following adapter I O parameters are set to these values Adapter Parameter No Setting 23 DPI I O Cfg XXXX xxx 1111 35 M S Input XXXX XXXX xxx 1111 36 M S Output XXXX XXXX xxx1 1111 2 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 17 or powe
249. erFlex 750 Series drives To do a single parameter write follow the SLC 500 Generic Attribute Service single write example on page 6 39 Figure 6 38 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter B3 0 EEM J E EtherNet IP Explicit Message I CEN 1 Control Block N140 DN2 Control Block Length 58 lt ER Setup Screen lt Important If the explicit message single write must be written continuously use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 40 This writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example single write message using Class code F writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 34 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P SLC 500 Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service Figure 6 39 Write Parameter Message Configuration Screens i3 EEM N14 0 This Controller Size in Words Receive Data 0 Data Table Address Receive Data Target Device Service Error Descripli No errors 58 Elements General Ins Add Hop nd Data Receive Data Del Remove Hop From Device From Port ToAddress Type To Address This SLC500 58 Elements p Send
250. eral at DPI port 14 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 14 EtherNet IP Objects C 13 DPI Device Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x92 146 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of components in the device The total number of components can be read in Instance 0 Class Attribute 4 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Component 1 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Drive Component 2 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI 2 Ox4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Adapter Component 1 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 DPI Port 6 Ox5C00 0x5FFF 22552 24575 DPI Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF 7 24576 25599 DPI Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 7 25600 26623 DPI Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 DPI Port 10 Ox6C00 0x6FFF 27648 28671 DPI Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 7 28672 29695 DPI Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 7 29696 30719 DPI Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 DPI Port 14 1 The
251. ered_Read_Response 3 3 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Response 4 1 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered_Read_Response 5 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered_Read_Response 6 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Response 7 1187 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered Read Response 8 0 INT Parameter Value MSW _ Scattered_Read_Response 3 12 INT Parameter Number decimal _ Scattered_Read_Response 10 3292 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered Read Response 11 INT Parameter Value MSW Scaltered Read Response 12 17 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered_Read_Response 13 8318 INT Parameter Value LSW Scaltered Read Response 14 0 INT Parameter Value MSW In this message example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter Read Value 1 Output Freq 32 5 Hz 3 Output Current 0 01 Amp 6 Output Voltage 118 7 VAC 12 DC Bus Voltage 329 2 VDC 17 Analog In2 Value 8 318 mA Figure 6 11 Example Scattered Read Response Data for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Name amp Value Data Description Scattered_Read_Response INT 15 Scattered Read Response 0 1 INT Parameter Number decimal m Scattered Read Response 1 0 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered Read Response 2 16948 INT Parameter Value MSW Scattered Read Response 3 7 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Response 4 15729 INT
252. ess Enter Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG11 0 for the message created in Step 1 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter In the MSG instruction double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 29 Figure 4 28 PLC 5 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status Feedback and Datalink ut MSG Read Write Message CEN gt Control MG11 0 CDN5 Setup Screen 5 a MG11 0 JL CUS CU DN EN 4 Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen Configuring the I O 4 27 Figure 4 29 PLC 5 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Status Feedback and Datalink Out 3 MSG Rung 2 2 MG11 0 ultiHop This PLC 5 Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read Data Table Address Size in Elements Port Number Target Device Data Table Address N41 0 N20 1 ps R MultiHop 3 MSG Rung 2 2 MG11 0 General Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO To be retried NR Awaiting Execution EW Continuous Run CO Er
253. est U 1 NT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Request 1 0 INT Pad Word Scattered Read Request 2 0 INT Pad Word Scattered_Read_Request 3 7 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Request 4 0 INT Pad Word m Scattered Read Request 5 0 INT Pad Word Scattered Read Request 5 137 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Request 7 0 INT Pad Word Scaltered Read Request 8 0 INT Pad Word i Scattered_Read_Request 9 21581 INT Parameter Number decimal Scaltered Read Request 10 0 INT Pad Word Scattered Read Request 11 0 INT Pad Word Scallered Read Request 12 260 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Request 13 0 INT Pad Word Scattered Read Request 14 0 INT Pad Word 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 11 ControlLogix Example Scattered Read Response Data The Scattered Read Request message reads the multiple parameters and returns their values to the destination tag Scattered Read Response Figure 6 10 or Figure 6 11 shows the parameter values Figure 6 10 Example Scattered Read Response Data for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive amp Value Data Type Description Scattered Read Response INT 15 Scalttered Read Response 0 1 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Read Response 1 325 INT Parameter Value LSW Scattered Read Response 2 0 INT Parameter Value MSW Scatt
254. esu The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read multiple parameters Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type m Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4b Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Hex Required for scattered messages Source Element Scattered Read Request Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Source Length 30 Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Destination Scattered Read Response The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path My PowerFlex Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Scattered Read Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in th
255. et Address MAC Hardware address for the adapter Ethernet Received Packets Number of packets that the adapter has received Ethernet Receive Errors Number of receive errors reported by the hardware Ethernet Receive Overruns Number of receive buffer overruns reported by the hardware Ethernet Transmitted Packets Number of packets that the adapter has sent Ethernet Transmit Errors Number of transmit errors reported by the hardware EtherNet IP Missed I O Packets Number of I O connection packets that the adapter did not receive 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 8 6 Viewing the Adapter s Web Pages Configure E mail Notification Web Page 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P The Configure E mail Notification web page contains selections and data fields for configuring the adapter to automatically send e mail messages to desired addresses when selected types of events occur To view this web page click the Configure e mail link highlighted in Figure 8 4 in the navigation menu Figure 8 4 Example of Configure E mail Notification Web Page Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer Edt Favorites Tools 5 he Favorites Wee Ac htto 10 91 100 79 Allen Bradley EtherNet IP Adapter tee Minimize Configure E mai
256. et Revision STRUCT of Major BYTE Value varies Minor BYTE Value varies 5 Get Status WORD Bit 0 Owned Bit 8 Minor recoverable fault Bit 10 Major recoverable fault 6 Get Serial Number DWORD Unique 32 bit number 7 Get Product Name SHORT STRING Product name and rating 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Assembly Object EtherNet IP Objects C 3 Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x04 4 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances Instance Description 1 All I O data being read from the DPI device read only 2 All I O data written to the DPI device read write Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Revision WORD 2 2 Get Max Instance WORD 2 100 Set Control Timeout WORD Control timeout in seconds Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Number of WORD 1 Members 2 Get Member List ARRAY of STRUCT WORD Size of member data WORD Size of member path Packed EPATH Member path 3 Conditional Data Array of Bits Data to be transferred 4 Get Size WORD Size of assembly data in bits 1 For instance 1 access rule for the data attribute is Get For instance 2 it is Get Set Important Setting an assembly object attribute can be done only when
257. explorer or version 2 01 or later DriveExplorer online help installed with the software DriveExecutive Software http Avww ab com drives drivetools or version 3 01 or later DriveExecutive online help installed with the software 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 3 2 Configuring the Adapter Using the PowerFlex7 Class If your drive has either an LED or LCD HIM Human Interface Module it HIM can be used to access parameters in the adapter as shown below It is recommended that you read through the steps for your HIM before performing the sequence For additional information refer to the drive documentation or the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM Quick Reference publication 20HIM QRO01 Using an LED HIM Step Example Screens 1 Press the key and then the Device Sel key to display the Device Screen 2 Press the or GD key to scroll to the adapter Letters represent files in the drive and numbers represent ports The adapter is usually connected to port 5 1 Lm C3 3 Press the Enter key to enter your selection A parameter database is constructed and then the first parameter is displayed 4 Editthe parameters using the same techniques that you use to edit drive parameters Using an LCD HIM Step Example Screens 1 In the main menu press the or GD key to scroll to Device Select F gt Stopped Auto Hz
258. f parameters in the device The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 0 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Parameter 1 Attributes 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Drive Parameter 2 Attributes 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 0x4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Adapter Parameter 1 Attributes 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0X5BFF 22528 23551 DPI Port 6 0x5C00 0x5FFF 23552 24575 DPI Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF 7 24576 25599 DPI Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 7 25600 26623 DPI Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 7 26624 27647 DPI Port 10 Ox6C00 0x6FFF 27648 28671 DPI Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 7 28672 29695 DPI Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 7 29696 30719 DPI Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 DPI Port 14 1 These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of parameters in the device 1 Set Write Protect Password WORD 0 Password disabled n Password 2 Set NVS Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Store values in active memory to NVS 2 Load values in NVS to active memory 3
259. g and Clearing Events 7 6 Understanding the Status The adapter has four status indicators They can be viewed on the adapter or Indicators through the drive cover See Figure 7 1 Figure 7 1 Status Indicators location on drive may vary OOOO OOOOO o B OOOOCOC OOOOO OOOOO i m e amp Allen Bradley ltem Status Indicator Description PORT DPI Connection Status 7 2 MOD Adapter Status 7 2 NETA EtherNet IP Connection Status 7 3 NETB EtherNet IP Transmit Status 7 3 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P T 2 Troubleshooting PORT Status Indicator This red green bicolor LED indicates the status of the adapter s connection to the drive as shown in the table below Status Cause Corrective Action Off The adapter is not powered or is not properly e Securely connect the adapter to the drive using the Internal connected to the drive Interface ribbon cable e Apply power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit Flashing Red The adapter is not receiving a ping message from e Verify that cables are securely connected and not damaged the drive Replace cables if necessary e Cycle power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit Steady Red The drive has refused an I O connection from the Important Cycle power to t
260. ge C 10 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO10E EN P 4 28 Configuring the I O Creating PLC 5 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command Reference and Datalink In 1 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG MGxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG12 n and nis an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG12 0 Then press Enter 2 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG12 0 for the message created in Step 1 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter 3 In the MSG instruction double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 31 Figure 4 30 PLC 5 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command Reference and Datalink In MSG Read Write Message EN gt Control MG12 0 DN 5 Setup Screen CER 5 MG12 0 MG12 0 EE S C d DN EN MG12 0 ER 4 Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen 20 COMM E EtherNet IP
261. gic Status N20 1 Tr 0 0 Status Active 3 1 CO 1 1 Actual Direction Status Forward N20 1 3 1 3 a Actual Direction _ Status Reverse N20 1 B3 1 IE F G M 2 3 4 Drive Faulted Status Faulted N20 1 3 1 E 7 7 Drive At Speed Status At Speed N20 1 B3 1 FE CS zd 8 8 PowerFlex 70 and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 26 Using the I O Figure 5 14 PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Ladder Logic Program for Speed Feedback PowerFlex 70 Drive Speed Feedback Greater Than A gt B Source A N20 2 Source B Source A N20 2 Source A N20 3 32768 0 0 lt 15123 lt 327680 SourceB 327680 Source B l 32768 0 1 lt 00 PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Speed Feedback Source A N20 3 15123 lt Source B 1 1 lt Limit Test Low Lia Source N20 3 15123 Test N20 Source B HighLim 327670 Less Than A lt B Source A N20 Source A N20 2 0 Source B SoureB 655360 655360 Dest F8 0 00 lt For information on speed Reference and Feedback scaling see PowerFlex 7 Class Drives except PowerFlex 750 Series on page 5 6 or PowerFlex 750 Series Drives on page 5 7 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P Using the I O 5 27 Figure 5 15 PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Ladder Logic Program for Logi
262. gram that frequently uses Explicit Messages to write parameter data to NVS Datalinks do not write to NVS and should be used for frequently changed parameters Refer to Chapter 5 for information about the I O Image using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 2 Using Explicit Messaging About Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Explicit Messaging is used to transfer data that does not require continuous updates With Explicit Messaging you can configure and monitor a slave device s parameters on the network Important When an explicit message is performed by default no connection is made since it is an unconnected message When timing of the message transaction is important you can create a dedicated message connection between the controller and drive by checking the Connected box on the Communications tab message configuration screen during message setup These message connections are in addition to the I O connection However the trade off for more message connections is decreased network performance If your application cannot tolerate this do not check the Connected box which 1s recommended Important PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives have explicit messaging limitations Table 6 A shows the EtherNet IP Object Class code compatibilities for t
263. h box to configure a message to read a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Comm Command CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address N40 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Size in Bytes 49 Number of bytes to be transferred Each byte size is an 8 bit integer Extended Routing RIX15 0 An unused routing information file for the controller Service 1 Read Parameter Code for the requested service Instance 2 3 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable Only drive parameters Port 0 can be read using Parameter Object Class code OxOF To read a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 6 60 9 n this example Output Current is a 32 bit parameter If the parameter being read is a 16 bit parameter the Size in Bytes wou
264. hat is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 9 My PowerFlex Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single Read Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable Only drive parameters Port 0 can be read using Parameter Object Class code OxOF To read a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 6 19 3 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder 0 n this example Output Current is a 32 bit parameter requiring the Data Type field to be set to DINT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being read is a 16 bit parameter the tag Data Type field must be set to INT When using a PowerFlex 7005 drive Output Current is a floating point parameter requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when creating the controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 6 Using
265. he 20 COMM E adapter will output that Datalink s information to the controller 6 Click OK on the Module Definition screen to save the drive and adapter configuration and close the screen The drive s New Module screen reappears 7 Onthe New Module screen click the Connection tab Figure 4 10 Figure 4 10 New Module Connection Tab Screen Wl Module Properties My EtherNet IP Bridge PowerFlex 70 EC E 3 2 General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Drive Requested Packet Interval RPI 200 ms 2 0 9999 9 Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Screen for RSLogix 5000 versions 16 and 17 Module Fault Status Offline L New Module General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Drive Requested Packet Interval RPI 200 ms 2 0 9999 9 Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Use Unicast Connection over EtherNet IP Screen for RSLogix 5000 version 18 or later Module Fault Status Creating OK Cancel Help 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 8 Configuring the I O 4 9 In the Requested Packet Interval RPI box set the value to 5 0 milliseconds or greater This value determines the maximum interval that a controller should use to move data to and from the adapter To conserve bandwidth use
266. he documentation for your drive for details 4 If you enabled one or more Datalinks configure parameters in the drive to determine the source and destination of data in the Datalink s When using Datalinks up to 8 drive Data In xx parameters 300 307 and or up to 8 Data Out xx parameters 310 317 must be assigned to point to the appropriate drive parameters for your application See Chapter 4 for an example 5 Resetthe adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 17 The adapter is ready to receive I O You must now configure the adapter to receive I O from a master or peer device See Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer If you select a Master Slave hierarchy you must also configure the master to communicate with the adapter See Chapter 4 Configuring the I O A hierarchy determines the type of device with which the adapter exchanges data In a Master Slave hierarchy the adapter exchanges data with a master such as a scanner or bridge 1756 ENBT 1756 EN2T 1747 L5 xxx etc In a Peer to Peer hierarchy the adapter exchanges data with one or more EtherNet IP adapters connected to other drives The drives must have compatible Logic Command Status words For both Master Slave and Peer to Peer hierarchies the devices exchanging data must be on the same IP subnet See IP Addresses in the Glossary for information about IP subnets Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy Scanner to Drive Communication 1 Enable th
267. he drive or adapter if mounted in a adapter DPI External Comms Kit after making any of the following m corrections RR e Verify that all DPI cables on the drive are securely as the adapter connected and not damaged Replace cables if necessary e Verify that the DPI drive supports Datalinks e Configure the adapter to use a Datalink that is not already being used by another peripheral Steady Orange The adapter is connected to a product that does not Connect the adapter to a product that supports Allen Bradley support Allen Bradley communications DPI communications for example a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Flashing Green The adapter is establishing an I O connection to the No action required Normal behavior if no DPI I O is enabled drive Steady Green The adapter is properly connected and is No action required communicating with the drive MOD Status Indicator This red green bicolor LED indicates the status of the adapter as shown in the table below Status Cause Corrective Action Off The adapter is not powered or is not properly e Securely connect the adapter to the drive using the Internal connected to the drive Interface ribbon cable e Apply power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit Flashing Red The adapter has failed the firmware test e Clear faults in the adapter TR Cycle power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI The adapter is being flash upgraded Comms Kit
268. he parameter 82 default value speed Reference scaling is 0 32767 0 60 0 Hz If parameter 82 Maximum Speed is changed to 90 Hz then 90 Hz 32767 Speed Feedback uses the same scaling as the speed Reference Using Datalinks Using the I O 5 7 TIP For PowerFlex 700 VC drives firmware version 3 xxx or later Parameter 299 DPI Fdbk Select enables you to select the feedback data coming from the drive over DPI The default is Speed Fdbk in Hz or RPM determined by Parameter 079 Speed Units The data selection for Parameter 299 is also displayed on the 1st line of the HIM and on DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive screens in the drive status area of the screen PowerFlex 750 Series Drives The Reference value is Hz x 1000 or RPM x 1000 Drive Parameter 300 Speed Units determines whether the scaling is Hz or RPM The default scaling is Hz where 0 60 000 equates to 0 60 000 Hz When Parameter 300 is set to RPM then 0 1 765 000 equates to 0 1765 000 RPM A Datalink is a mechanism used by PowerFlex drives to transfer data to and from the controller Datalinks allow a drive parameter value to be read or written without using an Explicit Message When enabled each Datalink occupies two 16 bit or 32 bit words in both the input and output image Use adapter Parameter 19 Datalink Size to determine whether the drive uses 16 bit or 32 bit words for Datalinks Rules for Using Datalinks e Each set of Datalink
269. hese drives Table 6 A Explicit Messaging Class Code Compatibility with Drives EtherNet IP Object PowerFlex PowerFlex Explicit Messaging Function Class Code 7 Class Drives 750 Series Drives Parameter Object Yes No Single parameter reads writes Ox0F DPI Parameter Yes Yes Single and scattered parameter Object 0x93 with limitations reads writes Host DPI Parameter Yes Single and scattered parameter Object Ox9F with limitations reads writes 1 Enables access to drive parameters Port 0 DPI device parameters Ports 1 6 only and Host parameters Ports 7 14 only For example DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 can access a 20 COMM E adapter in Port 6 However Class code 0x93 cannot access for example the Host parameters in a 24V I O option module in Port 5 See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 for instance parameter numbering Enables access to drive parameters Port 0 and Host parameters for all ports 1 14 Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F cannot access DPI device parameters For example if a 20 750 DNET option module is in Port 4 its Host parameters can be accessed but not its DPI device parameters See Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 for instance parameter numbering Performing Explicit Messages Using Explicit Messaging 6 3 There are five basic events in the Explicit Messaging process The details of each step will vary depending on the type of controller being used
270. icant DL To Net 10 least significant N45 23 DL From Net 10 most significant DL To Net 10 most significant N45 24 DL From Net 11 least significant DL To Net 11 least significant N45 25 DL From Net 11 most significant DL To Net 11 most significant N45 26 DL From Net 12 least significant DL To Net 12 least significant N45 27 DL From Net 12 most significant DL To Net 12 most significant N45 28 DL From Net 13 least significant DL To Net 13 least significant N45 29 DL From Net 13 most significant DL To Net 13 most significant N45 30 DL From Net 14 least significant DL To Net 14 least significant N45 31 DL From Net 14 most significant DL To Net 14 most significant N45 32 DL From Net 15 least significant DL To Net 15 least significant N45 33 DL From Net 15 most significant DL To Net 15 most significant N45 34 DL From Net 16 least significant DL To Net 16 least significant N45 35 DL From Net 16 most significant DL To Net 16 most significant Important If your controller or HMI platform supports CIP messaging use the CIP Parameter object to get and set parameters N File N150 N199 Description These N files let you read and write parameter values in DPI Port 0 the host PowerFlex drive as 32 bit double words You can interpret the data in various ways for example 32 bit real 32 bit integer To read a parameter you need to send a message with two elements For exampl
271. ice Information Pages 0 0 eee eee e eee ee Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE Installing the Adapter e RR e mes rer ees Board Option 20 XCOMM IO OPT1 Understanding the I O Image Drive I O Option Configuring the Adapter to Use the Optional I O Viewing Optional I O Diagnostic Items Specifications Communications i2 ohare Misi atten Say Aten ae bah aera ha ens 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Glossary Index Table of Contents iii Adapter Parameters About Parameter Numbers B 1 Parameter LIst o1 Way waa Ae BAe le eG eu dae B 1 EtherNet IP Objects Identity Object tine Eee e eee rere ree mre pe Nee pete C 2 Assembly Object ore EE rp pa epe ee eme C 3 Register ODJect se tte ut bee utra tut Abs questi das C 4 Parameter ObJeCto ev ER DUE ee I PATET E Hoek eek C 5 Parameter Group 8 C 7 PCCCG Objects shies awe ates CURED ERAS Uu beastie teases C 8 DPIDevice Object e eR RR Gee RE ee dA edge he C 13 DPI Parameter Object our Sasa sabe RET C 16 DPI Fault Obje t iot MR ert ES Ue a
272. in the adapter Refer to Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM on page 3 2 Main Menu 2 Press the or GD key to scroll to Diagnostics 3 Press the Enter key to display the Diagnostics menu in the Parameter adapter Device Select 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Device Items option Device Tom d 3 5 Press the or GD key to scroll through the items Reference Table 7 A Adapter Diagnostic Items No Name Description 1 Logic Cmd The present value of the Common Logic Command being transmitted to the drive by this adapter 2 Prod Logic Cmd The present value of the Product Logic Command being transmitted to the drive by this adapter from the controller 3 Reference The present value of the Reference being transmitted to the drive by this adapter Note that a 16 bit value will be sent as the Most Significant Word of the 32 bit field 4 Logic Sts The present value of the Common Logic Status being received from the drive by this adapter 5 Prod Logic Sts The present value of the Product Logic Status being received from the drive by this adapter to the controller 6 Feedback The present value of the Feedback being received from the drive by this adapter Note that a 16 bit value will be sent as the Most Significant Word of the 32 bit field 7 Datalink A1 In The present value of respective Datalink In being transmitted t
273. ined 3 Get First Device Specific Timer WORD Instance of the first timer that is not predefined 4 Set Time Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Clear all timers Does not clear the real time clock or read only timers 5 Get Number of Supported Time WORD Number of time zones described in the Time Zones Zone List attribute 6 Get Time Zone List STRUCT Identifies a time zone 7 Get Set Active Time Zone ID WORD The ID field of the Time Zone List structure for the desired time zone 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO010E EN P EtherNet IP Objects C 29 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 8 Get Active Time Zone Data STRUCT of INT Standard bias BYTE Standard month BYTE Standard day of week BYTE Standard week BYTE Standard hour BYTE Standard minute BYTE Standard second INT Daylight offset BYTE Daylight month BYTE Daylight day of week BYTE Daylight week BYTE Daylight hour BYTE Daylight minute BYTE Daylight second 9 Get Set Custom Time Zone Data STRUCT of INT Standard bias BYTE Standard month BYTE Standard day of week BYTE Standard week BYTE Standard hour BYTE Standard minute BYTE Standard second INT Daylight offset BYTE Daylight month BYTE Daylight day of week BYTE Daylight week BYTE Daylight hour BYTE Daylight minute BYTE Daylight second Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Read
274. is command bit Peer Cmd Mask 00000000000000 06 Bit 0 B00 If the adapter receives a Logic Command from both a Master device and a Peer device each command bit must have only one source The source of command bits set to 0 will be the Master device The source of command bits set to 1 will be the Peer device 6 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 17 so that changes to Parameter 40 Peer Cmd Mask take effect 7 Set Parameter 46 Peer Inp Timeout to the maximum amount of time the adapter will wait for a message before timing out Important This value must be greater than the product of Parameter 52 Peer Out Time multiplied by Parameter 53 Peer Out Skip in the adapter from which you are receiving I O For example if the value of Parameter 52 Peer Out Time is 2 00 seconds and the value of Parameter 53 Peer Out Skip is 2 see Figure 3 16 then Parameter 46 Peer Inp Timeout needs to have a value greater than 4 00 such as 5 00 see Figure 3 22 Figure 3 22 Example Peer Inp Timeout LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Default 10 00 s 20 COMM E Parameter 46 Peer Inp Timeout F 5 0 01 lt gt 10 00 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 3 14 Configuring the Adapter Setting the Reference Adjustment 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 8 Set Parameter 41 Peer F
275. isible 1 hidden 5 Not a Link Sink 0 May be the sink end of a link 1 May not be the sink end of a link 6 Not Recallable 0 Recallable from NVS 1 Not Recallable from NVS 7 ENUM 0 No ENUM text 1 ENUM text 8 Writable 0 Read only 1 Read write 9 Not Writable When Enabled 0 Writable when enabled e g drive running 1 Not writable when enabled 10 Instance 0 Parameter value is not a Reference to another parameter 1 Parameter value refers to another parameter 11 Uses Bit ENUM Mask This parameter instance supports the Bit ENUM Mask attribute For more information see the definition of the attribute 12 Decimal Place Bit 0 Number of digits to the right of the decimal point 13 Decimal Place Bit 1 0000 0 14 Decimal Place Bit 2 1111 15 15 Decimal Place Bit 3 16 Extended Data Type Bit 4 Bit 16 is the least significant bit 17 Extended Data Type Bit 5 4 mua used as an array of Boolean 18 Extended Data Type Bit 6 010 Reserved y 011 Reserved 100 Reserved 101 Reserved 110 Reserved 111 Reserved 19 Parameter Exists Used to mark parameters that are not available to network tools 20 Not Used Reserved 21 Formula Links Indicates the Formula Data is derived from other parameters 22 Access Level Bit 1 3 bit field used to control access to parameter data 23 Access Level Bit 2 24 Access Level Bit 3 25 Writable ENUM ENUM text 0 Read Only 1 Read Write 26 Not a Link Source 0 May
276. isplay the Run window B In the Run window Open field type cmd and click OK to display the DOS window C On the cA command line type nslookup name of e mail server The entry gt nslookup smtp company com is an example D Press ENTER to display the e mail server IP address Figure 8 6 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 8 8 Viewing the Adapter s Web Pages Figure 8 6 DOS Window Example Showing E mail Server IP Address C WINDOWS system32 cmd exe B x Microsoft Windows XP Version 5 1 2606 lt C gt Copyright 1985 2661 Microsoft Corp C gt nslookup smtp rockwell com Server usmkemult 04 na home ra int com Address 131 200 78 4 The IP address shown in the DOS window for this example 131 200 78 4 should be typed into the E mail Notification Web Page shown in Figure 8 4 3 Click Save changes Important After configuring E mail Notification it is recommended to protect the settings Otherwise the configuration can be changed anytime the web page is accessed with a browser To protect the settings e Series A Adapters Use Parameter 54 Access Control to set E mail Config Bit 1 value to 0 Disabled e Series B Adapters Use Parameter 56 Web Features to set E mail Cfg Bit 0 value to 0 Disabled Figure 8 7 shows an example e mail message automatically sent by the adapter in response to selected events Fig
277. it messaging 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 68 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Scattered Read Request Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 84 or Figure 6 85 to store the request values to be read from these drive parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 003 Output Current e Parameter 007 Output Current e Parameter 006 Output Voltage e Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk e Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage e Parameter 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data e Parameter 017 Analog Ini Value e Parameter 260 Analog InO Value Refer to DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for parameter numbering Figure 6 84 Example Scattered Read Request Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Data File N70 dec Radix Decimal Columns 10 E Radix Decimal Columns 10 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Scattered Read Response Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 6 86 or Figure 6 87 to store the response values that were read from the requested drive parameters Figure 6 86 Example Scattered Re
278. ix 11111 Alternate Man Ref Sel 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Reserved Glossary Adapter Devices such as drives controllers and computers usually require an adapter to provide a communication interface between them and a network such as EtherNet IP An adapter reads data on the network and transmits it to the connected device It also reads data in the device and transmits it to the network The 20 COMM E EtherNet IP adapter connects PowerFlex 7 Class drives to an EtherNet IP network Adapters are sometimes also called cards embedded communication options gateways modules and peripherals 99 66 BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP lets the adapter configure itself dynamically at boot time if the network has a BOOTP server The BOOTP server assigns the adapter a preconfigured IP address a subnet mask and a gateway address therefore you do not have to configure these using the parameters in the adapter BOOTP can make it easier to administer an Ethernet network A free version of Rockwell Software s BOOTP Server can be accessed at http www software rockwell com support download detail cfm ID 3390 Bridge A network device that can route messages from one network to another A bridge also refers to a communications module in a ControlLogix controller that connects the controller to a network See
279. k Some software products for example DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive also use PCCC to communicate Peer to Peer Hierarchy An adapter that is configured for a peer to peer hierarchy can exchange data with a device on the network that is not a scanner This type of hierarchy can be set up so that a scanner configures or transmits data to one PowerFlex 7 Class drive which then sends the same configuration or data to other PowerFlex 7 Class drives on the network To use a peer to peer hierarchy you configure one adapter to transmit data 2 or 4 words and one or more adapters to receive the data Ping A message that is sent by a DPI product to its peripheral devices They use the ping to gather data about the product including whether it can receive messages and whether they can log in for control On EtherNet IP a ping can be used to determine if a node exists PowerFlex 7 Class Architecture Class Drives The Allen Bradley PowerFlex 7 Class family of drives supports DPI and at the time of publication includes the PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 PowerFlex 700H PowerFlex 700S PowerFlex 700L and PowerFlex 7000 PowerFlex 750 Series Architecture Class Drives The Allen Bradley PowerFlex 750 Series of drives supports DPI and at the time of publication includes the PowerFlex 753 and PowerFlex 755 Glossary G 7 Reference Feedback The Reference is used to send a setpoint for example speed frequency torque to the drive It
280. k D1 most significant word Datalink D1 most significant word N41 17 Datalink D2 least significant word Datalink D2 least significant word N41 18 Datalink D2 most significant word Datalink D2 most significant word N42 This N file lets you read and write some values configuring the port N42 3 Time out read write Time in seconds allowed between messages to the N41 file If the adapter does not receive a message in the specified time it performs the fault action configured in its Comm Fit Action parameter A valid setting is between 1 and 32767 seconds 5 20 seconds is recommended N42 7 Adapter Port Number read only DPI port on the drive to which the adapter is connected N42 8 Peer Adapters read only Bit field of devices having DPI Peer capabilities EtherNet IP Objects C 11 N45 This N file lets you read and write control I O messages You can write control I O messages only when all of the following conditions are true e The adapter is not receiving I O from a scanner For example there is no scanner on the network the scanner is in idle program mode the scanner is faulted or the adapter is not mapped to the scanner e The adapter is not receiving Peer I O from another adapter e The value of N42 3 is set to a non zero value Write Read N45 0 Logic Command least significant Logic Status least significant N45 1 Logic Command most significant Logic Status most significant N45 2 Refer
281. k D1 In will show the status of the outputs as a combined decimal value For example a 0 decimal 00 binary indicates both outputs are off and a 3 decimal 11 binary indicates both outputs are on NOTE A status bit is not used for outputs Diagnostic item 21 Datalink D1 Out will show the status of the inputs as a combined decimal value including the status bit 15 For example Figure 9 6 shows inputs that are valid and all on and Figure 9 7 shows inputs that are valid and all off zero Figure 9 6 Valid Inputs All On Datalink Out D1 Word Bit 1514131211109 876543210 32831 decimal 110100 00 0 0111111111111 Status N6 MNI Figure 9 7 Valid Inputs All Off Datalink Out D1 Word Bit 1514131211109 87654 32 1 0 32768 decimal 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Status MN Appendix A Specifications Appendix A presents the specifications for the adapter Topic Page Communications A1 Electrical 1 Mechanical A2 Environmental A 2 Regulatory Compliance 2 Communications Network Protocol EtherNet IP Data Rates 10 Mbps Full Duplex 10 Mbps Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex Connection Limits 30 TCP connections 16 simultaneous CIP connections including 1 exclusive owner I O connection The following activities use a CIP connection
282. k is a type of pointer used by PowerFlex 7 Class drives to transfer data to and from the controller Datalinks allow specified parameters to be read or written to without using explicit messages When enabled each Datalink consumes either four bytes or eight bytes in both the input and output image table of the controller The drive determines the size of Datalinks DPI Drive Peripheral Interface A second generation peripheral communication interface used by various Allen Bradley drives and power products such as PowerFlex 7 Class drives It is a functional enhancement to SCANport DPI Peripheral A device that provides an interface between DPI and a network or user Peripheral devices are also referred to as adapters or modules The 20 COMM E adapter 1203 USB 1203 SSS converter and PowerFlex 7 Class HIMs 20 HIM xxx are examples of DPI peripherals DPI Product A device that uses the DPI communications interface to communicate with one or more peripheral devices For example a motor drive such as a PowerFlex 7 Class drive is a DPI product In this manual a DPI product is also referred to as drive or host DriveExplorer Software A tool for monitoring and configuring Allen Bradley products and adapters It can be run on computers running various Microsoft Windows operating systems DriveExplorer version 3 xx or higher can be used to configure this adapter and PowerFlex drives Information about DriveEx
283. l Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 65 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Set Attribute Single Request Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 80 to store the request value 10 0 sec that was written to drive parameter 140 Accel Time 1 To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling refer to the specific drive documentation Figure 6 80 Example Set Attribute Single Request Data File Data File N50 dec Radix Decimal Za Symbol Columns 10 Desc N50 Properties Usage Help Figure 6 81 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for write messages in the MicroLogix 1100 1400 Figure 6 81 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Sets For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point sF8 4 Parameters N50 0 PowerFlex 700S 2 and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 66 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service A Custom scattered read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters This
284. l Notification D Home EN Send an e mail message when a fault trip is declared on the DPI host drive Configure e mail n OFor any fault Zi Browse DPI device OOnly for selected faults Online user manu Send an e mail message when a fault on the drive is deared Software tools We Launch my DriveE Send an e mail message when an alarm is declared on the DPI host drive f Launch my DriveE OFor any alarm O E mail technical s OOnly for selected alarms O Send an e mail message when an alarm on the drive is deared O Send an e mail message when the 20 COMM E takes its communication fault action O Send an e mail message when the 20 COMM E takes its idle fault action IP address of mail SMTP server 0 At 0 Jo E mail addresses to notify 80 char max Subject of e mail message 50 char max Save Changes Copyright 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved E mail configuration for Series A adapters is enabled and disabled differently than Series B adapters e Series A adapters version 2 003 or earlier By default settings are protected and the user needs to enable configuration by using Parameter 54 Access Control to set the E mail Config Bit 1 value to 1 Enabled After configuration settings can be protected by changing the E mail Config Bit 1 value back to 0 Disabled e Series B adapters version 3 xxx or later By default settings are not protect
285. ld be set to 2 When the parameter being read is a 32 bit REAL floating point data type the size in bytes would be set to 4 See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 56 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Read Single Response Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 68 to store the response value 0 13 amps that was read from drive parameter 003 Output Current To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling refer to the specific drive documentation Figure 6 68 Example Read Single Response Data File Data File N40 dec Radix Decimal pa Symbol Columns 10 Desc Usage Help Figure 6 69 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for read messages in the MicroLogix 1100 1400 Figure 6 69 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Reads For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S Drives Using Explicit Messaging 6 57 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single
286. link A1 Out will contain the least significant word LSW and Datalink A2 Out will contain the most significant word MSW 32 bit data is stored in binary as follows MSW 2 through 2 LSW 215 through 29 In this example the Parameter 10 Elapsed Run Time value of 6553 9 Hrs is read as 6553 9 in Datalink A1 Out Parameter 310 and Datalink A2 Out Parameter 311 Datalink Parameter Data Hex A1 Out LSW 10 0003 A2 Out MSW 10 0001 Conversion Example Parameter 010 Elapsed Run Time 6553 9 Hrs MSW 0001 0001 inary 216 65536 LSW 00034 3 Engineering Value 65536 3 65539 Parameter 10 Displayed Value 6553 9 Hrs Example Ladder Logic Program Information Using the I O 5 9 Regardless of the Datalink combination Datalink x1 Out will always contain the LSW and Datalink x2 Out will always contain the MSW In the following example the PowerFlex 70 drive Parameter 242 Power Up Marker contains a value of 88 4541 hours Datalink Parameter Data Hex A20ut MSW 242 000D B1 Out LSW 242 7F3D Conversion Example Parameter 242 Power Up Marker 88 4541 hours MSW 000Dhex 1101 binary 219 219 216 851968 LSW 7 32573 Engineering Value 851968 32573 884541 Parameter 242 Displayed Value 88 4541 Hrs The example ladder logic programs in the sections of this chapter are intended for and operate PowerFlex 7 Class drives Fu
287. link Out D2 MSW 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Using Logic Command Status Using Reference Feedback Using the I O 5 5 Table 5 F PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 I O Image for PowerFlex 700S 750 Series Drives 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Logic Status 1 Reference LSW 1 Feedback LSW 2 Reference MSW 2 Feedback MSW 3 Datalink In A1 LSW 3 Datalink Out A1 LSW 4 Datalink In A1 MSW 4 Datalink Out A1 MSW 5 Datalink In A2 LSW 5 Datalink Out A2 LSW 6 Datalink In A2 MSW 6 Datalink Out A2 MSW 7 Datalink In B1 LSW 7 Datalink Out B1 LSW 8 Datalink In B1 MSW 8 Datalink Out B1 MSW 9 Datalink In B2 LSW 9 Datalink Out B2 LSW 10 _ Datalink In B2 MSW 10 Datalink Out B2 MSW 11 Datalink In C1 LSW 11 Datalink Out C1 LSW 12 Datalink In C1 MSW 12 Datalink Out C1 MSW 13 Datalink In C2 LSW 13 Datalink Out C2 LSW 14 Datalink In C2 MSW 14 Datalink Out C2 MSW 15 Datalink In D1 LSW 15 Datalink Out D1 LSW 16 Datalink In D1 MSW 16 Datalink Out D1 MSW 17 Datalink In D2 LSW 17 Datalink Out D2 LSW 18 Datalink In D2 MSW 18 Datalink Out D2 MSW The Logic Command is a 16 bit word of control data produced by the scanner and co
288. ll appear to Module further configure the bridge after clicking OK When unchecked the bridge s New Properties Module screen will close after clicking OK For this example uncheck this box 6 Click OK The bridge is now configured for the EtherNet IP network and added to the RSLogix 5000 project It appears in the I O Configuration folder In our example a 1756 ENBT bridge appears under the I O Configuration folder Figure 4 6 with its assigned name For convenience keep the project open Later in this chapter the project will need to be downloaded to the controller Figure 4 6 RSLogix 5000 I O Configuration Folder 7 5 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 A7 fa 0 1756 163 v16 Example using 20COMME 5 5 1756 ENBT A My_EtherNet_IP_Bridge x Ethernet There are three ways to add the adapter into the I O configuration e Drive Add On Profiles RSLogix 5000 version 16 or later e Classic Profile RSLogix 5000 versions 13 15 e Generic Profile RSLogix 5000 all versions These are described in separate sections below If your version of RSLogix 5000 supports Add On Profiles we highly recommend using this method Configuring the I O 4 5 Using RSLogix 5000 Drive Add On Profiles version 16 or later When compared to using the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile versions 13 15 or Generic Profile all versions the RSLogix 5000 Drive Add On Profiles provide these advantages Profiles for specific
289. lt Action to the action that the adapter will take if it times out ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists A Parameter 41 Peer Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if peer communications are disrupted By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a hazard of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable Figure 3 23 Example Peer Fit Action LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM E 0 Fault Default Parameter 41 1 Stop Peer Fit Action 2 Zero Data Fault 3 Hold Last 4 Send Fit Cfg For more details see Setting a Fault Action on page 3 15 9 Set Parameter 47 Peer Enable to 1 On The adapter is now configured to receive Peer I O from the specified node Ensure that the specified node is configured to transmit Peer I O A Reference Adjustment is a percent scaling factor for the Reference from the network It can be set from 0 00 to 200 0046 to allow the drive s Reference to either match the network Reference 100 0046 scale below the network Reference lt 100 0046 or scale above the network Reference gt 100 0096 ATTENTION To guard against equipm
290. mer supplied parameter name 16 Get Parameter Processing Error BYTE 0 No error 1 Value is less than the minimum 2 Value is greater than the maximum 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 32 EtherNet IP Objects Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 18 Get International DPI Offline Parameter Text Struct of STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International offline units 19 Get International DPI Online Parameter Text Struct of STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International online units 20 Get International DPI Online Read Full Struct of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Online minimum value CONTAINER Online maximum value CONTAINER Online default value WORD Next WORD Previous WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset BYTE 3 Link BYTE Pad word always zero BOOL 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International online parameter units 21 Get DPI Extended Descriptor UDINT Extended Descriptor see page C 34 22 Get International DPI Offline Read Full Struct of BOOL Descriptor CONTAINER Offline minimum value CONTAINER Offline maximum value CONTAINER Offline default value WORD Online minimum parameter instance WORD Online maximum parameter instance WORD Online default parameter instance WORD Multiplier parameter instance WORD Divisor parameter ins
291. meter being written to is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size Maximum length is 132 bytes or 66 words which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 15 ControlLogix Example Scattered Write Request Data In this message example we use the data structure in Figure 6 15 or Figure 6 18 in the source tag Scattered Write Request to write new values to these parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Write Value PowerFlex 750 Series Write Value Data Drive Parameter Drive Parameter Type 141 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 536 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec REAL 143 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 538 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec REAL 105 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 725 Zero Position 33 DINT 106 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 21555 Port 5 Analog InO Hi 55 REAL 107 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz 780 PTP Setpoint 75 555 REAL Refer to DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for parameter numbering Figure 6 15 or Figure 6 18 shows the parameter values Figure 6 15 Example Scattered Write Request Data for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive DataType Description E Scattered Write Request INT 15 Parame
292. n page 3 6 for details Important New settings for some adapter parameters for example Parameters 04 IP Addr Cfg 1 through 07 IP Addr Cfg 4 are recognized only when power is applied to the adapter or it is reset After you change parameter settings cycle power or reset the adapter Chapter 3 Configuring the Adapter This chapter provides instructions and information for setting the parameters in the adapter Topic Page Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM 3 2 Using 3 3 Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address 3 6 Setting the Data Rate 3 8 Setting the I O Configuration 3 8 Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer 3 9 Setting the Reference Adjustment 3 14 Setting a Fault Action 3 15 Setting Web Access Control 3 16 Resetting the Adapter 3 17 Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters 3 18 Flash Updating the Adapter 3 18 For a list of parameters refer to Appendix B Adapter Parameters For definitions of terms in this chapter refer to the Glossary Configuration Tools The adapter stores parameters and other information in its own non volatile memory You must therefore access the adapter to view and edit its parameters The following tools can be used to access the adapter parameters Tool Refer to PowerFlex 7 Class HIM page 3 2 BOOTP Server page 3 3 DriveExplorer Software http Awww ab com drives drive
293. n ks My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 6 INT Datalink Qut B1 My_PowerFlex_Drive Data INT Datalink Qut B2 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 8 INT Datalink Qut C1 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 3 INT Datalink Qut C2 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 10 INT Datalink Qut D1 My _PowerFlex_Drive Data 11 INT Datalink Out D2 My_PowerFlex_Drive l AB ETHER PowerFlex Drive l Data INT 22 Input Image My PowerFlex Drive l Data 0 INT Pad Word My PowerFlex Drive l Data 1 INT Pad Word My PowerFlex Drive l Data 2 INT Lagic Status My PowerFlex Drive l Data 3 INT Not Used My PowerFlex Drive l Data 4 INT FeedBack LSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 5 INT Feedback MSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 5 INT Datalink Qut 41 LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive Data INT Datalink Qut 41 MSW PowerFlex 750 Series Drive My PowerFlex Drive l Data 8 INT Datalink Out 42 LSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 3 INT Datalink Out 42 MSw 32 bit Speed Feedback and My PowerFlex Drive l Data 10 INT Datalink Qut B1 LSW Datalinks My PowerFlex Drive l Data 11 INT Datalink Out B1 MSW My PowerFlex Drivel Data 12 Datalink Out B2 LSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 13 INT Datalink Qut B2 MSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 14 INT Datalink Qut C1 LSW My PowerFlex Drivel Data 15 Datalink Qut C1 MSW My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 16 Datalink Qut C2 LSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 17 INT Datalink Out C2 MSW My PowerFlex Drivel
294. nce MSW N20 23 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 651 DPI Data In A1 LSW N20 24 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 651 DPI Data In A1 MSW N20 25 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 652 DPI Data In A2 LSW N20 26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 652 DPI Data In A2 MSW N20 27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 653 DPI Data In B1 LSW N20 28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 653 DPI Data In B1 MSW N20 29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 654 DPI Data In B2 LSW N20 30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 654 DPI Data In B2 MSW N20 31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 655 DPI Data In C1 LSW N20 32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 655 DPI Data In C1 MSW N20 33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 656 DPI Data In C2 LSW N20 34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 656 DPI Data In C2 MSW N20 35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 657 DPI Data In D1 LSW N20 36 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 657 DPI Data In D1 MSW N20 37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 658 DPI Data In D2 LSW N20 38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 658 DPI Data In D2 MSW 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 24 Using the I O Table 5 K Controller Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives
295. nctions of the Example Programs The example programs enable you to e Receive Logic Status information from the drive e Send a Logic Command to control the drive for example start stop e Send a Reference to the drive and receive Feedback from the drive e Send receive Datalink data to from the drive Logic Command Status Words These examples use the Logic Command word and Logic Status word for PowerFlex 70 700 drives Information for PowerFlex 750 Series drives has been added to the examples where applicable Refer to Appendix D to view details The definition of the bits in these words may vary if you are using a different DPI drive Refer to the documentation for your drive 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 10 Using the I O ControlLogix Example 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Drive Add On Profiles version 16 or later Since the drive Add On Profile automatically created descriptive controller tags Figure 4 12 for the entire I O image in Chapter 4 you can use these tags to directly control and monitor the drive without creating any ladder logic program However if you intend to use Human Machine Interface devices PanelView etc to operate the drive and view its status you will need to create descriptive user defined Program tags Figure 5 1 and a ladder logic program that will pass the Co
296. nected peripherals This enables direct access to any parameter The other available N40 N File to use for explicit messaging requires considerably more configuration to achieve the same result Every read or write message using the N40 N Files requires configuring a request message inputing data into the request data table configuring a response message and inputing data into the response data table However if accessing items other than parameters for example drive faults or events the N40 N Files must be used since only parameters can be accessed using the N150 N Files Important When performing a write parameter message the data will always be written to the drive s Non Volatile Storage NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction For PCCC N150 N File information refer to page C 11 PLC 5 Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A read message is used to read a single parameter The specific N150 6 address shown in this read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Footnote 2 under the Figure 6 27 table shows other N file addressing to read various integer and REAL floating point parameters in PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives Figure 6 26 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter MSG Read Write Message CEN Control MG13 0 lt DN Setup Screen CER2
297. ngle 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single 0x4B No Yes Get_Enum_String Instances The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the DPI drive The adapter parameters are appended to the list of drive parameters The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instance Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Drive Parameter 1 Attributes n Last Drive Parameter n Attributes 7 n 1 Adapter Parameter 1 Attributes n m Last Adapter Parameter m Attributes 2 n represents the number of parameters in the drive m represents the number of parameters in the adapter Class Attributes Access Rule Get Name Revision Data Type WORD Description 1 2 Get Max Instance WORD Number of parameters 8 Get Parameter Class Descriptor WORD 0 False 1 True Bit 0 Supports parameter instances Bit 1 Supports full attributes Bit 2 Must do NVS save command Bit 3 Parameters are stored in NVS Get Configuration Assembly Instance WORD 0 Set Native Language BYTE 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 3 Italian 4 German 5 Japanese 6 Portuguese 7 Mandarin Chinese 8 Russian 9 Dutch 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 6 EtherNet IP Objects Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access R
298. nition G 3 selecting 3 8 E EDS Electronic Data Sheet files definition web site G 3 EEPROM see Non Volatile Storage NVS EN Rate Act parameter B 2 EN Rate Cfg parameter B 2 environmental specifications A 2 equipment required 1 3 Ethernet cable 2 6 connector on adapter 1 1 switch 2 6 Ethernet Link object C 37 EtherNet IP data rates A 1 example network for ControlLogix controller 4 2 MicroLogix 1100 controller 4 38 PLC 5 controller 4 22 SLC 500 controller 4 30 network definition G 3 objects list of C 1 to C 38 specification G 3 events clearing viewing 7 6 list of 7 7 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO010E EN P explicit messaging about 6 2 configuring for ControlLogix controller 6 4 MicroLogix 1100 controller 6 53 PLC 5 controller 6 23 SLC 500 controller 6 29 definition G 3 performing 6 3 F fault action configuring the adapter for 3 15 definition G 3 fault configuration configuring the adapter for 3 16 definition G 3 faults see events features 1 2 firmware release P 3 flash update definition G 4 guidelines 3 18 Fit Cfg A1 D2 In parameters B 4 Fit Cfg Logic parameter B 4 Fit Cfg Ref parameter B 4 full duplex see duplex G gateway G 4 gateway address setting with BOOTP 3 3 setting with parameters 3 6 Gateway Cfg 1 4 parameters B 2 grounding the adapter 2 5 H half duplex see duplex hardware address definition G 4
299. nsumed by the adapter The Logic Status is a 16 bit word of status data produced by the adapter and consumed by the scanner PowerFlex 750 Series drives have a 32 bit Logic Command Status but when using a 20 COMM E adapter only the first 16 bits can be used This manual contains the bit definitions for most compatible products available at the time of publication in Appendix D Logic Command Status Words For other products refer to their documentation The Reference is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter The Feedback is produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller The size of the Reference Feedback is determined by the drive and displayed using adapter Parameter 18 Ref Fdbk Size Size Valid Values 16 bit 32768 to 32767 32 bit 2147483648 to 2147483647 When the Reference and Feedback are enabled and a ControlLogix controller with a drive Add On Profile or Classic Profile is used specific controller tags are automatically created sized 16 bit or 32 bit and placed in the I O image 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 6 Using the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P PowerFlex 7 Class Drives except PowerFlex 750 Series The Reference value is a scaled engineering value it is NOT in Hertz or RPM The Reference uses a 32767 scale The 32767 endpoint of the scale is equal to the value of parameter
300. nt My_EtherNet_IP_Bridge Name My PowerFlex 70 EC Dive Description Comm Format Data INT d Address Host Name IP Address 10 81 7 Host Name Open Module Properties Connection Parameters Assembly Instance Input 1 H Output 2 H Configuration 6 0 E 8 bit 100 79 Cancel Help 3 Editthe following information about the drive adapter Box Setting Name A name to identify the drive and adapter Description Optional description of the drive adapter Comm Format _ Data INT This setting formats the data in 16 bit words IP Address The IP address of the adapter Open Module When this box is checked the drive s New Module screen will close when Properties clicking OK When unchecked additional module properties screens will appear to further configure the drive adapter when OK is clicked For this example check this box Configuring the I O 4 17 Under Connection Parameters edit the following Box Assembly Instance Size Input 1 This value is The value will vary based on your application setting of required Parameters 23 DPI I O Cfg and 36 M S Output and the size 16 bit or 32 bit of the Reference Feedback and Datalinks in the drive Refer to Table 4 A Table 4 B or Table 4 C on page 4 17 Output 2 This value is The value will vary based on your application setting of required Parameters
301. nt of view 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Therefore output I O is data that is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter Input I O is status data that is produced by the adapter and consumed as input by the controller The I O image will vary based on e Size either 16 bit or 32 bit of the Reference Feedback words and Datalink words used by the drive To determine the size of the Reference Feedback and Datalinks view adapter Parameters 18 Ref Fdbk Size and 19 Datalink Size For information to access parameters see Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM on page 3 2 e Configuration of I O Parameter 23 DPI I O Cfg If all I O is not enabled the image is truncated The image always uses consecutive words starting at word 0 e ControlLogix CompactLogix Controllers only The drive profile used in RSLogix 5000 drive Add On Profile in version 16 or later Classic Profile in versions 13 15 or Generic Profile in all versions ControlLogix Controller Image Since the drive Add On Profile in RSLogix 5000 version 16 or later and the Classic Profile versions 13 15 provide descriptive controller tags the I O image tag size and location is automatically configured based on the drive being used When using the Generic Profile page 4 15 in RSLogix 5000 however controller tags are not descriptive or defined The ControlLogix controller I O image changes depending
302. ntroller data table address containing the control timeout value to be written Size in Elements 2 1 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout 5 Message timeout duration in seconds Data Table Address 9 N42 3 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive Routing Information File RI9 0 An unused routing information file for the controller MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 G Table 5 J starting on page 5 20 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 19 3 For details on setting the control timeout value and its function see N Files on page C 10 The Control Timeout N42 3 is stored in RAM If the 20 COMM E adapter is power cycled the Control Timeout Message must be re sent If the Control Timeout is not changed from a non zero value the control message page 4 44 will error out gt TIP The Control Timeout N42 3 must be changed to a non zero value 5 20 seconds recommended If the Control Timeout is not changed from a non zero value the control message page 4 44 will error out The Control Timeout is stored in RAM If the adapte
303. ntroller tag data to the Program tags Figure 5 1 ControlLogix Program Tags for Drive Add On Profile Ladder Logic Program Example iEn Command Faults _ Decma BOOL Command Forward Reverse Decimal BOOL Command Decimal BODL Command Start Decimal BOOL Command_Stop Decimal BOOL mi Speed Feedback Decimal DINT _ Speed_Reference Decimal DINT Status Active Decimal BOOL Status At Speed Decimal BOOL Status_Faulted Decimal BOOL Status_Forward Decimal BOOL Status_Ready Decimal BOOL _ Status_Reverse Decimal BOOL An example ladder logic program that uses the automatically created descriptive Controller tags and passes their data to the user defined Program tags is shown in Figure 5 2 and Figure 5 3 Note that the prefix for the drive Controller tags is determined by the name assigned when configuring the I O Chapter 4 For information on speed Reference and Feedback scaling see PowerFlex 7 Class Drives except PowerFlex 750 Series on page 5 6 or PowerFlex 750 Series Drives on page 5 7 Figure 5 2 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Add On Profile for Logic Status Feedback My PowerF lex Drive I DriveStatus Ready Status Ready JE PowerFlex D rive I DriveStatus Active Status Active FE lt My PowerFlex Drive l DriveStatus ActualDir Status Forward JE My PowerFlex Drive l DriveStatus_ActualDir Status_Reverse WE My P
304. nual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Table 5 1 Controller Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase Control Data Table Address Description N20 1 Logic Status see Appendix D N20 2 Speed Feedback LSW N20 3 Speed Feedback MSW N20 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 724 725 Data Out A1 LSW N20 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 724 725 Data Out A1 MSW N20 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 726 727 Data Out A2 LSW N20 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 726 727 Data Out A2 MSW N20 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 728 729 Data Out B1 LSW N20 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 728 729 Data Out B1 MSW N20 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 730 731 Data Out B2 LSW N20 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 730 731 Data Out B2 MSW N20 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 732 733 Data Out C1 LSW N20 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 732 733 Data Out C1 MSW N20 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 734 735 Data Out C2 LSW N20 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 734 735 Data Out C2 MSW N20 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 736 737 Data Out D1 LSW N20 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 736 737 Data Out D1 MSW N20 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 738 739 Data Out D2 LSW N20 19 V
305. nused element of the data file chosen for xx for example N12 0 Then press Enter 2 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC Nxx n DN NXB XIC Nxx n ER BND OTU Nxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example N12 0 for the message created in Step 1 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for and for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter 3 In the MSG instruction double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 39 Figure 4 38 SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command Reference and Datalink In MSG Read Write Message CEN2 34 Type Peer To Peer Read Write Write CDN gt Target Device 500CPU Local Remote Local ER2 Control Block N12 0 Control Block Length 51 Setup Screen N12 0 N12 0 lE CU DN EN N12 0 ER 4 Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen General Tab Box This Controller Configuring the I O 4 37 Figure 4 39 SLC 500 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Command Reference and Datalink In 4 MSG Rung 2 4 N12 0 ultiHop This Controller Communication Command Data Table Address Size in Elements 19 Channel 1 Control Bits Ignore if timed
306. o the drive by this adapter If not 8 Datalink A2 In using a Datalink this parameter should have a value of zero 9 Datalink B1 In 10 Datalink B2 In 11 Datalink C1 In 12 Datalink C2 In 13 Datalink D1 In 14 Datalink D2 In 15 Datalink A1 Out The present value of respective Datalink Out being received from the drive by this adapter If the 16 Datalink A2 Out drive indicates a 16 bit datalink size the value appears in the least significant 16 bits of this 17 Datalink B1 Out diagnostic item and the most significant 16 bits of this diagnostic item are zero 18 Datalink B2 Out 19 Datalink C1 Out 20 Datalink C2 Out 21 Datalink D1 Out 22 Datalink D2 Out 23 DPI Rx Errors The present value of the DPI Receive error counter 24 DPI Rx Error Max The maximum value since reset of the DPI Receive error counter 25 DPI Tx Errors The present value of the DPI Transmit error counter 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2070MM UMO10E EN P Troubleshooting 7 5 Table 7 A Adapter Diagnostic Items Continued No Name Description 26 DPI Tx Error Max The maximum value since reset of the DPI Transmit error counter 27 Boot Flash Count Number of times the boot firmware in the adapter has been flash updated 28 App Flash Count Number of times the application firmware in the adapter has been flash updated 29 M S Input Size Size
307. ock N13 0 CDN5 Control Block Length 58 lt ER Setup Screen lt Using Explicit Messaging 6 31 SLC 500 Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service Figure 6 35 Read Parameter Message Configuration Screens EEM N13 0 58 Elements i3 EEM N13 0 MultiHo This Controller Size in Words Receive Data Data Table Address Receive Data Target Device Service Error Descripli No errors General Ins Add Hop Send Data Receive Data Del Remove Hop From Device To Address To Address Type This SLCS00 58 Elements p Send Data Receive Data Channel 1 2 From Port 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 73 DER Message Control Bits Ignore if timed out 0 Awaiting Execution EW Send Data IN40 0 Send Data Continuous Run CO Message Timeout x1 sec Read Parameter Service Code hex Error ERE Done DN Transmitting ST Enabled EN Waiting for Queue Space emi E MultiHop Class hex 15 Error Instance hex 3 3 Attribute hex 1 1 Error Code hex ion The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a me
308. ockwellautomation com To order paper copies of technical 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P P 2 About This Manual Rockwell Automation Support 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative To find your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative visit www rockwellautomation com locations For information such as firmware updates or answers to drive related questions go to the Drives Service amp Support web site at www ab com support abdrives and click on the Downloads or Knowledgebase link Rockwell Automation Inc offers support services worldwide with over 75 sales support offices over 500 authorized distributors and over 250 authorized systems integrators located through the United States alone In addition Rockwell Automation Inc representatives are in every major country in the world Local Product Support Contact your local Rockwell Automation Inc representative for e Sales and order support Product technical training e Warranty support e Support service agreements Technical Product Assistance For technical assistance please review the information in Chapter 7 Troubleshooting first If you still have problems then access the Allen Bradley Technical Support web site at www ab com support abdrives or contac
309. of data transferred from the network to the drive 30 M S Output Size Size of data transferred from the drive to the network 31 HW Adar 1 Decimal value of each byte in the adapter s Ethernet hardware address 32 HW Addr 2 255 255 255 255 255 255 33 HW Addr 3 Em ain 36 HW Addr 6 HW Addr 2 HW 3 HW 4 HW Addr 5 HW 6 37 IP Addr Act 1 Value of each byte in the adapter s present IP address A value of 0 appears if the adapter does 38 IP Addr Act 2 not currently have an IP address 39 P Addr Act 3 40 IP Addr Act 4 ia IP Addr Act 1 IP Addr Act 2 IP Act 3 IP Addr Act 4 41 Subnet Act 1 Value of each byte in the adapter s present subnet mask A value of 0 appears if the adapter 42 Subnet Act 2 does not currently have a subnet mask m 255 255 255 255 Subnet Act 1 Subnet Act 2 Subnet Act 3 Subnet Act 4 45 Gateway Act 1 Value of each byte in the adapter s present gateway address A value of 0 appears if the 46 Gateway Act 2 adapter does not currently have a gateway address Cin Re 255 255 255 255 Gateway Act 1 Gateway Act 2 Gateway Act 3 Gateway Act 4 49 EN Rx Overruns Number of receive buffer overruns reported by the Ethernet hardware 50 EN Rx Packets Number of Ethernet packets that the adapter has received 51 EN Rx Errors Number of receive errors reported by the Ethernet hardware 52 EN Tx Packets Number of Ethernet packets that the
310. ognize and transmit I O to the adapter See Chapter 4 Configuring the I O Setting the Adapter to Transmit Peer to Peer Data Drive to Drive Communication 1 Verify that Parameter 51 Peer Out Enable is set to 0 Off This parameter must be Off while you configure peer output parameters Figure 3 13 Example Peer Out Enable LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Value Setting 20 COMM E 0 Off Default Parameter 51 1 On Peer Out Enable Off 2 Set Parameter 49 Peer A Output to select the source of the data to output to the network Figure 3 14 Example Peer A Output LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM E 0 Off Default Parameter 49 1 Logic Command Reference Peer A Output 2 5 Datalink A B C or D Input 6 1 H 5 9 Datalink A B C or D Output _ 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Configuring the Adapter 3 11 3 If desired set Parameter 50 Peer B Output to select an additional source of the data to output to the network Figure 3 15 Example Peer B Output LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM E 0 Off Default Parameter 50 1 Logic Command Reference Peer B x 2 5 Datalink A B C or D Input DL A Input 6 9 Datalink A B C or D Output 4 Set Parameters 52 Peer Out Time and 53 Peer Out Skip to establish the minimum and maximum intervals
311. ols We Launch my DriveE 1 Launch my DriveE O E mail technical s Rockwel Automation Port 0 Module Information Product Text PowerFlex 70 EC 240V 4 2A Vendor ID 1 Device Type 123 Product Code 0x0032 Revision 3 002 Serial Number Not Available Status Stopped Copyright 2005 Rockwell Automation Inc All Rights Reserved Information Description Product Text Text identifying the device Vendor ID 1 Allen Bradley Device Type 123 Product Code Code for the product name and its rating Revision Firmware revision used by the device Serial Number Serial number of the device Status Operating status of the device for example faulted 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 8 10 Viewing the Adapter s Web Pages Figure 8 9 Example of Port 0 PowerFlex 70 Drive Diagnostic Items Page Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools 5 Serm L ID URKO http 10 91 100 79 OMM E EtherNet IP Adapter M UNE Minimize Port 0 Diagnostic Items Home Process display Item no Description TCP IP configurati DPF Eror SEE 3 Configure e mail n amp Browse DPI device Heatsink Temp Port 0 PowerFle Active Cur Limit E messes Active PWM Freq D Fault queue Life MegaWatt Hr D Alarm queue Life Run Time gt SE 2 li and Life Pwr Up Time Ca Port 3
312. ommand Parameter This parameter commands the drive to take an action such as Reset Defaults or Autotune and then returns to a value of zero Offline software tools will not allow setting this parameter to anything other than a value of zero If an offline file contains a Command Parameter with a non zero value the offline software tool will change the value to zero Note that command parameters cannot have values that do not return to zero 28 Current Value Is Default This bit identifies a parameter that will not change if a Reset Defaults is commanded For example if a drive contains a Language parameter that is set to German setting defaults will leave the parameter set to German Likewise if the parameter is set to French setting defaults will leave the parameter set to French 29 Use Zero Text If the Disallow Zero bit is set this bit must be cleared If the Disallow Zero bit is cleared then 0 Use Disabled Text parameter class attribute 1 Use Zero Text parameter instance attribute 30 31 Reserved Reserved Formulas for Converting Display Value Internal Value Offset x Multiplier x Base Divisor x 10 Decimal Places Internal Value Display Value x Divisor x 10Decima Places Multiplier x Base Offset Common Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute
313. on 20COMM UM010E EN P 3 6 Configuring the Adapter Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P By default the adapter is configured so that you set its IP address subnet mask and gateway address using a BOOTP server If you want to set these attributes using the adapter parameters instead you must disable BOOTP and then set the appropriate parameters in the adapter Disabling the BOOTP Feature 1 Set the value of Parameter 03 BOOTP to 0 Disabled Figure 3 5 Example BOOTP LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Value Setting 20 COMM E 0 Disabled Parameter 03 1 Enabled Default BOOTP Disabled Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 17 After disabling the BOOTP feature you can then configure the IP address subnet mask and gateway address using adapter parameters Setting an IP Address Using Parameters 1 Verify that Parameter 03 BOOTP is set to 0 Disabled This parameter must be set to Disabled to configure the IP address using the adapter parameters Set the value of Parameters 04 IP Addr Cfg 1 through 07 IP Addr Cfg 4 to a unique IP address Figure 3 6 Example IP Addr Cfg 1 LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Default 0 0 0 0 P 255 255 255 20 COMM E IP Addr Cfg 1 Parameter 04 IP Addr Cfg 2 IP Addr Cfg 1 IP Addr Cfg 3 0 lt 255 IP Addr Cfg 4
314. on the size of the drive s Reference Feedback and Datalinks Table 5 A Table 5 B and Table 5 C show the I O image when using various PowerFlex 7 Class drives and all Datalinks enabled Table 5 A ControlLogix I O Image for PowerFlex 70 700 700H Drives and SMC Flex 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks Using Generic Profile Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Pad Word 1 Reference 1 Pad Word 2 Datalink In A1 2 Logic Status 3 Datalink In A2 3 Feedback 4 Datalink In B1 4 Datalink Out A1 5 Datalink In B2 5 Datalink Out A2 6 Datalink In C1 6 Datalink Out B1 7 Datalink In C2 7 Datalink Out B2 8 Datalink In D1 8 Datalink Out C1 9 Datalink In D2 9 Datalink Out C2 10 Datalink Out D1 11 Datalink Out D2 Using the I O 5 3 Table 5 B ControlLogix I O Image for PowerFlex 700 VC Drives 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks Using Generic Profile Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Pad Word 1 Reference 1 Pad Word 2 Datalink In A1 LSW 2 Logic Status 3 Datalink In A1 MSW 3 Feedback 4 Datalink In A2 LSW 4 Datalink Out A1 LSW 5 Datalink In A2 MSW 5 Datalink Out A1 MSW 6 Datalink In B1 LSW 6 Datalink Out A2 LSW 7 Datalink In B1 MSW 7 Datalink Out A2 MSW 8 Datalink In B2 LSW 8 Datalink Out B1 LSW
315. ontrol Block N11 0 Control Block Length 51 Setup Screen N11 0 N11 0 dE U4 at E ee DN EN N11 0 ST ss ER 4 Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P General Tab Box This Controller Configuring the I O 4 35 Figure 4 37 SLC 500 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Status Feedback and Datalink Out 3 MSG Rung 2 2 N11 0 MultiHop This Controller Communication Command 500CPU Read Data Table Address N20 1 Size in Elements 19 Channel Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO To be retried NR Awaiting Execution EW Continuous Run C0 Error ER Message done DN 1 Target Device Message Timeout 5 Data Table Address N41 0 Local MultHop Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Waiting for Queue Space ere Local Remote 3 MSG Rung 42 2 N11 0 DoR Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This Processor 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 79 Setting Communication Command This setting is unavailable grayed out and is established when the message is created in the ladder rung Data Table Address 7 N20 1 An unused controller data table address containing th
316. ontrolLogix and CompactLogix controllers with EtherNet IP provide the easiest and most integrated form of implicit I O control for a PowerFlex drive Programming software RSLogix 5000 version 16 or later for ControlLogix and CompactLogix controllers contains Drive Add On Profiles for PowerFlex drives that with a few clicks of the mouse automatically create all controller tags and an implicit connection at the specified Requested Packet Interval to control the drive This connection is monitored at both ends to ensure that the controller and drive are communicating watchdog will cause a drive fault if the drive does not respond within approximately 100 milliseconds Therefore using a ControlLogix or CompactLogix controller is by far the much preferred method of controlling drives on EtherNet IP If you are not using either of these type of controllers then PowerFlex drives on EtherNet IP can be controlled with explicit messages using PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 controllers with the following limitations e Anexplicit message is a much slower form of control and is non deterministic This means that you cannot guarantee how long the drive will take to start up or stop when the command is given Therefore all equipment used in this manner should be subject to a risk assessment taking into account the mechanical and electrical implementation e Atimeout value in seconds in the adapter will issue a drive fault if a message is no
317. ore setup data to be entered in message configuration screens but can be used to perform single parameter read or write and multiple parameter read or write explicit messages Also the Generic Set Attribute Service offers the choice of writing the data to the drive s Non Volatile Storage NVS or the drive s Random Access Memory RAM for Generic Set Attribute Single service only see page 6 40 Note that when selecting the data to be written to RAM the data will be lost if the drive loses power For supported classes instances and attributes refer to Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 30 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P SLC 500 Explicit Messaging Using the Read Write Parameter Service SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A Read Parameter message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important Parameter Object Class code OxOF is not supported in PowerFlex 750 Series drives To do a single parameter read follow the SLC 500 Generic Attribute Service single read example on page 6 36 Figure 6 34 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter gt SingeRead Message B3 0 EEM J E EtherNet IP Explicit Message I CEN 0 Control Bl
318. orrect size 24 DPI I O Act The Reference Feedback and Datalinks used by the adapter This value is the same as Parameter 23 DPI I O Cfg unless the parameter was changed and the adapter was not reset Bit Definition Used Used Used alink D alink C alink B alink A a el Default Bit 0 I O disabled 1 1 0 enabled gt lt No x No x No gt o Da wo o Da no o Da o Da 48 Peer Inp Status The status of the consumed peer input connection Values 0 Off 1 Waiting 2 Running 3 Faulted The adapter can be flash updated over the network or serially through a direct connection from a computer to the drive using a 1203 USB or 1203 SSS serial converter When flashing over the network you can use the Allen Bradley software tool ControlFLASH the built in flash capability of DriveExplorer Lite or Full or the built in flash capability of DriveExecutive When flashing through a direct serial connection from a computer to a drive you can use the same Allen Bradley software tools described above or you can use HyperTerminal set to the X modem protocol To obtain a flash update for this adapter go to http www ab com support abdrives webupdate This site contains all firmware update files and associated Release Notes that describe firmware update enhancements anomalies how to determine the existing firmware version and
319. otect Password WORD 0 Password disabled n Password 2 Set NVS Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Store values in active memory to NVS 2 Load values NVS to active memory 3 Load default values to active memory 3 Get NVS Parameter Value Checksum WORD Checksum of all parameter values in a user set in NVS 4 Get NVS Link Value Checksum WORD Checksum of parameter links in a user set in NVS 5 Get First Accessible Parameter WORD First parameter available if parameters are protected by passwords A 0 indicates all parameters are protected 7 Get Class Revision WORD 2 DPI 8 Get First Parameter Processing Error WORD The first parameter that has been written with a value outside of its range A 0 indicates no errors 9 Set Link Command BYTE 0 No Operation 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 1 Clear All Parameter Links This does not clear links to function blocks Instance Attributes EtherNet IP Objects C 31 Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 6 Get DPI Offline Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Offline Minimum value CONTAINER Offline Maximum value CONTAINER Offline Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Offline parameter units WORD Online minimum parameter instance WORD Online maximum parameter instance WORD Online default parameter instance WORD Multiplier parameter instance WORD
320. owerFlex Drive l DriveStatus Faulted Status Faulted My PowerFlex Drive l DriveStatus AtSpeed Status At Speed JE gt MOV Move Source PowerFlex Drive l OutputFreq Oe Dest Speed_Feedback 0 Using the I O 5 11 Figure 5 3 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Add On Profile for Logic Command Reference Command_Stop ces My PowerFlex Drive O DriveLogicRslt Stop 2 Command Start TE My PowerFlex Drive O DriveLogicRslt Start x Command Jog 3 E My PowerFlex Drive O DriveLogicRsIt Jog ENS Command Clear Faults My PowerFlex Drive O DriveLogicRsIt ClearFault 3 X Command Forward Reverse My PowerFlex Drive O DriveLogicRslt Forward Command Forward Reverse J FE 3 2 My PowerFlex Drive O DriveLogicRslt Reverse p MOV Move Source Speed_Reference 0 Dest PowerFlex Drive O CommandedFreq 0e Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile versions 13 15 Since the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile has been significantly improved upon by RSLogix 5000 drive Add On Profiles version 16 or later it is highly recommended to use RSLogix 5000 drive Add On Profiles to take advantage of its benefits more intuitive time saving and less likely to make ladder logic program errors 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 12 Using the I O Device Powe
321. parameters in a PowerFlex drive can be used by only one adapter If more than one adapter is connected to a single drive multiple adapters cannot use the same Datalink e Parameter settings in the drive determine the data passed through the Datalink mechanism Refer to the documentation for your drive e When you use a Datalink to change a value the value is NOT written to the Non Volatile Storage NVS The value is stored in volatile memory and lost when the drive loses power Thus use Datalinks when you need to change a value of a parameter frequently Datalink Scaling PowerFlex 7 Class Drives except PowerFlex 750 Series When using RSLogix 5000 version 16 or later Datalink scaling is done automatically However when using RSLogix 5000 version 15 or earlier or when using a PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller Datalink scaling is not automatic and uses whole numbers INTs or DINTs Refer to the drive documentation to determine the unit resolution for the associated parameter Datalink For example PowerFlex 700VC drive Parameter 3 Output Current has a 0 1 unit resolution 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 8 Using the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Because Datalink scaling uses whole numbers the Output Current value is multiplied by 10 in the adapter and then sent over the network Suppose the actual Output Current
322. plorer software and a free lite version can be accessed at http www ab com drives driveexplorer DriveTools SP Software A software suite designed for running on various Microsoft Windows operating systems This software suite provides a family of tools including DriveExecutive that you can use to program monitor control troubleshoot and maintain Allen Bradley products DriveTools SP can be used with PowerFlex drives Information about DriveTools SP can be accessed at http www ab com drives drivetools Glossary G 3 Duplex Duplex describes the mode of communication Full duplex communications let a device exchange data in both directions at the same time Half duplex communications let a device exchange data only in one direction at a time The duplex used by the adapter depends on the type of duplex that other network devices such as switches support EDS Electronic Data Sheet Files Simple text files that are used by network configuration tools such as RSNetWorx for EtherNet to describe products so that you can easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a product device type and revision EDS files for many Allen Bradley products can be found at http ww w ab com networks eds EtherNet IP Network EtherNet IP Industrial Protocol is an open producer consumer communication network based on the Ethernet standard IEEE 802 3 TCP IP UDP IP and Designed for industrial communications both
323. presence of the optional I O Board the I O image is modified as shown in Figure 9 3 Figure 9 3 Example I O Image Datalink D Dedicated to I O Board and All I O Enabled EtherNet IP DPI Controller Scanner Adapter Word and I O PowerFlex Drive Output 0 Logic Command 4 Logic Command Image 1 Reference Reference Write 2 DatalinkIn A1 4 Data In A1 3 Datalink In A2 Data In A2 L 4 Datalink In B1 Data In B1 5 Datalink In B2 Data In B2 6 Datalink In C1 Data In C1 7 Datalink In C2 Data In C2 8 Datalink In D1 Opt 1 0 Data In D1 9 Datalink In D2 Fe Board Data In D2 Outputs Input 0 Word Image 1 Pad Word Read 2 Logic Status r Logic Status 3 Feedback Feedback 4 Datalink Out A1 Data Out A1 m 5 Datalink Out A2 j Data Out A2 6 Datalink Out B1 Data Out B1 7 Datalink Out B2 Data Out B2 8 Datalink Out C1 Data Out C1 9 Datalink Out C2 Data Out C2 10 Datalink Out D1 Opt Data Out D1 11 Datalink Out D2 Board Data Out D2 E Message Message inputs Message Handler Buffer Handler o Required by ControlLogix when using the Generic Profile May or may not be required by other types of controllers Configuring the Adapter to Use the Optional I O Data Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BA
324. pter to the drive see Figure 2 3 by doing the following OnaPowerFlex 70 drive fold the Internal Interface cable behind the adapter and mount the adapter on the drive using the four captive Screws Ona PowerFlex 700 PowerFlex 700H or PowerFlex 7008 drive mount the adapter on the drive using the four captive screws Important Tighten all screws to properly ground the adapter Recommended torque is 0 9 Nem 8 0 Ibein 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 2 4 Installing the Adapter Figure 2 2 DPI Ports and Internal Interface Cables 20 COMM E Adapter e Er 9000000000000 o e lt gt lt gt gt lt PowerFlex 700 Frames 0 and 1 PowerFlex 700 Frames 2 and Larger PowerFlex 700S Frames 0 and 1 PowerFlex 700 Frames 2 through 6 HIM panel opens to allow access to DPI interface To open panel remove screws on left side of HIM panel and swing open e X1 PowerFlex 700H Frames 9 and Larger PowerFlex 700S Frames 9 and Larger Item Description 15 24 cm 6 in Internal Interface cable DPI Connector Ethernet cable
325. ption 0x0000 0x3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Most Recent Drive Fault 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Second Most Recent Drive Fault 0x4800 0x4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 Ox4C00 0x4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Recent Adapter Event 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 Port 6 0 5 00 0 5 23552 24575 DPI Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF 24576 25599 Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 7 25600 26623 Port 9 0x6800 0x6BFF 7 26624 27647 DPI Port 10 Ox6C00 0x6FFF 0 27648 28671 Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 DPI Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 DPI Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 DPI Port 14 1 These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances WORD Maximum number of faults events that the device can record in its queue 3 Set Fault Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Clear Fault Event 2 Clear Fault Event Queue 3 Reset Device 4 Get Fault Trip Instance Read WORD Fault that tripped the device For adapters 20 COMM E EtherNet
326. r Communications Command G 6 PCCC object C 8 Peer A Input parameter B 5 Peer A Output parameter B 7 Peer B Input parameter B 5 Peer B Output parameter B 7 Peer Cmd Mask parameter B 5 Peer Flt Action parameter B 6 Peer Inp Addr 1 4 parameters B 6 Peer Inp Enable parameter B 6 Peer Inp Status parameter B 6 Peer Inp Timeout parameter B 6 Peer Out Enable parameter B 7 Peer Out Skip parameter B 7 Peer Out Time parameter B 7 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2070MM UMO10E EN P Peer to Peer hierarchy configuring adapter to receive data 3 12 to transmit data 3 10 definition G 6 ping G 6 PLC 5 controller configuring the I O 4 22 explicit messaging 6 23 limitations when using the I O 4 21 using the I O 5 18 PORT status indicator locating 1 6 troubleshooting with 7 2 power consumption A 1 PowerFlex drives compatible with adapter 1 3 definition G 6 HIM 3 2 installing adapter on 2 3 preparing for an installation 2 1 processor see controller programmable logic controller see controller Q quick start 1 5 R Ref Adjust parameter B 5 Ref Fdbk Size parameter B 2 Reference Feedback definition G 7 in I O image for ControlLogix controller 5 2 PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 controllers 5 4 setting an adjustment 3 14 using 5 5 Register object C 4 regulatory compliance A 2 related documentation P 1 requested packet interval 4 9 4 18 Reset Module parameter B 3
327. r Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Table 6 F Example Controller Tags to Read a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Read Message Data Type XIC Execute Single Read Message BOOL MSG Single Read Message MESSAGE Figure 6 22 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Execute Single Read Message MSG JE Message CEN Message Control Single Read Message HC DN gt FCER2 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 20 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter all versions Figure 6 23 Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Single Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Single Read Message Message Configuration Single Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Path My PowerFlex Drive Message Configuration Single Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Type ci Generic Service Get Attribute Single EX Service E fgg Code E Class 93 Hex Destination Output_Current z Instance 3 Attribute 9 mm Q Enable Enable Waiting Start g Done Length 0 Eror Code Extended Eror Code Timed Out Eror Path Eror Text ppm
328. r cycle the drive For the drive speed reference and Datalink parameter values and the adapter setup parameter values refer to Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings on page 5 18 Creating RSLogix 5 version 7 or later Project To transmit read and write data between the controller and drive you must create message instructions that allocate data table addresses in the controller for Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks Selecting the Controller 1 Start RSLogix 5 The RSLogix 5 window appears Select File New to display the Select Processor Type screen Figure 4 25 Figure 4 25 PLC 5 Select Processor Type Screen Select Processor Type Processor Name EXAMPLE Platform Processor Series Memory Cancel Ethemet PLC5 40E v E 2000 Files Extended Forci 49152 Help Revision D Communication settings Driver Processor Node Reply Timeout Ethernet 1 ases Who Active 10 Sec Octal 2 Assign a name for the processor From the pull down fields select the appropriate choices to match your PLC 5 controller and application and click OK The RSLogix 5 project window appears 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 24 Configuring the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Creating PLC 5 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout 1 In the RSLogix 5 project window treeview under Prog
329. r if you select a Reference or Datalink as an input note the following Ifadrive that uses a 32 bit Reference and 32 bit Datalinks receives a 16 bit Reference or Datalink it uses the data in its most significant word and its least significant word is zero Ifadrive that uses a 16 bit Reference and 16 bit Datalinks receives a 32 bit Reference or Datalink it uses the data in the most significant word of the 32 bit Reference or Datalink and ignores the data in the least significant word With the Series B adapter data is used from the least significant word in the event of a mismatch in Reference or Datalink sizes Configuring the Adapter 3 13 4 Ifdesired set Parameter 39 Peer B Input to select the destination of the data to input to the drive as Peer B Figure 3 20 Example Peer B Input LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM E 0 Off Default Parameter 39 1 Logic Command Reference Peer B Input 2 5 Datalink A B C or D Input SB DL A Input 5 Ifthe adapter receives a Logic Command set the bits in Parameter 40 Peer Cmd Mask that the drive should use The bit definitions for the Logic Command word will depend on the drive to which the adapter is connected Refer to Appendix D or drive documentation Figure 3 21 Example Peer Cmd Mask LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM E 0 Ignore this command bit Default Parameter 40 1 Use th
330. r REAL 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 32 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P SLC 500 Example Read Single Response Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 36 to store the response value 0 13 amps that was read from drive parameter 003 Output Current To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling refer to the specific drive documentation Figure 6 36 Example Read Single Response Data File Data File N40 dec Radix Decimal E Columns 10 Figure 6 37 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for read messages in the SLC 500 Figure 6 37 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Reads N40 0 N41 2 For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S Drives Using Explicit Messaging 6 33 SLC 500 Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service A Write Parameter message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important Parameter Object Class code OxOF is not supported in Pow
331. r is power cycled the Control Timeout Message must be re sent 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 42 Configuring the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Creating MicroLogix 1100 1400 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status Feedback and Datalink Out 1 Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG MGxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG11 n and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG11 0 Then press Enter Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG11 0 for the message created in Step 1 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for and for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter In the MSG instruction double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 45 Figure 4 44 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status Feedback and Datalink Out MSG Read Write Message CEN gt MSG File MG11 0 Setup pen MG11 0 11 0 J E CU JL DN EN MG11 0 3
332. r power cycle the drive For the drive speed reference and Datalink parameter values and the adapter setup parameter values refer to Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings on page 5 12 Figure 4 22 Controller Tags e My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive C e AB ETHERNET_ My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Te ied AB ETHERNET_ My PowerFle 0 EC Drive l Data TEE Decimal INT 12 My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data U 0 Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 1 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 2 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 3 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 4 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 5 0 Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 5 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 7 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 7 EC Drive l Data 8 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 3 0 Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 10 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 11 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive cec T AB ETHERNET _ My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data Decimal INT 10 My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 0 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O Data 1 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 2 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 3 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 4 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive
333. r value sign extended if necessary DINT 32 bit signed integer DWORD 32 bit unsigned integer INT 16 bit signed integer LWORD 64 bit unsigned integer REAL 32 bit floating point SHORT STRING 1 byte length indicator that many characters SINT 8 bit signed integer STRING n Array of n characters STRUCT Structure name only no size in addition to elements TCHAR 8 or 16 bit character UDINT 32 bit unsigned integer UINT 16 bit unsigned integer USINT 8 bit unsigned integer WORD 16 bit unsigned integer 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 2 EtherNet IP Objects Identity Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x01 1 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x05 No Yes Reset Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x01 Yes Yes Get Attributes All Instances The number of instances depends on the number of components in the device connected to the adapter This number of components can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instance Description 0 Class 1 Host 2 15 Peripherals on Ports 1 14 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 2 WORD Total number of instances Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Vendor ID WORD 1 Allen Bradley 2 Get Device Type WORD 123 3 Get Product Code WORD Number identifying product name and rating 4 G
334. rFlex Drive l Data 5 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 5 My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data My_PowerFlex_Drive Data S My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 3 My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 10 My _PowerFlex_Drive Data 11 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 My PowerFlex Drive D Data My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data O My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 1 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 2 My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 3 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 4 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 5 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 6 My PowerFlex Drive O Data 7 My PowerFlex Drive D Data 8 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 9 Name amp Value Value Data Description AB ETHER ee 0 0 0 0 50 50 100 1 200 300 400 500 INT 12 INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT Input Image Pad Word Pad Word Logic Status Speed Feedback Datalink Out A1 Datalink Out A2 Datalink Out B1 Datalink Out B2 Datalink Out C1 Datalink Out C2 Datalink Out D1 Datalink Qut D2 AB ETHER INT 10 INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT Dutput Image Logic Command Speed Reference Datalink In Datalink In A2 Datalink In B1 Datalink In B2 Datalink In C1 Datalink In C2 Datalink In D1 Datalink In D2 e Description My PowerFlex Drive l My PowerFlex Drive l Data My PowerFles Drive l Data 0 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 1 E My PowerFles Drive l Data 2
335. rFlex 70 EC Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive 20 COMM E Adapter Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile all versions Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings The following drive and adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section Parameter Value Description 90 Speed Ref A Sel 22 DPI Port 5 Assigns 20 COMM E to be used for the Reference 300 Data In A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 301 Data In A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 302 Data In B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 303 Data In B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 304 Data In C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 305 Data In C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 306 Data In D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 307 Data In D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 310 Data Out A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 311 Data Out A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 312 Data Out B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 313 Data Out B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 314 Data Out C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 315 Data Out C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 316 Data Out D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 317 Data Out D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 545 Spd Ref A
336. rNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P G 4 Glossary 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Flash Update The process of updating firmware in a device The adapter can be flash updated using various Allen Bradley software tools Refer to Flash Updating the Adapter on page 3 18 for more information Gateway A device on a network that connects an individual network to a system of networks When a node needs to communicate with a node on another network a gateway transfers the data between the two networks You need to configure the address for the gateway device in the adapter if you want the adapter to communicate with devices that are not on its network Hardware Address Each Ethernet device has a unique hardware address sometimes called a MAC address that is 48 bits The address appears as six digits separated by colons for example Xx xx xx xx xx xx Each digit has a value between 0 and 255 0x00 and OxFF This address is assigned in the hardware and cannot be changed It is required to identify the device if you are using a BOOTP utility HIM Human Interface Module A device that can be used to configure and control a drive PowerFlex 7 Class HIMs 20 HIM xxx can be used to configure PowerFlex 7 Class drives and their connected peripherals Hold Last When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and PowerFlex drive can respon
337. rNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 40 Configuring the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Creating MicroLogix 1100 1400 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout 1 In the RSLogix 500 project window treeview under Program Files double click on LAD 2 Insert a ladder rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG MGxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG10 n and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG10 0 Then press Enter Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG10 0 for the message created in Step 2 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for and for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter In the MSG instruction double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 43 Figure 4 42 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout MSG Read Write Message CEND MSG File MG10 0 CDND Setup Screen I ER 5 MG10 0 MG10 0 3 C CU zd DN EN MG10 0 lE sb ER 5 Configure the Gener
338. ram Files double click on LAD 2 Insert a ladder rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG MGxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG10 n and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG10 0 Then press Enter Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG10 0 for the message created in Step 2 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for and for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter In the MSG instruction double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 27 Figure 4 26 PLC 5 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout MSG Read Write Message CEN gt Control MG10 0 DN Setup Screen CER 5 Part MG10 0 4 E 17 MG10 0 ER 5 Configure the General tab by entering or verifying the information shown in the screen General Tab Box This PLC 5 Configuring the 4 25 Figure 4 27 PLC 5 Message Configuration Screens for the Control Timeout i MSG Rung 42 0 MG10 0 ultiHop Control Bits Ignore if timed out 0 0 To be retried
339. rameter version 15 or later Figure 6 5 Parameter Write Single Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Single Write Message Tag Configuration Communication Name Single Write Message Message Configuration Single Write Message Message Configuration Single Write Message Configuration Communication Tag Path My PowerFlex Drive Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic Service Type Service Code Instance 10 Enable Emor Code Eror Path Eror Text Parameter Write 140 Q Enable Waiting il Class f Attribute 1 Hex Source Length Stat Done Extended Eror Code OK Cancel Source Element El Accel Time 1 2 i New Tag Bytes Done Length 0 Timed Out The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type 1 Parameter Write This service is used to write a parameter value Service Code 1 10 Hex Code for the requested service Class f Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 2 140 Dec Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute 1 Attribute number for th
340. rameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Dec Required for scattered messages MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 n this example we are writing to five parameters Each parameter being written to requires three contiguous 16 bit words Scattered write messages always assume that every parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size Therefore the Size in Bytes must be set to 30 The data structure format is the same as shown on page 6 18 Maximum length is 66 words 132 bytes which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F 3 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 72 Using Explicit Messaging PowerFlex 7
341. ration screen Setting 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 G Table 5 J starting on page 5 20 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 19 9 For N File details see N Files on page C 10 TIP This message will error out if the Control Timeout value is not changed from a non zero value Refer to page 4 32 for writing a value to the Control Timeout TIP If the controller is controlling more than one drive it is recommended to intersperse the control I O messaging for each drive to conserve network bandwidth and decrease response time That is sequence the message instructions for each drive so that its group of messages will occur at a different time than those for another drive 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 38 Configuring the I O MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Network Example After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple EtherNet IP network see Figure 4 40 In our example we will configure a MicroLogix 1100 controller to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks over the network Figure 4 40 Micro
342. re 6 54 Example Scattered Read Response Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Data File N60 dec BE Radix Decimal E Columns 10 Using Explicit Messaging 6 45 In this example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter Address Read Value 1 Output Freq N60 1 32 5 Hz 3 Output Current N60 4 0 01 Amp 6 Output Voltage N60 7 118 7 VAC 12 DC Bus Voltage N60 10 329 2 VDC 17 Analog In2 Value N60 13 8 318 mA Figure 6 55 Example Scattered Read Response Data File for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive 22 Data File N60 dec DER 4 6 7 8 9 16948 7 10486 15651 137 12673 10843 21581 0 16948 260 14680 16661 0 0 Radix Decimal Symbol Columns 10 v Desc N50 Properties Usage Help The PowerFlex 750 Series drive uses 32 bit integer and REAL parameters A COP command must be used to copy the N60 integer array to a 16 bit integer or floating tag Figure 6 56 shows the ladder logic used for this example If the parameter data type is a 32 bit integer the data remains split into two 16 bit integers since there are no 32 bit integers in the SLC 500 If the parameter data type is a REAL then the destination tag is a floating point In this case the value must first be swapped with the high and low 16 bit integers and then the two integers copied COP into a floating point address See the drive
343. re enabled To disable the adapter web pages use Parameter 54 Access Control to set the Web Enable Bit 0 value to 0 Disabled To protect the configured settings for adapter e mail messaging use Parameter 54 Access Control to set the E mail Config Bit 1 value to 0 Disabled E mail messaging will remain active regardless of whether or not its settings are protected unless e mail messaging was never configured For more information about configuring adapter e mail messaging see Configure E mail Notification Web Page on page 8 6 Figure 3 26 Example Web Access Control LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Bit Description 20 COMM E 0 Web Enable Default 1 Enabled Parameter 54 1 E mail Config Default 0 Disabled Access Control 2 31 Not Used XXXXXXXXXXxxxx Ol Web Enable b00 Bit 0 is the right most bit In Figure 3 26 it is highlighted and equals 1 Changes to this parameter take effect immediately A reset is not required 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Resetting the Adapter Configuring the Adapter 3 17 Series B Adapter firmware version 3 xxx or later By default the Series B adapter web pages are disabled See Figure 2 1 and set the Web Pages Switch SW2 to the Enable Web up position Important For a change to the switch setting to take effect the adapter must be reset see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 17 Bit
344. reeview right click the I O Configuration folder and select New Module The Select Module screen appears Expand the Communications group to display all of the available communication modules Figure 4 4 Figure 4 4 Bridge Select Module Screen Wii Select Module Description Vendor 1756 DHRIO C 1756 DH Bridge RIO Scanner Allen Bradley 1756 DHRIO D 1756 DH Bridge RIO Scanner Allen Bradley 1756 DNB 1756 DeviceNet Scanner Allen Bradley 1756 EN2T A 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media Allen Bradley 1756 ENBT A 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media Allen Bradley 1756 ENET A 1756 Ethernet Communication Interface Allen Bradley 1756 ENET B 1756 Ethernet Communication Interface Allen Bradley 1756 EWEB A 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge w Enhanced Web Services Allen Bradley 1756 SYNCH A SynchLink Interface Allen Bradley l Controllers Digital Drives Motion EIN Find Add Favorite By Category By Vendor Favorites Cancel Help In the list select the EtherNet IP bridge used by your controller In this example we use a 1756 ENBT EtherNet IP Bridge Series A so the 1756 ENBT A option is selected Then click OK In the Select Major Revision pop up dialog box select the major revision of its firmware 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 4 Configuring the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P
345. ridge IP Address 10 91 100 79 PowerFlex 70 Drive with 20 COMM E Adapter Bub p 0 Ms Ethernet Switch Computer with Ethernet Connection 0 NOTE Information for PowerFlex 750 Series drives has been added to this manual where applicable Configuring the I O 4 3 Adding the Bridge to the I O Configuration To establish communications between the controller and adapter over the network you must first add the ControlLogix controller and its bridge to the I O configuration This procedure is similar for all RSLogix 5000 versions 1 3 Start RSLogix 5000 The RSLogix 5000 window appears Select File gt New to display the New Controller screen Figure 4 3 Figure 4 3 Controller Screen RSLogix 5000 v16 shown New Controller Vendor Allen Bradley Type 1756 L63 ControlLogix5563 Controller Revision 16 X Cancel Redundancy Enabled Help Name v15 Example using 20C0MME Description Example showing how to control a PowerFlex 70 EC drive with a 20 COMM E EtherNet IP adapter using RSLogix 5000 v16 software Chassis Type 1756 47 7 Slot ControlLogix Chassis Slot 0 u Create In C RSLogix SO00 Projects Browse Select the appropriate choices for the fields in the screen to match your application Then click OK The RSLogix 5000 window reappears with the treeview in the left pane In the t
346. rom the least significant word LSW to the most significant word MSW in the controller When the I O was configured Chapter 4 an available data table address N20 0 was used Figure 5 12 shows the entire data file address structure for this example Figure 5 12 Data File Table for Example Ladder Logic Program 223 Data File N20 dec DER Columns 10 E Important The N20 0 data table address in this example is used to set a control timeout value in seconds which determines how long it will take the adapter to detect a communication loss Enter a valid value 1 32767 for N20 0 A value of zero 0 is not valid since it disables the timeout and all I O connections Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks intended for the drive will not execute A timeout value of 5 20 seconds is recommended Depending on the drive you are using Table 5 G Table 5 H Table 5 1 or Table 5 J show the I O definitions as they relate to the N20 0 data table address Figure 5 12 being used in this example 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 5 20 Using the I O When using PowerFlex 70 SC or 70 EC PowerFlex 700 SC PowerFlex 700H drives or SMC Flex which all contain INT 16 bit format data types you will read from and write to the MSW data table address in the controller When using PowerFlex 700 VC drives which contain DINT 32 bit format data types you will read
347. ror ER Message done DN Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Ins Add Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This PLCS 2 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 79 General Tab Box Setting This PLC 5 Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read The controller type and command type for the controller to read data from the drive Data Table Address 7 N20 1 An unused controller data table address containing the data to be read from the drive Size in Elements 19 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Port Number 2 Controller port to which the network is connected Target Device data for adapter drive Data Table Address 9 N41 0 Specific starting address of the source file in the drive MultiHop Yes Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the adapter drive When Yes is selected a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 G Table 5 J starting on page 5 20 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 19 3 For N File details see N Files on pa
348. roup Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x10 16 Important This object is not supported when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of groups in the device A group of adapter parameters is appended to the list of groups in the device The total number of groups can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Number Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Drive Group 1 Attributes n Last Drive Group Attributes n 1 Adapter Group Attributes Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 1 Get Parameter group version WORD 1 2 Get Max Instance WORD Total number of groups 8 Set Native Language BYTE 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 3 Italian 4 German 5 Japanese 6 Portuguese 7 Mandarin Chinese 8 Russian 9 Dutch Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Group Name String SHORT STRING Group name 2 Get Number of Members in Group WORD Number of parameters in group 3 Get 1st Parameter Number in Group WORD 7 4 Get 2nd Parameter Number in Group WORD 1 n Get WORD 0 7 Value varies based group instance 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 8 EtherNet IP Objects PCCC Object Class Code
349. s Zero Data When communications are disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and drive can respond with zero data Zero data results in the drive receiving zero as values for Logic Command Reference and Datalink data If the drive was running and using the Reference from the adapter it will stay running but at zero Reference A Access Control parameter B 7 adapter applying power 2 6 commissioning 2 8 compatible products 1 3 components 1 1 configuration tools 3 1 configuring to use with optional I O data 9 3 connecting to the drive 2 3 connecting to the network 2 6 definition G 1 features 1 2 flash updating 3 18 grounding 2 5 hardware address label 3 3 installation 2 1 to 2 8 IP address 3 3 3 6 mounting on the drive 2 5 parameters B 1 to B 8 resetting 3 17 specifications A 1 using in a DPI External Comms Kit 9 1 viewing its status 3 18 viewing optional I O diagnostic items 9 4 web pages 8 1 to 8 11 applying power to the adapter 2 6 Assembly object C 3 attentions 1 4 baud rate see data rate bit definitions of Logic Command Status word for PowerFlex 70 700 700H drives D 1 PowerFlex 700S drives D 3 PowerFlex 750 Series drives D 5 BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol definition G 1 disabling 3 6 free server application G 1 using 3 3 BOOTP parameter B 1 bridge G 1 Index C cables DPI Internal Interface 2 3 2 4 Ethernet 2 6 CAN Controller Area Network G 1
350. s in idle program mode the scanner is faulted or the adapter is not mapped to the scanner e The adapter is not receiving Peer I O from another adapter e The value of N42 3 is set to a non zero value Write Read N41 0 Logic Command Word Logic Status Word N41 1 Reference least significant word Feedback least significant word N41 2 Reference most significant word Feedback most significant word N41 3 Datalink A1 least significant word Datalink A1 least significant word N41 4 Datalink A1 most significant word Datalink A1 most significant word N41 5 Datalink A2 least significant word Datalink A2 least significant word N41 6 Datalink A2 most significant word Datalink A2 most significant word N41 7 Datalink B1 least significant word Datalink B1 least significant word N41 8 Datalink B1 most significant word Datalink B1 most significant word N41 9 Datalink B2 least significant word Datalink B2 least significant word N41 10 Datalink B2 most significant word Datalink B2 most significant word N41 11 Datalink C1 least significant word Datalink C1 least significant word N41 12 Datalink C1 most significant word Datalink C1 most significant word N41 13 Datalink C2 least significant word Datalink C2 least significant word N41 14 Datalink C2 most significant word Datalink C2 most significant word N41 15 Datalink D1 least significant word Datalink D1 least significant word N41 16 Datalin
351. scription of Changes Page Reformatted document from half size 5 5 x 8 5 in to full size 8 5 x 11 in Throughout manual Revised Figures 2 2 and 2 3 to show PowerFlex 700H S Frames 9 and larger Added 2 4 and 2 5 ground tab details in Figure 2 3 Added Flash Updating the Adapter section 3 18 Added information for use with PowerFlex 750 Series drives Throughout manual Added Using RSLinx Classic section 4 1 Revised Tables 4 A 4 B and 4 C to include configured settings for Parameters 13 4 17 DPI I O Cfg 25 M S Input and 26 M S Output Added section Limitations When Using PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 4 21 Added titles to the controller I O image tables Table 5 A through Table 5 F for easier 5 2 to 5 5 referral Added footnotes to explicit messaging screen configuration tables for all controller type Throughout examples to clarify required settings for the Size Words Elements Bytes fields when Chapter 6 reading writing to 16 bit and 32 bit parameters The 20 COMM E adapter firmware version 4 001 added support for use with PowerFlex Throughout 750 Series drives included related information where applicable Appendix C 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P soc ii Summary of Changes 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Preface Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Tabl
352. se instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Family Code BYTE 0x00 DPI Peripheral 0x30 PowerFlex 70 0x34 PowerFlex 700H 0x38 0x39 or Ox3A PowerFlex 700 0x40 PowerFlex 7000 0x48 0x49 or 0x4A PowerFlex 700S 0x5A SMC Flex 0x68 0x69 or Ox6A PowerFlex 700VC 0x90 PowerFlex 753 755 OxA0 20 750 xxx Option Module OxFF HIM 1 Get Family Text STRING 16 Text identifying the device 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 14 EtherNet IP Objects Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Description 2 Set Language Code BYTE 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 3 Italian 4 German 5 Japanese 6 Portuguese 7 Mandarin Chinese 8 Russian 9 Dutch 3 Get Product Series BYTE 1 A 2 B 4 Get Number of Components BYTE Number of components e g main control board I O boards in the device 5 Set User Definable Text STRING 16 Text identifying the device with a user supplied name 6 Get Status Text STRING 12 Text describing the status of the device 7 Get Configuration Code BYTE Identification of variations 8 Get Configuration Text STRING 16 Text identifying a variation of a family device 9 Get Brand Code WORD 0x0001 Allen Bradley 11 Get NVS Checksum WORD Checksum of th
353. sponse Data In this specific N150 6 message example we use the data table address in Figure 6 28 to store the response value 0 13 amps that was read from drive parameter 003 Output Current To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling refer to the specific drive documentation Figure 6 28 Example Single Read Response Data File 4 File N40 dec Radix Decimal Symbol Columns fio Desc Properties Usage Help Figure 6 29 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for read messages in the PLC 5 Figure 6 29 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Reads For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P 6 26 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P PLC 5 Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter A write message is used to write to a single parameter The specific N151 30 address shown in this write message example writes the value of parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Footnote 2 under the Figure 6 31 table shows other N file addressing to write various integer and
354. ss Yes Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the adapter drive When Yes is selected a MultiHop tab appears on the message configuration screen Setting 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 G Table 5 J starting on page 5 20 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 19 3 For N File details see N Files on page C 10 TIP This message will error out if the Control Timeout value is not changed from a non zero value Refer to page 4 24 for writing a value to the Control Timeout TIP If the controller is controlling more than one drive it is recommended to intersperse the control I O messaging for each drive to conserve network bandwidth and decrease response time That is sequence the message instructions for each drive so that its group of messages will occur at a different time than those for another drive 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 30 Configuring the I O SLC 500 Example Example Network After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple EtherNet IP network see Figure 4 32 In our example we will configure a SLC
355. ss code Ox9F for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Table 6 E Example Controller Tags to Write Multiple Parameters Operand Controller Tags for Write Multiple Message Data Type XIC Execute Scattered Write Message BOOL MSG Scattered Write Message MESSAGE Figure 6 13 Example Ladder Logic to Write Multiple Parameters Execute Scattered Write Message MSG JE Message CEN Message Control Scattered Write Message DN gt LCER gt Important If the explicit message scattered write must be written continuously then use a separate explicit message single write for each parameter using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F and attribute A 10 decimal see page 6 22 Attribute A writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example scattered write message using attribute 0 writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 14 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters all versions Figure 6 14 Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Scattered Write Messag
356. ssage to read a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description Size in Words 29 Number of words to be transferred Each word size is a 16 bit integer Data Table Address 0 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Service Read Parameter Code for the requested service Instance 2 3 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable Only drive parameters Port 0 can be read using Parameter Object Class code To read a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 6 36 8 In this example Output Current is a 32 bit parameter If the parameter being read is a 16 bit parameter the Size in Words would be set to 1 When the parameter being read is a 32 bit REAL floating point data type the size in words would be set to 2 See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer o
357. t Communications gt Download The Download dialog box Figure 4 13 appears 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Configuring the I O 4 11 Figure 4 13 Download Dialog Box Download Download offline project v16_Example_using_20COMME to the controller Connected Controller Name v16_Example_using_20COMME Type 1756 L63 A ControlLogix5563 Controller Path Ethernet 10 91 100 80 Backplane 0 Serial Number 00244880 Security No Protection amp DANGER Unexpected hazardous motion of machinery may occur Some devices maintain independent configuration settings that are not loaded to the device during the download of the controller Verify these devices drives network devices 3rd party products have been properly loaded before placing the controller into run mode Failure to load proper configuration could result in misaligned data and unexpected equipment operation Cancel Help TIP Ifa message box reports that RSLogix 5000 is unable to go online select Communications gt Who Active to find your controller in the Who Active screen After finding and selecting the controller click Set Project Path to establish the path If your controller does not appear you need to add or configure the EtherNet IP driver in RSLinx Refer to the RSLinx online help 2 Click Download to download the configuration to the controller When the download is successfully completed RSLogix 5000 goes into
358. t IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 7 Configuring the Adapter 3 5 Edit the following Box Type IP Address 7 A unique IP address for the adapter Host Name Optional Description Optional 1 For a definition of this term refer to the Glossary Click OK to apply the settings The adapter appears in the Relation List Figure 3 4 with the new settings Figure 3 4 BOOTP Server Window with Adapter in the Relation List BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 File Tools Help Request History hr min sec Ethemet Address MAC IP Address Hostname 13 31 00 00 00 BC 08 60 09 10 91 100 79 20COMME621A 13 30 59 00 00 BC 08 60 09 13 30 54 00 00 8C 08 60 09 13 30 51 00 00 8C 08 60 09 Relation List New Ethemet Address MAC IP Address Hostname Description 00 00 BC 08 60 09 10 91 100 79 20COMME621A Bidg 6 Floor 2 Fan 1A Entries O of 256 To assign this configuration to the adapter permanently select the device in the Relation List and click Disable BOOTP DHCP When power is cycled on the adapter it will use the configuration you assigned it and not issue new BOOTP requests TIP To enable BOOTP for an adapter that has had BOOTP disabled first select the adapter in the Relation List then click Enable BOOTP and finally reset the adapter or power cycle the drive 10 To save the Relation List select File gt Save 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publicati
359. t Rockwell Automation Inc About This Manual P 3 Conventions Used in This This manual provides information about the adapter and using it with Manual PowerFlex 7 Class Architecture Class drives The adapter can be used with other products that support a DPI adapter such as the DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE Refer to the documentation for your product for specific information about how it works with the adapter The following conventions are used throughout this manual e Parameter names are shown in the format Parameter xx The xx represents the parameter number The represents the parameter name for example Parameter 01 DPI Port e Menu commands are shown in bold type face and follow the format Menu gt Command For example if you read Select File gt Open you should click the File menu and then click the Open command e The firmware release is displayed as FRN X xxx The FRN signifies Firmware Release Number The X is the major release number The is the minor update number e RSLinx version 2 51 RSLogix 5 version 7 20 RSLogix 500 version 7 20 and RSLogix 5000 version 16 were used for the screen shots in this manual Different versions of the software may differ in appearance and procedures 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P P 4 About This Manual Notes 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20
360. t bridge 1 In the treeview right click on the bridge and select New Module to display the Select Module screen Figure 4 19 In our example we right click on the 1756 ENBT A bridge Expand the Communications group to display all of the available communication modules 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 16 Configuring the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 2000MM UMO10E EN P Figure 4 19 Select Module Screen Wil Select Module Description 1769 L35E Ethernet Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Port on CompactLogix5335E 1788 EN2DN A 1788 Ethernet to DeviceNet Linking Device 1788 ENBT A 1788 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media 1788 EWEB A 1788 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge w Enhanced Web Services 1794 AENT A 1794 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Adapter Twisted Pair Media Drivelogix5730 Ethernet Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Port on DriveLogix5730 ETHERNET BRIDGE Generic EtherNet IP CIP Bridge EtherNet IP SoftLogix5800 EtherNet IP PH PSSCENA A Ethernet Adapter Twisted Pair Media Drives HMI 4 Find Add Favorite By Category Favorites 2 Select ETHERNET MODULE from the list Figure 4 19 to configure the drive and its connected 20 COMM E adapter and then click OK The drive s New Module screen Figure 4 20 appears Figure 4 20 Drive New Module Screen New Module Type ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethemet Module Vendor Allen Bradley Pare
361. t received from the controller within the specified time However the controller has no way of detecting a loss of communications to the drive until the next cycle of explicit messages This is another factor in the risk assessment e Any additional drives to be controlled will require additional explicit messages for their control and they need to be carefully sequenced Most controllers have small communication queues refer to its User Manual which need to be carefully managed if messages are not to be lost e Each controller has a limited number of communication connections refer to its User Manual for maximum connections which will limit the number of drives that can be connected In summary unlike a ControlLogix or CompactLogix controller programming a PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller using RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software with explicit messages is more difficult and produces a more complex program 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 22 Configuring the I O PLC 5 Example Important The PLC 5 must be Series E Rev D 1 or higher to support the MultiHop feature that routes messaging to the drive Example Network After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple EtherNet IP network see Figure 4 24 In our example we will configure a PLC 5 40E controll
362. tCurrent 0 Decimal DINT My PowerFles 70 EC Drive l DCBusVoltage 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Faultl Code 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D cc AB PowerFlex70E My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRslt 240000 Binary INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D DriveLogicRislt Stop 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRslt Start 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRslt Decimal BOOL My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicR slt_ClearF ault 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRslt Forward 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D DriveLogicRslt Reverse 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRislt LocalContrl 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRslt MOPInc Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D DriveLogicRislt Accell 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRslt Accel2 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D DriveLogicRslt Decell 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRslt Decel2 0 Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRislt SpdReflDO Decimal BOOL My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D DriveLogicRislt SpdReflD1 0 Decimal BOOL Saving the I O Configuration to the Controller After adding the bridge and drive adapter to the I O configuration you must download the configuration to the controller You should also save the configuration to a file on your computer 1 In the RSLogix 5000 window selec
363. ta Type Description DLink UINT Destination Link ID DLink UINT Destination Link ID DSta USINT Destination Station number DSta USINT Destination Station number DUser USINT Destination User number DUser USINT Destination User number SLink UINT Source Link ID SLink UINT Source Link ID SSta USINT Source Station number SSta USINT Source Station number SUser USINT Source User number SUser USINT Source User number CMD USINT Command byte CMD USINT Command byte STS USINT 0 STS USINT Status byte TNSW UINT Transport word TNSW UINT Transport word Same value as the request FNC USINT Function code not used for all CMDs EXT STS USINT Extended status not used for all CMDs PCCC ARRAY of CMD FNC specific parameters PCCC_ ARRAY of CMD FNC specific result data params USINT results USINT The adapter supports the following PCCC command types CMD Description 0x06 10 03 Identify host and some status Ox0F 0x67 PLC 5 typed write Ox0F 0x68 PLC 5 typed read Ox0F 0x95 Encapsulate other protocol Ox0F O0xA2 SLC 500 protected typed read with address fields Ox0F OxAA SLC 500 protected typed write with address fields Ox0F 0 1 SLC 500 protected typed read with 2 address fields Ox0F 0xA9 SLC 500 protected typed write with 2 address fields OxOF 10x00 range read OxOF 0 01 Word range write For more information regarding PCCC commands see DF1 Protocol
364. tance WORD Base parameter instance WORD Offset parameter instance BYTE Formula number BYTE Pad word always zero WORD Help instance WORD Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset BOOL 32 Extended DPI descriptor STRINGN International DPI parameter name STRINGN International DPI offline parameter units 1 A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a parameter value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32 bits 2 This value is used in the formulas used to convert the parameter value between display units and internal units Refer to Formulas for Converting on page C 35 9 Do NOT continually write parameter data to NVS Refer to the attention on page 6 1 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P EtherNet IP Objects C 33 Descriptor Attributes Bit Name Description 0 Data Type Bit 1 Right bit is least significant bit 0 ues d 001 UINT used as an f Boolean Et ARS pe Eg 010 USINT bit integer 011 UINT 16 bit integer 100 UDINT 32 bit integer 101 TCHAR 8 bit not Unicode or 16 bits Unicode 110 REAL 32 bit floating point value 111 Use bits 16 17 18 3 Sign Type 0 unsigned 1 signed 4 Hidden 0 v
365. tance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 For example to write to parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the instance would be 21504 4 21508 See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F to determine the instance number 3 Setting the Attribute value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Non Volatile Storage EEPROM memory so the parameter value will remain even after the drive is power cycled Important When set to 9 be very cautious as the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the Attribute value to A 10 decimal will write the parameter value to temporary memory so the parameter value will be lost after the drive is power cycled It is recommended to use the A 10 decimal setting when frequent write messages are required 4 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder 5 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 6 n this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit parameter requiring the tag Data Type field to be set to INT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter the tag D
366. tant If the drive uses 16 bit Datalinks the most significant word of this value must be set to zero 0 or a fault will occur Parameter No Name and Description 35 36 37 38 39 40 M S Input Sets the Master Slave input data This data is produced by the scanner and consumed by the adapter M S Output Sets the Master Slave output data This data is produced by the adapter and consumed by the Master device for example scanner Ref Adjust Sets the percent scale factor for the Reference received from the network Peer A Input Peer B Input Sets the destination of the Peer I O input The adapter receives this data from the network and sends it to the drive resulting in a change of speed Important Changes to these parameters are ignored when Parameter 47 Peer Inp Enable is 1 On Important If the parameter is set to input a Logic Command configure the mask in Parameter 40 Peer Cmd Mask so that the desired bits from the Peer device are used Peer Cmd Mask Sets the mask for the Logic Command word when it is received through peer input If the mask bit is 0 Off the command bit is ignored and not used If the mask bit is 1 On the command bit is checked and used Important If the adapter receives a Logic Command from both a Master device and a Peer device each command bit must have only one source The source of command bits set to 0 will be
367. tatus Not Used Feedback LSW Feedback MSW Datalink Qut 41 LSW Datalink Out A1 MSW Datalink Qut A2 LSW Datalink Out A2 MSW Datalink Out B1 LSW Datalink Out B1 MSW Datalink Out B2 LSW Datalink Qut B2 MSW Datalink Out C1 LSW Datalink Out C1 MSW Datalink Qut C2 LSW Datalink Out C2 MSW Datalink Qut D1 LSW Datalink Qut D1 MSW Datalink Qut D2 LSW Datalink Out D2 MSW Output Image Logic Command Not Used Reference LSW Reference MSW Datalink In LSW Datalink In MSW Datalink In A2 LSW Datalink In 2 MSW Datalink In B1 LSW Datalink In B1 MSW Datalink In B2 LSW Datalink In B2 MSW PowerFlex 70 Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive For PowerFlex 7 Class drives the scaling may need to be multiplied by 10 or 100 depending on the parameter For more information see Datalink Scaling on page 5 7 Using the I O 5 17 Figure 5 11 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile for PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Datalink Scaling OP Copy File Source My PowerFlex Drive l Data 6 Dest DC Bus voltage Length 2 Copy File Source My PowerFlex Drive l Data 8 Dest Open Loop Fdbk Length 2 Copy File Source My PowerFlex Drive l Data 10 Dest Anlg Out0 Data Length 2 Copy File Source Accel Time 1 Dest My PowerFlex Drive O Data 4 Length 2 Copy File Source Testpoint Sel 1 Dest PowerFlex Drive O Data 6 Length 2
368. tatus Reference Feedback and Datalinks may be enabled or disabled Datalinks allow you to read write directly to parameters in the drive using implicit I O A 1 enables the I O and a 0 disables the I O l Setthe bits in Parameter 23 DPI I O Cfg Figure 3 10 Example DPI I O Cfg LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Bit X Description 20 COMM E 0 Logic Command Reference Default Parameter 23 1 Datalink A DPI I O Cfg 2 Datalink B paire 4 Datalink D 5 15 Not Used Bit 0 is the right most bit In Figure 3 10 it is highlighted and equals 1 2 Ifa controller is used to control the drive adapter Parameters 35 M S Input and 36 M S Output for Master Slave Hierarchy must be set see Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy Scanner to Drive Communication on page 3 9 3 If Logic Command Reference is enabled configure the parameters in the drive to accept the Logic Command and Reference from the adapter 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer Configuring the Adapter 3 9 For example set Parameter 90 Speed Ref A Sel in a PowerFlex 70 or 700 drive to 22 DPI Port 5 so that the drive uses the Reference from the adapter Also verify that the mask parameters for example Parameter 276 Logic Mask in the drive are configured to receive the desired logic from the adapter Refer to t
369. tegers separated by periods XXX XXX XXX XXX Each can have a decimal value from 0 to 255 For example an IP address could be 192 168 0 1 An IP address has two parts a network ID and a host ID The class of network determines the format of the address 0 1 7 15 23 31 Class A 0 Network ID Host ID 0 1 7 15 23 31 Class 1 0 Network ID Host ID 012 7 15 23 31 Class 1 1 0 Network ID Host ID The number of devices on your EtherNet IP network will vary depending on the number of bytes that are used for the network address In many cases you are given a network with a Class C address in which the first three bytes contain the network address subnet mask 255 255 255 0 This leaves 8 bits or 256 addresses on your network Because two addresses are reserved for special uses 0 is an address for the network usually used by the router and 255 is an address for broadcast messages to all network devices you have 254 addresses to use on a Class C address block To ensure that each device on the Internet has a unique address contact your network administrator or Internet Service Provider for unique fixed IP addresses You can then set the unique IP address for the adapter by using a BOOTP server or by manually configuring parameters in the adapter The adapter reads the values of these parameters only at power up Logic Command Logic Status The Logic Command is used to control the
370. ter Number decimal Scattered Write Request 141 INT Scattered Write Request 1 111 INT Scattered Write Request 2 0 INT Scattered Write Request 3 143 INT Scattered Write Request 4 INT Scattered Write Request 5 INT Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number decimal Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Scattered Write Request 5 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Request 7 INT Scattered Write Request 8 INT Scattered Write Request S INT Scattered Write Request 10 INT Scattered Write Request 11 0 INT Scattered Write Request 12 7 INT Scattered Write Request 13 INT Scattered Write Request 14 INT Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number decimal Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number decimal Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW ControlLogix Example Scattered Write Response Data The results of the message appear in the destination tag named Scattered Write Response Figure 6 16 Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 16 Using Explicit Messaging Figure 6 16 Example Scattered Write Response Data for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Data Type Scattered Write Response INT 15 Scattered Write Response U INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Response 1 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write
371. ter directs the communication adapter to not send Datalink D data back to the drive For more information on I O Messaging and Configuring Datalinks see Chapter 5 Using the I O If the I O Board Fault Action Jumper JMP1 is set to the Fault Configurable position Parameter 33 FIt Cfg D1 In is used to set the states of the outputs when the I O Board takes its Fault Action For details on setting the Fault Action Jumper see the O Board Option Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO02 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 9 4 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE Viewing Optional I O Diagnostic Items 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Viewing communication adapter diagnostic item 56 OPT Status shows the operating status of the optional I O board Bit State Status Indication Description 0 1 On OPT Present data is being exchanged with the adapter 1 1 On Faulted The I O board is taking its fault action 2 1 On Hold Last Fault Action is Hold Last 3 1 On Send Fit Cfg Fault Action is Fault Config Viewing communication adapter diagnostic item 57 OPT RX Errors shows the number of I O board receive errors Viewing communication adapter diagnostic item 58 OPT FW Version shows the present firmware version of the optional I O board Diagnostic item 13 Datalin
372. tes for example 4 bytes fora DINT or a REAL When using a PowerFlex 700S drive Accel Time 1 is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when creating the controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 8 Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters all versions A Scattered Read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters Up to 22 parameters can be read This read message example reads the values of these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive PowerFlex 750 Series Drive e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 001 Output Freq e Parameter 003 Output Current e Parameter 007 Output Current e Parameter 006 Output Voltage e Parameter 137 Open Loop Fdbk e Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage e Parameter 21581 Port 5 Analog Out 0 Data e Parameter 017 Analog In1 Value e Parameter 260 Analog 1 0 Value Refer to DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F for parameter numbering Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class
373. teway Cfg 2 Gateway Cfg 3 Gateway Cfg 4 3 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 17 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 3 8 Configuring the Adapter Setting the Data Rate By default the adapter is set to autodetect so it automatically detects the data rate and duplex setting used on the network If you need to set a specific data rate and duplex setting the value of Parameter 16 EN Rate Cfg determines the Ethernet data rate and duplex setting that the adapter will use to communicate For definitions of data rate and duplex refer to the Glossary l Setthe value of Parameter 16 EN Rate Cfg to the data rate at which your network is operating Figure 3 9 Example Ethernet Rate Cfg LCD HIM Screen Port 5 Device Value Data Rate 20 COMM E 0 Autodetect default Parameter 16 1 10 Mbps Full EN Rate Cfg 2 10 Mbps Half Autodetect 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half gt TIP Auto detection of baud rate and duplex works properly only if the device usually a switch on the other end of the cable is also set to auto detect the baud rate duplex If one device has the baud rate duplex hard coded the other device must be hard coded to the same settings 2 Resetthe adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 3 17 Setting the I O The I O configuration determines the data that is sent to and from the drive Configuration Logic Command S
374. text 1 ENUM text 8 Writable 0 Read only 1 Read write 9 Not Writable When Enabled 0 Writable when enabled for example drive running 1 Not writable when enabled 10 Instance 0 Parameter value is not a Reference to another parameter 1 Parameter value refers to another parameter 11 Uses Bit ENUM Mask This parameter instance supports the Bit ENUM Mask attribute For more information see the definition of the attribute 12 Decimal Place Bit 0 Number of digits to the right of the decimal point 13 Decimal Place Bit 1 0000 0 14 Decimal Place Bit 2 15 Decimal Place Bit 3 16 Extended Data Type Bit 4 Right bit is least significant bit 16 T ERE o DOR d as an array of Boolean p used a 18 Extended Data Type Bit 6 010 Reserved 011 Reserved 100 Reserved 101 Reserved 110 Reserved 111 Reserved 19 Parameter Exists Used to mark parameters that are not available to network tools 20 NotUsed Reserved 21 Formula Links Indicates the Formula Data is derived from other parameters 22 Access Level Bit 1 A 3 bit field used to control access to parameter data 23 Access Level Bit 2 24 Access Level Bit 25 Writable ENUM ENUM text 0 Read Only 1 Read Write 26 Nota Link Source 0 May be the source end of a link 1 May not be the source end of a link 27 Enhanced Bit ENUM Parameter supports enhanced bit ENUMs 28 Enhanced ENUM Parameter suppor
375. that can be accessed using Explicit Messages For information on the format of Explicit Messages and example ladder logic programs refer to Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging Object Class Code Page Object Class Code Page Hex Dec Hex Dec Identity Object 0x01 1 C 2 DPI Fault Object 0x97 151 22 Assembly Object 0x04 4 C 3 DPI Alarm Object 0x98 152 C 24 Register Object 0x07 7 C4 DPI Diagnostic Object 0x99 153 26 Parameter Object 7 15 C 5 DPI Time Object Ox9B 155 C 28 Parameter Group Object 7 10 10 16 C 7 Host DPI Parameter Object 0x9F 159 30 PCCC Object 0x67 103 C 8 TCP IP Interface Object OxF5 245 C 36 DPI Device Object 0x92 146 C 13 Ethernet Link Object OxF6 246 C 37 DPI Parameter Object 0x93 147 16 1 These objects are NOT supported when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive This object is supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive p TIP Refer to the EtherNet IP specification for more information about EtherNet IP objects Information about the EtherNet IP specification is available on the ODVA web site http www odva org Supported Data Types Data Type Description BOOL 8 bit value low bit is true or false BOOL n Array of n bits BYTE 8 bit unsigned integer CONTAINER 32 bit paramete
376. the Master device The source of command bits set to 1 will be the Peer device Adapter Parameters B 5 Details Default xxx0 0001 Bit Values 0 I O disabled 1 1 0 enabled Read Write Reset Required Yes Bit Definition ink D Input ink C Input ink B Input ink A Input o Cmd Ref Used Used Used al al Default Bit N x x m oj Datal o Dal x No o Dal Default xxxO 0001 Bit Values 0 I O disabled 1 1 0 enabled Read Write Reset Required Yes ink D Output ink C Output ink B Output ink A Output Bit Definition 8 8 9 22 2 sss s c o loils sis c 21212 1 Default X X x 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Default 100 00 Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 00 Type Read Write Reset Required No ATTENTION To guard against equipment damage and or personal injury note that changes to Parameter 37 Ref Adjust take effect immediately A drive receiving its Reference from the adapter will receive the newly scaled Reference Default 0 Off Default 0 Off Values 0 Off 1 Cmd Ref 2 Datalink A Input 3 Datalink B Input 4 Datalink C Input 5 Datalink D Input Type Read Write Reset Required No Default 0000 0000 0000 0000 Minimum 0000 0000 0000 0000 Maximum 1111 1111 1111 1111 Values 0 Ignore bit 1 Check bit Type Read Writ
377. the drive after an I O communications fault and or idle fault occurs You must set these parameters to values required by your application Parameter Description 25 Flt Cfg Logic A 16 bit value sent to the drive for Logic Command 26 Flt Cfg Ref A 32 bit value 0 4294967295 sent to the drive as a Reference or Datalink 27 Fit Cfg x1 In Important If the drive uses a 16 bit Reference or 16 bit Datalinks the most through significant word of the value must be set to zero 0 or a fault will occur 34 Flt Cfg x2 In Changes to these parameters take effect immediately A reset is not required Setting Web Access Control By using a web browser to access the IP address set for the adapter you can view the adapter s web pages for information about the adapter its connected drive and other DPI devices connected to the drive such as HIMs or converters Additionally the adapter can be configured to automatically send e mail messages to desired addresses when selected drive faults occur and or are cleared and or when the adapter takes a communication or idle fault action For more details on the adapter s web pages refer to Chapter 8 Viewing the Adapter s Web Pages gt TIP Series A adapter web pages are accessed differently than Series B web pages Enabling disabling e mail configuration is also different Series A Adapter firmware version 2 002 or earlier By default the Series A adapter web pages a
378. the network Corrective Actions If NET A indicator is off e Securely connect the adapter to the drive using the Internal Interface ribbon cable and to the network using an Ethernet cable e Correctly connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector e Seta unique IP address using a BOOTP server or by disabling BOOTP and using adapter parameters If NET A indicator is steady red e Configure the adapter to use a unique IP address and cycle power If NET A indicator is flashing red green or red e Check the IP address in the adapter and scanner and verify that the controller can communicate with the adapter e Ping the adapter Normal condition if the adapter is idle Flashing Green The adapter is properly connected BOOTP is enabled and the adapter is transmitting data packets on the network No action required 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 7 4 Troubleshooting Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items If you encounter unexpected communications problems the adapter s diagnostic items may help you or Rockwell Automation personnel troubleshoot the problem Adapter diagnostic items can be viewed using an LCD PowerFlex 7 Class HIM Diagnostics Device Items DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later or DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later Using the HIM to View Adapter Diagnostic Items Step Example Screen 1 Access parameters
379. the starting word of the destination file Service Generic Get Attribute Single Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex 4 Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 2 3 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number Attribute 9 Dec Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 For example to read parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of a PowerFlex 750 Series drive the instance would be 21504 4 21508 See DPI Parameter Object on page C 16 Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F to determine the instance number 9 n this example Output Current is a 32 bit parameter If the parameter being read is a 16 bit parameter the Size in Words would be set to 1 When the parameter being read is a 32 bit REAL floating point data type the size in words would be set to 2 See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 3
380. tion if set to 0 Ready Resets the adapter if set to 1 Reset Module Restores the adapter to its factory default settings if set to 2 Set Defaults This parameter is a command It will be reset to 0 Ready after the command has been performed 1 Reset Module 2 Set Defaults Type Read Write Reset Required No transmitting I O that controls the drive the drive may fault when you reset the ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If the adapter is AN adapter Determine how your drive will respond before resetting a connected adapter 21 Comm Fit Action Default 0 Fault Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take if Values z Tay the adapter detects that I O messaging 25 Pus communications have been disrupted This setting is ad p a effective only if I O that controls the drive is transmitted 3 _ Bs ers through the adapter When communication is Tos n NI t Cig re established the drive will automatically receive bns Required NS rite commands over the network again eset Required No Flt Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if I O communications are disrupted By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system
381. tions for PowerFlex 70 700 700H drives D 1 PowerFlex 700S drives D 3 PowerFlex 750 Series drives D 5 definition G 5 in I O image for ControlLogix controller 5 2 PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 controllers 5 4 using 5 5 M MAC address see hardware address manual conventions P 3 related documentation P 1 web site P 1 Master Slave hierarchy configuring adapter for 3 9 definition G 6 mechanical dimensions A 2 messages see explicit messaging or I O MicroLogix 1100 controller configuring the 1 0 4 38 explicit messaging 6 53 limitations when using the I O 4 21 using the I O 5 18 MOD status indicator locating 1 6 troubleshooting with 7 2 mounting the adapter 2 5 M S Input parameter B 5 M S Input parameter configurations 3 9 M S Output parameter B 5 M S Output parameter configurations 3 10 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Index 4 N NET A status indicator locating 1 6 troubleshooting with 7 3 NET B status indicator locating 1 6 troubleshooting with 7 3 network cable 2 6 network IDs G 5 Non Volatile Storage NVS definition G 6 in adapter 3 1 in drive 5 7 0 objects list of C 1 to C 38 ODVA EtherNet IP specification G 3 P Parameter Group object C 7 Parameter object C 5 parameters accessing 3 1 convention P 3 list of B 1 to B 8 numbering scheme B 1 restoring to factory default settings 3 17 PCCC Programmable Controlle
382. to expand and view the Port folders for all present DPI devices including the drive adapter and other DPI devices connected to the drive such as a HIM Port x folders Click a respective Port folder to expand and view its device s various links which take you to related information pages For Port 0 PowerFlex 70 Drive example information pages see Figure 8 8 Figure 8 9 and Figure 8 10 Online user manuals link Click this link to view Rockwell Automation s web page with documentation for drives and other devices Software tools Web site link e ick this link to view Allen Bradley s web page with information about software tools such as DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive Launch my DriveExplorer software link Q ick this link to launch the DriveExplorer software already installed on your PC Launch my DriveExecutive software link Q ick this link to launch the DriveExecutive software already installed on your PC E mail technical support link e ick this link to view a new e mail message window to send a message to Allen Bradley s Technical Support Team Information on Adapter Home Page The adapter Home Page displays the following information for the adapter and its host drive Information for Adapter Description e Revision e P Address e Ethernet Address MAC e Serial Number e Status e O Connection Status Host X Drive e Revision e Status
383. to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project refer to Table 5 G Table 5 J starting on page 5 20 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive refer to Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 5 19 3 For details on setting the control timeout value and its function see N Files on page C 10 The Control Timeout N42 3 is stored in RAM If the 20 COMM E adapter is power cycled the Control Timeout Message must be re sent If the Control Timeout is not changed from a non zero value the control message page 4 28 will error out gt TIP The Control Timeout N42 3 must be changed to a non zero value 5 20 seconds recommended If the Control Timeout is not changed from a non zero value the control message page 4 28 will error out The Control Timeout is stored in RAM If the adapter is power cycled the Control Timeout Message must be re sent 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 26 Configuring the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Creating PLC 5 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status Feedback and Datalink Out Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG MGxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG11 n and nis an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG11 0 Then pr
384. tructure Guidelines ODVA publication 35 EtherNet IP Performance Application Solutions Rockwell publication ENET APO001 e Understand IGMP Snooping Ethernet Switches The 20 COMM E adapter is a multicast device In most situations an IGMP snooping managed switch is required If more than one or two 20 COMM E adapters are connected to the switch a managed switch is required otherwise the drive may fault on a DPI Port x network loss The 20 COMM E Series B adapter firmware version 4 001 or later RSLogix 5000 version 18 or later and a ControlLogix or CompactLogix controller will support unicast When all ethernet connections are set up as unicast devices in RSLogix 5000 then an IGMP snooping managed switch is not needed Much of EtherNet IP implicit I O messaging uses IP multicast to distribute I O control data which is consistent with the CIP producer consumer model Historically most switches have treated multicast packets the same as broadcast packets That is all multicast packets are re transmitted to all ports 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 2 2 Installing the Adapter Setting the Web Pages Switch Series B only 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P IGMP snooping constrains the flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically configuring switch ports so that multicast traffic is forwarded only to ports associated with a particul
385. ts for example data to write to a drive parameter Data Out parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter Using the I O 5 13 Controller Tags When you add the adapter and drive to the I O configuration Chapter 4 RSLogix 5000 automatically creates generic non descriptive controller tags for them In this example program the following controller tags are used Figure 5 4 ControlLogix Controller Tags for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Name Er My PowerFlex Drive liz My PowerFlex Drive l _ My PowerFlex Drive O Data Type Description You can expand the Input and Output tags to reveal the input and output configuration Figure 5 5 ControlLogix Input Image for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Data Type Description Name amp DataType Description My PowerFles Drive l AB ETHER My PowerFlex Drive l Data INT 12 Input Image My PowerFlex Drive l Data 0 INT Pad Word My PowerFles Drive l Data 1 INT Pad Word My PowerFles Drive l Data 2 INT Logic Status My PowerFlex Drive l Data 3 INT Speed Feedback PowerFlex 70 Drive My PowerFlex Diivel Data 4 INT Datalink Out A1 16 bit Speed Feedback and My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 5 INT Datalink Out 42 Datal i
386. ts enhanced ENUMs 29 Uses DPI Limits Object Parameter uses the DPI LImits Object 30 Extended Descriptor Parameter uses Extended Descriptor bits which can be obtained by reading the DPI Extended Descriptor attribute for this parameter 31 Always Upload Download _ Parameter shall always be included in uploads and downloads 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 20 EtherNet IP Objects Extended Descriptor Attributes Bit Name Description 0 Indirect Mode 0 Analog selects entire parameters 1 Digital selects individual bits within parameters 1 Indirect Type 0 Analog input list Instance OXFFFF 2 Indirect Type 1 Digital input list Instance OXFFFE 3 Indirect Type 2 Feedback list Instance OXFFFD 4 Indirect Type 3 Analog output list Instance OXFFFC 5 Indirect Type 4 Digital output list Instance OxFFFB 6 Indirect Type 5 Undefined Instance OxFFFA 7 Indirect Type 6 Undefined Instance OxFFF9 8 Indirect Type 7 Undefined Instance 0xFFF8 9 Indirect Type 8 Undefined Instance OxFFF7 10 Indirect Type 9 Undefined Instance 0xFFF6 11 Indirect Type 10 Undefined Instance OxFFF5 12 Indirect Type 11 Undefined Instance OxFFF4 13 Indirect Type 12 Undefined Instance OxFFF3 14 Indirect Type 13 Undefined Instance OxFFF2 15 Indirect Type 14 Parameter specific list 16 FP Max Decimals Bit 0 These four
387. type and command type for controller to write data to the drive Data Table Address N50 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the source file Size in Elements 20 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Port Number 2 Controller port to which the network is connected Data Table Address N151 30 2 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive MultiHop Yes Enables communication to allow network messaging to be routed to the drive MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 0 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit parameter Because the N151 file used for the data transfer occupies two contiguous 16 bit words the Size in Elements must always be set to 2 regardless of whether the parameter being written to is a 16 bit parameter or a 32 bit parameter 2 See page C 11 for N file addressing Below are some examples of how to address N files N File Address Data Type Description Notes N151 30 16 bit integer Parameter 140 of PowerFlex 70 drive N150 50 32 bit REAL Parameter 25 of PowerFlex 750 Series drive Example ladder logic rungs N155 200 32 bit integer Parameter 725 of PowerFlex 750 Series drive are shown in Figure 6 33 for N209 156 32 bit REAL Port 5 Parameter 78 of 24V I O module in these three different
388. ue Display Value x Divisor x 10Decima Places Multiplier x Base Offset Common Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Object Specific Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Allocation Size in bytes Class Instance Par Number Par Value 0 40 Yes No Get Attributes Scattered 4 4 Ox4E Yes No Set_Attributes_Scattered 4 4 The table below lists the parameters for the Get_Attributes_Scattered and Set_Attributes_Scattered object specific service Name Data Type Description Parameter Number UDINT Parameter to read or write Parameter Value UDINT Parameter value to read or write zero when reading 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 36 EtherNet IP Objects TCP IP Interface Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal OxF5 245 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances The adapter supports one instance of the TCP IP Interface object Number Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Object Attributes Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Type Description 1 The revision of this object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Status of TCP I
389. ule Name Data Type Description 1 Parameter Value 2 Get Link Path Size BYTE 0 No link specified n The size of Attribute 3 in bytes 3 Get Link Path 4 4 Get Descriptor WORD 0 False 1 True Bit 1 Supports ENUMs Bit 2 Supports scaling Bit 3 Supports scaling links Bit 4 Read only Bit 5 Monitor Bit 6 Extended precision scaling 5 Get Data Type BYTE 1 WORD 16 bit 2 UINT 16 bit 3 INT 16 bit 5 SINT 6 DINT 8 USINT 9 UDINT 11 REAL 22 SHORT_STRING 24 BYTE 25 DWORD 6 Get Data Size BYTE 3 7 Get Parameter Name String SHORT STRING 8 Get Units String SHORT STRING 9 Get Help String SHORT STRING Null string 10 Get Minimum Value e 3 11 Get Maximum Value e 3 12 Get Default Value e 3 13 Get Scaling Multiplier WORD 3 14 Get Scaling Divisor WORD 3 15 Get Scaling Base WORD 3 16 Get Scaling Offset WORD 3 17 Get Multiplier Link WORD 3 18 Get Divisor Link WORD 3 19 Get Base Link WORD 3 20 Get Offset Link WORD 3 21 Get Decimal Precision BYTE 3 2 3 4 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Value varies based on parameter instance Refer to the EtherNet IP specification for a description of the link path 1 Access rule is defined in Bit 4 of instance attribute 4 0 Get Set 1 Get Specified in descriptor data type and data size EtherNet IP Objects C 7 Parameter G
390. uliHop ves Extended Routing Info File RIX Rix15 0 Error Service Code hex Service Generic Get Attribute Single Class hex 93 deck 147 Instance hex 3 deck 3 Attribute 8 deck 9 Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Comm Command Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address N40 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Size in Bytes 4 Number of bytes to be transferred Each byte size is an 8 bit integer Extended Routing RIX15 0 An unused routing information file for the controller Service 1 Generic Get Attribute Single Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 2 3 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number Attribute 9 Dec Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling
391. ur application and click OK The RSLogix 500 project window appears 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 32 Configuring the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Creating SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout 1 In the RSLogix 500 project window treeview under Program Files double click on LAD 2 Insert a ladder rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter MSG WRITE 500CPU LOCAL Nxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example N10 n and n is an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example N10 0 Then press Enter Insert another separate rung double click on the rung to display the rung editor and enter BST XIC Nxx n DN NXB XIC Nxx n ER BND OTU Nxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example N10 0 for the message created in Step 2 Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for and for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown Then press Enter In the MSG instruction double click on Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 4 35 Figure 4 34 SLC 500 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout MSG Read Write Message CEND Type Peer To Peer Read Write Write DN 5 Target Device 500CPU Local Remote Local CER gt
392. ure 8 7 Example of E mail Message Sent by Adapter 20 COMM E 10 91 100 79 Talllidoe example com 01 10 2007 03 17 bcc Subject Notice from example drive Seq 0 Drive at 10 91 100 79 reported fault 81 Port 1 DPI Loss This is an automated message from the 20 COMM E EtherNet IP adapter at IP address 10 91 100 79 Please do not reply to this message as the adapter cannot process replies The DPI host has logged the following fault trip Fault code 81 Fault text Port 1 DPI Loss See this device s Web page at http 10 91 100 79 gt TIP To stop e mail messages uncheck all of the Send an e mail message when boxes e For Series A adapters disabling the adapter web pages by using Parameter 54 Access Control to set the Web Enable Bit value to 0 Disabled will NOT stop the adapter from sending e mail messages e For Series B adapters disabling the adapter web pages by setting the Web Pages Switch SW2 in Figure 2 1 to the Disable Web position will NOT stop the adapter from sending e mail messages 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P DPI Device Information Pages Viewing the Adapters Web Pages 8 9 DPI device information pages are viewed by clicking on the respective links in the navigation menu Web Page Module Information Description Shows module information for the respective Port device For
393. us Indications Item o Name STS Status Color Green State Flashing Drive Description STS Indicator Drive ready but not running and no faults are present Steady Drive running no faults are present Yellow Flashing An inhibit condition exists the drive cannot be Drive Stopped started Check drive Parameter 214 Start Inhibits Flashing An intermittent type 1 alarm condition is occurring Drive Running Check drive Parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Steady A continuous type 1 alarm condition exists Check Drive Running drive Parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Red Flashing A fault has occurred Steady A non resettable fault has occurred Adapter Status Indicators e PORT Green Flashing Normal Operation The adapter is establishing an I O connection to the drive It will turn steady green or red Steady Normal Operation The adapter is properly connected and communicating with the drive MOD Green Flashing Normal Operation The adapter is operating but is not transferring I O data to a controller Steady Normal Operation The adapter is operating and transferring I O data to a controller NETA Green Off Normal operation BOOTP is enabled or a valid IP address is not set Flashing Normal Operation BOOTP is disabled the adapter is properly connected has an IP address and is connected to an EtherNet IP network but does not have
394. ve Data File N90 dec 26214 16689 538 26214 16817 725 0 21555 0 16560 780 10019 2 Radix Decimal z Columns 10 The results of the explicit message appear in the destination tag array N80 Eigure 6 63 Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 6 63 Example Scattered Write Response Data File for PowerFlex 750 Series Drive Data File N80 dec 0 21555 iE Radix Decimal 4 Columns 10 20 COMM E EtherNev IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 6 52 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Using Explicit Messaging Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P SLC 500 Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read Write Multiple Messaging The data structures in Figure 6 64 and Figure 6 65 use 16 bit words and can accommodate up to 22 parameters in a single message In the Response Message a parameter number with the high bit set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code parameter number in response data will be negative Important See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using Class code 0x93 or Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging Figure 6 64 Data Structures for Scattered Read Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data
395. ve The status indicators should be green If they flash red there is a problem Refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting B Configure verify key drive parameters 5 Configure the adapter for your application Chapter 3 Set adapter parameters for the following functions as required by Configuring the Adapter your application e P address subnet mask and gateway address e Data rate e O configuration e Master Slave or Peer to Peer hierarchy e Fault actions 6 Configure the controller to communicate with the adapter Chapter 4 1 Configuring the I O Use a controller configuration tool such as RSLogix to configure the master on the EtherNet IP network to recognize the adapter and drive 7 Create a ladder logic program Chapter 5 Use a controller configuration tool such as RSLogix to create a Using the VO ladder logic program that enables you to Chapter 6 e Control the adapter and connected drive using I O e Monitor or configure the drive using Explicit messages Using Explicit Messaging 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UMO10E EN P 1 6 Getting Started Status Indicators The adapter uses four status indicators to report its operating status They can be viewed on the adapter or through the drive cover Figure 1 2 Figure 1 2 Status Indicators location on drive may vary OOOOOC OOOOO o L CY CC C SERED OLD Allen Bradley A MEN Power P Ot
396. ve set the correct revision in this screen Refer to the online Help for additional information on this and other Electronic Keying settings If keying is not required select Disable Keying Drives do not require keying and so Disable Keying is recommended Drive Rating The voltage and current rating of the drive If the drive rating is not listed the drive database is not installed on your computer To get the correct drive rating use the Create Database Web Update or Match Drive button described above Connection Parameters via Datalinks When selecting Parameters via Datalinks default the controller tags for the Datalinks use the drive parameter names to which they are assigned When selecting Datalinks the controller tags for the Datalinks have non descriptive UserDefinedData n names like those used in RSLogix 5000 version 15 Data Format Parameters When the Connection field is set to Parameters via Datalinks Parameters is automatically selected When the Connection field is set to Datalinks you must select the number of Datalinks required for your application in the Data Format field Datalink In the Input Data column assigns selected drive parameters to be READ by the A B C D controller In the Output Data column assigns selected drive parameters to be WRITTEN by the controller SortInput When this box is checked sorts the Input Data and Output Data assigned
397. wW 20 18 ATTE 00011 us 1111 Table 4 C PowerFlex 700S 750 Series 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings Command 32 bit Size in Words Par 23 Par 35 Par 36 Status B C D input Output DPI VO Cfg M S Input 5 Output v v 6 4 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 v v v 10 8 0 0011 1 00011 00011 v v v 14 00111 00111 00111 v v vvv 18 16 01111 01111 1 0 1111 v v w wW 22 21111111111 us 1111 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P 4 18 Configuring the I O 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P TIP For instructions on configuring the I O for the adapter using Parameter 23 DPI I O Cfg and its Master Slave Hierarchy using Parameters 35 M S Input and 36 M S Output see Setting the I O Configuration on page 3 8 When using Datalinks up to 8 drive Data In xx parameters 300 307 and or up to 8 Data Out xx parameters 310 317 must be assigned to point to the appropriate drive parameters for your application After setting the information in the drive s New Module screen click OK The Module Properties screen appears Click the Connection tab Figure 4 21 Figure 4 21 Module Properties Connection Tab Screen General Connection Module Info Requested Packet Interval RPI 10024 ms 1 0
398. which may take up to a minute to complete the I O OK box in the upper left of the RSLogix 5000 window should now be steady green and the yellow warning symbols in the treeview under the I O Configuration folder and drive profile should be gone TIP If the yellow warning symbol for your drive remains displayed first try power cycling the drive Otherwise double click the drive under the I O tree and click the Connection tab to find the cause of the problem Configuring the I O 4 13 4 The Module Properties Drive Tab screen Figure 4 17 re appears You can view the drive s Parameter List Diagnostic Items List and lists for any connected peripheral including the 20 COMM E While connected to the drive you can dynamically change values of parameters Diagnostic items and diagram views can be used for troubleshooting Table 7 A on page 7 4 provides diagnostic items for troubleshooting the adapter Figure 4 17 Module Properties Drive Tab Screen Iii Module Properties My_EtherNet_IP_Bridge PowerFlex 70 EC E 2 3 General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Drive Drive Pl My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive pat 021 0 PowerFlex 70 EC My_PowerFlex_70_ Diagrams 18 Parameter List PowerFlex 70 EC 29 Diagnostic Item List fig 1 20HIM ax SER 480V 2 1A 9 Device Parameters 19 Diagnostic Item List f 5 20 COMM E 1 Device Parameters 18 Diagnostic Item List A Revision 2 003 Fault
399. x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object on page C 30 Class code Ox9F to determine the instance number 3 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder 4 See Table 6 A on page 6 2 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 750 Series drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 or Host DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F for explicit messaging 9 n this example Output Current is a 32 bit parameter requiring the Data Type field to be set to DINT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being read is a 16 bit parameter the tag Data Type field must be set to INT When using PowerFlex 7005 or PowerFlex 750 Series drive Output Current is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when the creating controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P Using Explicit Messaging 6 21 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter all versions A Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in PowerFlex 7 Class drive Table 6 G Example Controller Tags to Write a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Write Message Data
400. y Information STRUCT of DWORD _ Rating Code DWORD Device Serial Number WORD Customization Code WORD Customization Revision WORD Brand Code BYTE Family Code BYTE Config Code BYTE Language Code BYTE Major Revision BYTE Minor Revision BYTE 16 Customer Generated Firmware UUID 35 Get NVS CRC DWORD A 32 bit CRC of the Non Volatile Storage in a device 39 Get SI Driver Code WORD Code identifying the protocol between the device and host 128 Get Customization Code WORD Code identifying the customized device 129 Get Customization Revision Number WORD Revision of the customized device 130 Get Customization Device Text STRING 32 Text identifying the customized device Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 3 Get Component Name STRING 32 Name of the component 4 Get Component Firmware Revision STRUCT of BYTE Major Revision BYTE Minor Revision 8 Get Component Serial Number DWORD Value between 0x00000000 and OxFFFFFFFF 9 Get International Component Name STRINGN Name of the component with support for Unicode 20 COMM E EtherNet IP Adapter User Manual Publication 20COMM UM010E EN P C 16 EtherNet IP Objects DPI Parameter Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x93 147 To access Host Config parameters use the HOST DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F Instances The number of instances depends on the number o
401. y personnel troubleshoot the problem The following events may appear in the event queue Table 7 B Adapter Events Code Event Description 1 No Event Empty event queue entry 2 DPI Bus Off Flt A bus off condition was detected on DPI This event may be caused by loose or broken cables or by noise 3 Ping Time Fit A ping message was not received on DPI within the specified time 4 Port ID Fit The adapter is not connected to a correct port on a DPI product 5 Port Change Fit The DPI port changed after start up 6 Host Sent Reset The drive sent a reset event message 7 EEPROM Sum Fit The EEPROM in the adapter is corrupt 8 Online 125kbps The adapter detected that the drive is communicating at 125 kbps 9 Online 500kbps The adapter detected that the drive is communicating at 500 kbps 10 Host Fit The adapter was connected to an incompatible product 11 Dup Port Fit Another peripheral with the same port number is already in use 12 Type 0 Login The adapter has logged in for Type 0 control 13 Type 0 Time Fit The adapter has not received a Type 0 status message within the specified time 14 DL Login The adapter has logged into a Datalink 15 Reject Fit The drive rejected an attempt to log in to a Datalink because the Datalink is not supported or is used by another peripheral 16 DL Time

20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents